Home

TeSys T LTM R Modbus Motor Management Controller User`s Manual

1. Step Description Screen display 1 Navigate to the Long Start Fault Timeout parameter Long Start Fault Time 2 Press the Gee button to step into the Long Start Fault Fault Time Timeout setting The sign indicates the displayed value is the saved setting 010 Sec 3 Press the Gee button again to select the first left most Fault Time digit for editing Because 0 is the desired value for the first digit this digit will not be edited 0 Sec 4 Press the Ere button again to select the second digit Fault Time for editing 01 Sec 5 Press the CS button once to increment the second Fault Time digit to the value 2 02 Sec 6 Press the Ere button to select the third digit for editing Fault Time 020 Sec 7 Press the Co button 5 times to increment the second Fault Time digit to the value 5 025 Sec 360 1639501 12 2006 Use Step Description Screen display 8 After you have entered the new value press the Fault Time button to save the setting The changes to a indicating the edited value is now this parameter s 025 Sec saved setting After displaying the new setting for 2 seconds the HMI returns to the previous higher level screen Long Start Fault Time 1639501 12 2006 361 Use Menu Structure 1 to 1 Overview In a 1 to 1 configuration the Magelis XBTN410 H
2. Jam fault Step Description LCD Displays 1 LCD display is scrolling the configurable R parameter list Note that the LTM R Ohm controller is in remote control mode 6230 Run Temp Sensor NTC 2 Occurrence of a Jam fault Jam fault fault code 6 is displayed R The fault screen persists until the 6 underlying Jam condition is cleared and FAULT fault reset Ready Jam Rey 4 In this case the measured current value falls below the Jam Fault Threshold setting Reset command is executed The LCD display resumes scrolling the R configurable parameter list in Ready 111 state 0 Rdy Thermal Cap 7 A Start command is executed and the R LCD display resumes scrolling in Run play g 80 FLC state o Run Current Avg 388 1639501 12 2006 Use HMI Keypad Control 1 to 1 Overview Stop Reset In a 1 to 1 configuration the functionality of the Stop and Reset buttons remain constant whereas the functionality of the HMI keypad Aux1 and Aux2 keys depends on the e selected operating mode and e control wiring Remember that the HMI keypad commands the LTM R controller s logic outputs only when e logic input 1 6 is inactive and e Control Local Channel Setting parameter is set to Local HMI The functions of the following keys do not vary according to the operating mode selection in a properly wired configuration Key Fu
3. 548 1639501 12 2006 NEMA Format Wiring Diagrams Two Speed Mode Wiring Diagrams Separate Winding Application The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse local control wiring Diagram with diagram 3 Wire Impulse Local Control pees I LOW LOW LOW 1639501 12 2006 549 NEMA Format Wiring Diagrams Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Local Control Application Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Local Control with Network Control Selectable Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Local control The following application diagram features a diagram L Low Speed O Off 2 wire maintained local control wiring H High Speed D e D oA Cc 1 3 14 15 C The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse local control with network control selectable wiring diagram H Hand Local Control O Off A Automatic Network Control H x ie STOP Q10 A t A1 LOW ems o o Al o eatin o fe 5 i HIGH war ees eo o ee ee Ith ter Meek II fey he The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained local control with network control selectable wiring diagram H Hand Local Control
4. H H H hy SIC CIC ICIS ICIS Cree fOOCS El oE QOQ ErLrRRPREeERRER IH HIH H H H H H H HH A oil 4 Note You must wire the ground fault current transformer before wiring the power supply 296 1639501 12 2006 Installation GFCTs are specified with a transformation ratio The ratio of the GFCT is the ratio of the ground fault current sensed to the current which it outputs Set the parameters Ground CT Primary the first number of the GFCT ratio and Ground CT Secondary the second number of the GFCT ratio to enable the controller to correctly measure the actual ground fault current flowing in the circuit For more information see p 317 For a description of GFCT characteristics see p 21 1639501 12 2006 297 Installation Wiring Temperature Sensors Temperature Sensors The LTM R controller has 2 terminals dedicated to temperature sensing protection T1 and T2 These terminals return the temperature value measured by resistance temperature detectors RTDs One of the following types of motor temperature sensor can be used e PTC Binary e PTC Analog e NTC Analog This function applies to both single phase and 3 phase motors The following table shows the maximum wire lengths f
5. Language code Description 1 English default 2 Fran ais 4 Espa ol 8 Deutsch 16 Italiano Example Address 650 Word HMI language 1639501 12 2006 463 Use DT_WarningCode DT_WarningCode format is an enumeration of warning codes Warning code Description 0 No warning 3 Ground current 4 Thermal overload 5 Long start 6 Jam 7 Current phase imbalance 8 Undercurrent 10 Test 11 HMI port error 12 HMI port communication loss 13 Network port internal error 18 Diagnostic 19 Wiring 20 Overcurrent 21 Current phase loss 22 Current phase reversal 23 Motor temp sensor 24 Voltage phase imbalance 25 Voltage phase loss 26 Voltage phase reversal 27 Undervoltage 28 Overvoltage 29 Underpower 30 Overpower 31 Under power factor 32 Over power factor 464 1639501 12 2006 Use Identification Variables Identification Identification variables are described below Variables Register Variable type Read only variables Note p 455 0 34 Not significant 35 40 Word 6 Expansion commercial reference 1 See DT_CommercialReference p 459 41 45 Word 5 Expansion serial number 1 46 UInt Expansion ID code 1 47 UInt Expansion firmware version 1 See DT_Firmware Version p
6. TeSys D and Catalog references and characteristics for TeSys D IEC contactors are listed in the table TeSys F IEC below Coil voltages are grouped according to whether an interposing relay is required Contactors TeSys D catalog Control Circuit VA or W Coil voltages references Frequency maintained max interposing relay not interposing relay required Hz required LC1D09 LC1D38 7 5 AC 24 32 36 42 48 60 AC 277 380 400 415 100 127 200 208 220 440 480 575 600 690 230 240 6 DC std 24 DC std 36 48 60 72 96 100 110 125 155 220 250 440 575 2 4 DC low consumption 24 DC low consumption 48 72 96 110 220 250 LC1D40 LC1D95 26 AC 24 32 42 48 110 AC 256 277 380 380 115 120 127 208 220 400 400 415 440 480 50 60 220 230 230 240 500 575 600 660 22 DC 24 36 48 60 72 110 125 220 250 440 LC1D115 18 AC 24 32 42 48 110 115 AC 277 380 400 415 120 127 208 220 230 240 440 480 500 22 DC 24 48 60 72 110 125 220 250 440 LC1D150 18 AC 24 32 42 48 110 115 AC 277 380 400 415 120 127 208 220 230 240 440 480 500 5 DC 24 48 60 72 110 125 220 250 440 300 1639501 12 2006 Installation Catalog references and characteristics for TeSys F IEC contactors are listed in the table below Coil voltages are grouped according to whether a
7. LED name Description Appearance Status Power Power Fault status green power on no faults red power on faults off not powered 1 7 Logic Input I 7 status yellow activated off not activated 1 8 Logic Input 1 8 status yellow activated off not activated 1 9 Logic Input 1 9 status yellow activated off not activated 1 10 Logic Input 1 10 status yellow activated off not activated The expansion module has the following plug in terminals and pin assignments Terminal block Pin Description Voltage Inputs LV1 phase 1 input voltage LV2 phase 2 input voltage LV3 phase 3 input voltage Logic Inputs and Common Terminals 1 7 logic Input 7 C7 common for 1 7 1 8 logic Input 1 8 C8 common for 1 8 1 9 logic Input 1 9 c9 common for 1 9 1 10 logic Input 1 10 C10 common for 1 10 1639501 12 2006 37 Introduction Technical Specifications of the LTM R Controller Technical Specifications The LTM R controller meets the following specifications Certification UL CSA CE CTIC K CCC NOM GOST IACS E10 BV LROS DNV GL RINA ABS RMRos ATEX Conformity to Standards IEC EN 60947 4 1 UL 508 CSA C22 2 no 14 IACS E10 European community directives CE marking satisfies the essential requirements of the low voltage LV machinery and electromagnetic compatibility EMC directives
8. O Off Ail A Automatic Network Control A2 FY R HRA F Forward Y J A1 R Reverse AES Fal o a I GAN Se CA SC 540 1639501 12 2006 NEMA Format Wiring Diagrams Two Step Wye Delta Mode Wiring Diagrams Application The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse local control wiring Diagram with diagram 3 Wire Impulse Local Control o Start We Stop QLO 1639501 12 2006 541 NEMA Format Wiring Diagrams Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Local Control Application Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Local Control with Network Control Selectable Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Local Control with Network Control Selectable The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained local control wiring diagram The following application diagram features 3 wire impulse local control with network control selectable wiring diagram H Hand Local Control O Off A Automatic Network Control The following application diagram features 2 wire maintained local control with network control selectable wiring diagram H Hand Local Control H OTA O Off Atl HOA A Automatic Network Control A2 1 ate N 0 0
9. 538 1639501 12 2006 NEMA Format Wiring Diagrams Reverser Mode Wiring Diagrams Application The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse local control wiring Diagram with diagram 3 Wire Impulse Local Control Forward ot cs Tee Reverse pies 1639501 12 2006 539 NEMA Format Wiring Diagrams Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Local Control Application Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Local Control with Network control selectable Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Local Control with Network control selectable The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained local control wiring diagram F Forward le O Off Au R Reverse ir ee A2 hl wanaesewsesasaureaaas oS ie a kit ey ete ay Xo TAS Aue ate The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse local control with network control selectable wiring diagram H Hand Local Control O Off o A Automatic Network Control H fx ne Stop 28 aa HITIA Q10 0 0 At Forward a ee A2 I ae A3 l Reverse a roronete The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained local control with network control selectable wiring diagram H Hand Local Control
10. Pin Description supply voltage input A2 the negative of a power supply for DC models or the grounded secondary of a control power transformer for AC models l1 Logic Input 1 12 Logic Input 2 13 Logic Input 3 14 Logic Input 4 I5 Logic Input 5 I6 Logic Input 6 C Input common 1639501 12 2006 33 Introduction Terminal block Pin Description DPST Relay Output Terminals 97 98 NC contact For information on logic output 95 96 NO contact behavior see p 227 Note The 97 98 contacts and the 95 96 contacts are on the same relay so the open closed status of one pair of contacts is always the opposite of the status of the other pair Relay Output Terminals 13 14 NO contact logic output 1 23 24 NO contact logic output 2 33 34 NO contact logic output 3 Ground Fault Input Temperature Z1 Z2 connection for external ground fault Sensor Input and PLC Terminals current transformer T1 T2 connection for motor temperature sensors DO or D A generator terminal 0 Va voltage D1 or D B generator terminal 1 Vb voltage S Modbus shield pin V Modbus common pin NC Modbus VP pin not connected 34 1639501 12 2006 Introduction Physical Description of the LTM E Expansion Module Overview The expansion module extends the functionality of the LTM R controller by providing voltage monitoring and addi
11. XBTN Reference The XBTN Reference page provides information about the HMI The following is an Page example of information displayed in this page Level 2 Parameter name description XBTN Reference MB Speed 19200 HMI Port Baud Rate Setting MB Parity Even HMI Port Parity Setting LTM_1T8_E_Vx xx DOP file name for the HMI application program XX XX 200X XX Xx XX date of the HMI application program file XBT L1000 V 4 42 version of the XBTL1000 software Firmware V3 1 version of the HMI firmware 1639501 12 2006 409 Use Motor Starter Page 1 to many Overview The Motor Starter page presents information and commands for the LTM R controller that was selected in either the Starters Currents page or the Starters Status page see p 407 The Motor Starter page is the only page located in level 3 of the menu structure Use the Motor Starter page to e monitor dynamically changing current voltage and power values for a single selected LTM R controller e navigate to editable parameter settings for a LTM R controller e navigate to read only statistics and product information for a LTM R controller e execute the Self Test command for a LTM R controller For information about navigating the 1 to many menu structure see p 398 410 1639501 12 2006 Use Motor Starter The Motor Starter page displays dynamically changing parameter values and contains t
12. What s in this This section contains the following topics Section Topic Page Control Principles 223 Predefined Operating Modes 225 Control Wiring and Fault Management 228 Overload Operating Mode 230 Independent Operating Mode 233 Reverser Operating Mode 237 Two Step Operating Mode 241 Two Speed Operating Mode 247 Custom Operating Mode 252 222 1639501 12 2006 Motor Control Functions Control Principles Overview The LTM R controller performs control and monitoring functions for single phase and 3 phase electric motors e These functions are predefined and fit the applications most frequently used They are ready to use and are implemented by simple parameter setting after the LTM R controller has been commissioned e The predefined control and monitoring functions can be adapted for particular needs using the custom logic editor in PowerSuite software to e edit protection functions e change the operation of control and monitoring functions e alter the default LTM R controller I O logic 1639501 12 2006 223 Motor Control Functions Operating The processing of control and monitoring functions has 3 parts Principle e acquisition of input data e the output of protection function processing e external logic data from logic inputs e telecommunication commands TC recei
13. Control Voltage 24 Vdc 100 240 Vac Power consumption According to IEC EN 60947 1 56 127 mA 8 62 8 mA Control voltage range According to IEC EN 60947 1 20 4 26 4 Vdc 93 5 264 Vac Overcurrent protection 24 V fuse 0 5 A gG 100 240 V fuse 0 5 A gG Resistance to Microbreaks 3 ms 3ms Resistance to voltage dips According to IEC EN 61000 4 11 70 of UC min for 500 ms 70 of UC min for 500 ms 1639501 12 2006 39 Introduction Logic Inputs Characteristics The LTM R controller logic inputs 1 1 to 1 6 are internally powered by the control voltage of the LTM R controller LTM R controller inputs are isolated from the inputs of the expansion module LTM R controller logic inputs have the following characteristics Nominal input values Voltage 24 Vdc 100 240 Vac Current 7mA e 3 1 mA at 100Vac e 7 5 mA at 240 Vac Input limit values At state 1 Voltage 15 V maximum 79 V lt V lt 264 V Current 2 mA min to 15 mA max 2 mA min at 110 Vac to 3 mA min at 220 Vac At state 0 Voltage 5 V maximum OV lt V lt 40V Current 15 mA maximum 15 mA maximum Response time Change to state 1 15 ms 25 ms Change to state 0 5 ms 25 ms IEC 1131 1 conformity Type 1 Type 1 Type of Input Resistive Capacitive Logic Outputs Characteristics The controller logic outputs O 1 to O 4 are internally powered by the control voltage of the c
14. 314 1639501 12 2006 Commissioning At a Glance Overview This chapter provides an overview for commissioning the LTM R controller and the expansion module What s in this This chapter contains the following topics Chapter Topic Page Introduction 316 Required Information 318 First Power up 320 Required Parameters 322 Commissioning Using Magelis XBTN410 1 to 1 327 Commissioning Using PowerSuite Software 329 Modbus Communication Checking 330 Verifying System Wiring 332 Verify Configuration 336 1639501 12 2006 315 Commissioning Introduction Introduction Initialization Commissioning must be performed after the physical installation of the LTM R controller expansion module and other hardware devices The commissioning process includes e initialization of the installed devices and e configuration of the LTM R controller parameters that are required for operation of the LTM R controller expansion module and other system hardware The person performing commissioning must be familiar with the system hardware and how it will be installed and used in the application Hardware devices can include motor voltage transformers external load current transformers ground current transformers communication network The product specifications for these devices provide the required parameter information You need to understand how the LTM
15. A active power 83 85 94 411 481 consumption 87 n 0 373 420 469 n 1 374 421 470 n 2 375 471 n 3 376 472 n 4 377 473 altitude derating controller 41 expansion module 44 apparent power 83 85 application example 51 components 53 configuring parameters 55 purpose 52 wiring 54 auto reset attempts group 1 setting 47 262 365 413 489 attempts group 2 setting 47 262 365 413 489 attempts group 3 setting 47 262 365 413 489 count 90 371 group 1 timeout 47 120 262 365 413 489 group 2 timeout 47 262 365 413 489 group 3 timeout 47 262 365 413 489 average current n 0 373 420 n 1 374 421 474 n 2 375 474 n 3 376 475 n 4 377 475 ratio 411 average current ratio 94 407 n 0 373 469 n 1 374 470 n 2 375 471 n 3 376 472 n 4 377 473 average voltage 82 94 n 0 373 420 469 n 1 374 421 470 n 2 375 471 n 3 376 472 n 4 377 473 bumpless transfer mode 46 212 365 413 C clear all command 438 command clear all 97 320 327 362 382 448 493 clear controller settings 382 409 444 449 493 clear network port settings 382 444 1639501 12 2006 557 Index 449 493 clear statistics 89 382 409 444 448 493 clear thermal capacity level 132 261 366 382 444 449 493 fault reset 408 493 logic outputs register 493 motor low speed 247 493 motor run forward 233 237 241 247 493 motor run reverse
16. 378 1639501 12 2006 Use Monitoring Using the Scrolling HMI Display 1 to 1 Overview Use the LCD display in presentation mode to present a scrolling list of parameters and their dynamically changing values To use this feature e add parameters to the scrolling list in the HMI Display sub menu e monitor the scrolling list using the LCD display HMI Display Use the HMI Display sub menu to add items to the scrolling display of dynamically changing parameter values Use Display All to add all items in a group The HMI Display sub menu contains the following selections Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Parameter name reference HMI Display Contrast Fault Enable HMI Display Contrast Setting Language Fault Level HMI Language Setting Display All Selects all HMI display items Status Display All Selects all Status items Date HMI Display Date Enable Time HMI Display Time Enable Frequency HMI Display Frequency Enable Start Per Hour HMI Display Starts Per Hour Enable Last Fault HMI Display Last Fault Enable I O Status HMI Display IO Status Enable Th Overload Display All Selects all Thermal Overload items Th Capacity HMI Display Thermal Capacity Level Enable Time To Trip HMI Display Time To Trip Enable Definite OC HMI Display Definite Overcurrent Enable 1639501 12 2006 379 Use Level 3 Leve
17. 402 1639501 12 2006 Use Executing a Value Write Command 1 to many Overview The Magelis XBTN410 HMI in 1 to many configuration provides executable value write commands A value write command immediately executes a task The value write command line is identified by either a e lt v at the left end of a command line or e v gt at the right end of a command line If a value write command is unsuccessful the HMI displays an error message If the value write command is successful no message is displayed Value write commands include Value write command Task Location Clear Settings Clears settings and restores defaults Clear Statistics Clears statistics and restores defaults Reset to Defaults page Self Test Performs a self test Motor Starter page Reset Manual Enables manual resetting of faults Reset Remote Enables remote resetting of faults Reset Automatic Enables automatic resetting of faults Reset page 1639501 12 2006 403 Use Example Use the or the arrow key to execute a value write command When a value write command executes the lower case v next to the arrow becomes an upper case V as shown below then quickly returns to a lower case v after the command executes Scroll within page Execute command Motor Starter 1 Avg Current 90 FLC L1 Curre
18. The Average Current Ratio parameter provides the average current value as a percentage of FLC The average current value for the phase is compared to the FLC parameter setting where FLC is FLC1 or FLC2 whichever is active at that time Calculated measurement Formula Line current ratio FLC 100 x lavg FLC Where e FLC FLC1 or FLC2 parameter setting whichever is active at the time lavg average current value in amperes 74 1639501 12 2006 Metering and Monitoring Functions Average Current The average current ratio function has the following characteristics Ratio Characteristics Characteristic Value Unit of FLC Accuracy See average current above Resolution 1 FLC Refresh interval 100 ms 1639501 12 2006 75 Metering and Monitoring Functions Current Phase Imbalance Description Formulas Characteristics The current phase imbalance function measures the maximum percentage of deviation between the average current and the individual phase currents The current phase imbalance measurement is based on imbalance ratio calculated from the following formulas Calculated measurement Formula Imbalance ratio of current in phase 1 in li1 L1 lavg x 100 lavg Imbalance ratio of current in phase 2 in li2 L2 lavg x 100 lavg Imbalance ratio of current in phase 3 in li3 L3 lavg
19. When the controller and expansion module are properly positioned tighten first the bottom screws then the top screws using a screwdriver Torque to 1 Nem 8 8 Ib in 278 1639501 12 2006 Installation Operating Position You can mount the controller and the expansion module at an angle of up to 90 degrees perpendicular to the normal vertical mounting plane v QIQIQIOIO SOG 97 98 95 96 NINNIN oq 1213 C i4 i5 C 16 z z2 11 12 01 oo s v ncl S v nc SYSPP9999 Q lt 1639501 12 2006 279 Installation Assembling the LTM R Controller and the Expansion Module At a Glance Replacing the Terminal Strips Once you have mounted the LTM R controller and the expansion module if required you must assemble the different parts of the system This section describes how to connect the controller with the expansion module as well as how to replace the standard terminal strips with alternative terminal strips The standard terminal strips of the controller and expansion module can be replaced with alternative terminal strips if required With alternative terminal strips wires are connected perpendicularly to the controller or expansion module face To replace the standard strips with alternative strips Step Action 1 Remove the 6 standard terminal strips using a screwdriver to lever
20. Characteristic Value Unit kW Accuracy 5 Resolution 0 1 kW Refresh interval 100 ms 1639501 12 2006 83 Metering and Monitoring Functions Reactive Power Description Formulas Characteristics The reactive power function measures the reactive power based on the power factor number of phases average rms phase voltage of L1 L2 L3 average rms phase current of L1 L2 L3 The reactive power measurement is derived from the following formulas Calculated measurement Formula Q Reactive Power for three phase motor Q V3 x lavg x Vavg x sin Q Reactive Power for single phase motor Q lavg x Vavg x sin The reactive power function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Unit kvar Accuracy 5 Resolution 0 1 kvar Refresh interval 100 ms 84 1639501 12 2006 Metering and Monitoring Functions Power Factor Description The power factor function displays the phase displacement between the phase currents and phase voltages Formula The Power Factor parameter also called cosine phi or cos represents the absolute value of the ratio of Active Power to Apparent Power The LTM R controller independently calculates the power factor as follows Step LTM R controller action 1 Measures the time difference between the x axis zero crossings of the voltage and current sinusoidal waveforms
21. Register MSB LSB Register N character 1 character 2 Register N 1 character 3 character 4 Register N 2 character 5 character 6 Register N 3 character 7 character 8 Register N 4 character 9 character 10 Register N 5 character 11 character 12 Example Addresses 64 to 69 Word 6 Controller Commercial Reference If Controller Commercial Reference LTM R Register MSB LSB 64 L T 65 M space 66 R 67 68 69 1639501 12 2006 459 Use DT_DateTime DT_DateTime format is Word 4 and indicates Date and Time Register 15 12 8 7 4 Register N Register N 1 Register N 2 ol rlz lt om x z lt o 3 o0 lt o 3 0 lt e Register N 3 Where e Y year The format is 4 Binary Coded Decimal BCD digits The value range is 2006 2099 e M month The format is 2 BCD digits The value range is 01 12 e D day The format is 2 BCD digits The value range is 01 31 for months 01 03 05 07 08 10 12 01 30 for months 04 06 09 11 01 29 for month 02 in a leap year 01 28 for month 02 in a non leap year e H hour The format is 2 BCD digits The value range is 00 23 e m minute The format is 2 BCD digits The value range is 00 59 e S second The format is 2 BCD digits The value range is 00 59 e 0 unused Data entry format and value ra
22. Failure to follow this instruction can result in injury or equipment damage There is no time delay for the thermal overload warning When inverse thermal fault mode is selected the LTM R controller estimates the e Time to Trip the time until a fault will occur e Minimum Wait Time after a fault has occurred the time until the LTM R controller will be automatically reset For more information about Time to Trip see p 172 and for more information about Minimum Wait Time see p 114 The LTM R controller calculates the Thermal Capacity Level in all operating states When power to the LTM R controller is lost the LTM R controller retains the last measurements of the motor s thermal state for a period of 30 minutes permitting it to re calculate the motor s thermal state when power is re applied Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled This function applies to both single phase and 3 phase motors 1639501 12 2006 131 Motor Protection Functions Reset for Emergency Restart You can use the Clear Thermal Capacity Level Command issued from the PLC or an HMI to re start an overloaded motor in an emergency situation This command resets the thermal capacity utilization value to 0 and bypasses the cooling period required by the thermal model before the motor can be restarted A WARNING LOSS OF MOTOR PROTECTION Clearing the thermal capacity level inhibits thermal pro
23. Rated insulation According to IEC EN 60947 1 overvoltage category Ill 690 V voltage Ui degree of pollution 3 According to UL508 CSA C22 2 no 14 690 V Rated impulse According to IEC60947 1 220 V power inputand 4 8 kV withstand voltage 8 3 3 4 1 paragraph 2 output circuits Vimp 24 V power input and 0 91 kV output circuits communication circuits 0 91 kV PTC and GF circuits 0 91 kV Degree of protection According to 60947 1 protection against direct contact IP20 Protective treatment IEC EN 60068 TH IEC EN 60068 2 30 Cycle humidity 12 cycles IEC EN 60068 2 11 Salt spray 48 hr Ambient air Storage 40 80 C 40 176 F temperature around Operation 20 60 C 4 140 F the device Maximum operating altitude Derating accepted 4500 m 14763 ft without derating 2000 m 6561 ft Fire resistance According to UL 94 V2 According to IEC 695 2 1 Parts supporting live components 960 C 1760 F other components 650 C 1202 F 1 Some certifications are in progress Without modifying the state of the contacts in the least favorable direction 3 NOTICE This product has been designed for use in environment A Use of this product in environment B may cause unwanted electromagnetic disturbance which may require the implementation of adequate mitigation measures 38 1639501 12 2006 Introduction Half s
24. 1639501 12 2006 149 Motor Protection Functions Block Diagram Long start fault 11 r Ie lavg P lavg gt Is2 Pig T O i Long start fault 13 gt Start state _ AND 11 Phase 1 current 12 Phase 2 current I3 Phase 3 current Is2 Fault threshold T Fault timeout Parameter The long start function has the following parameters Settings Parameters Setting range Factory setting Fault enable Enable Disable Enable Fault timeout 1 200 s in 1 s increments 10s Fault threshold 100 800 of FLC 100 of FLC Function The long start function has the following characteristics Characteristics Characteristic Value Hysteresis 95 of Fault threshold Trip time accuracy 0 1 s or 5 150 1639501 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Example The following describes the occurrence of a single threshold cross long start fault Long start fault timeout Fault condition Is2 Long start fault threshold 1639501 12 2006 151 Motor Protection Functions Jam Description Functional Characteristics Block Diagram The jam function detects a locked rotor during run state and signals e awarning when current in any phase exceeds a set threshold after the motor has reached run state e a fault when current in any phase continuously exceeds a separately set threshold for a specified period of time
25. O 1 KM1 0 2 optional t 4 w 1 Normal operation 2 Start command ignored stop command active Parameters Independent operating mode requires no associated parameters 236 1639501 12 2006 Motor Control Functions Reverser Operating Mode Description Use Reverser operating mode in direct on line across the line full voltage reversing motor starting applications Functional This function includes the following features Characteristics s Accessible in 3 control modes Local Terminal Strip Local HMI and Network Firmware interlocking prevents simultaneous activation of the O 1 forward and O 2 reverse logic outputs The LTM R controller can change direction from forward to reverse and reverse to forward in 1 of 2 modes e Standard Transition mode The Control Direct Transition bit is Off This mode requires a Stop command followed by count down of the adjustable Motor Transition Timeout anti backspin timer e Direct Transition mode The Control Direct Transition bit is On This mode automatically transitions after the count down of the adjustable Motor Transition Timeout anti backspin timer In local terminal strip control mode logic input 1 1 controls logic output O 1 and logic input 1 2 controls logic output O 2 In network or local HMI control modes the Motor Run Forward Command parameter controls logic output O 1 and the Motor Run Reverse Command cont
26. bit 8 Input 9 bit 9 Input 10 bit 10 Input 11 bit 11 Input 12 bit 12 Output 1 13 14 bit 13 Output 2 23 24 bit 14 Output 3 33 34 bit 15 Output 4 95 96 97 98 460 Ulnt Warning code 1639501 12 2006 479 Use Register Variable type Read only variables Note p 455 461 Word Warning register 1 bits 0 1 Not significant bit 2 Ground current warning bit 3 Thermal overload warning bit 4 Not significant bit 5 Jam warning bit 6 Current phase imbalance warning bit 7 Undercurrent warning bits 8 9 Not significant bit 10 HMI port warning bit 11 Controller internal temperature warning bit 12 Internal port warning bits 13 14 Not significant bit 15 Network port warning 462 Word Warning register 2 bit O Not significant bit 1 Diagnostic warning bit 2 Reserved bit 3 Overcurrent warning bit 4 Current phase loss warning bit 5 Current phase reversal warning bit 6 Motor temperature sensor warning bit 7 Voltage phase imbalance warning bit 8 Voltage phase loss warning bit 9 Voltage phase reversal warning bit 10 Undervoltage warning bit 11 Overvoltage warning bit 12 Underpower warning bit 13 Overpower warning bit 14 Under power factor warning bit 15 Over power factor warnin
27. 1639501 12 2006 91 Metering and Monitoring Functions Control Command Errors Counter Description The Diagnostic Faults Count parameter contains the total number of Diagnostic Faults that occurred since the Clear All Statistics Command last executed A Diagnostic Fault occurs when the LTM R controller detects any of the following control command errors e Start Command Check errors e Stop Command Check errors e Stop Check Back errors e Run Check Back errors For information on these control command functions see p 99 When the LTM R controller increments the Diagnostic Faults Count parameter it also increments the Faults Count parameter Wiring Faults Counter Description The Wiring Faults Count parameter contains the total number of the following wiring faults that have occurred since the Clear Statistics Command last executed e Wiring Fault which is triggered by a e CT Reversal Error e Phase Configuration Error e Motor Temperature Sensor Wiring Error e Voltage Phase Reversal Fault e Current Phase Reversal Fault The LTM R controller increments the Wiring Faults Count parameter by a value of 1 each time any one of the above 3 faults occurs For information on connection errors and related faults see p 102 When the LTM R controller increments the Wiring Faults Count parameter it also increments the Faults Count parameter 92 1639501 12 2006 Metering and Monitoring Functions C
28. 1 0 0 0 eee ete 111 Maximum Internal Controller Temperature 000 cece eee eee 111 Thermal Overload Statistics eee eee 112 Time to Trip odie abd eee Aided aa Busted re Gidea a Pesca tiadeand don d n aea de 112 System Operating Status 0 0 ete 113 OVEIVIOW dinomu oa g Nini eee PIs keg Me OAS A Lee eae aa 113 MotorState ccc snte4 bio te ae tA ae eee A Pe Be ee Set R cna ts Read bs ee 114 Chapter 4 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 Chapter 5 5 1 5 2 Minimum Wait Time 0 0 0 0 0 eee eee 114 Motor Protection Functions 0000 cece eees 115 Motor Protection Functions Introduction 0 0 00 cece eee ee eens 116 Motor Protection Functions 2 0 0 0 0 ccc ee ees 117 Setting Ranges of the Motor Protection Functions 0055 119 Motor Protection Characteristics 20 0 0 ees 125 Thermal and Current Motor Protection Functions 008 129 Thermal Overload ac osc ccc ie paana hed a a e AE Goole Sage Pd ga eres 130 Thermal Overload Inverse Thermal 0 0000 cee eee eee eee 131 Thermal Overload Definite Time 0 0 00 cee eee 138 Current Phase Imbalance 0 0 0 ccc eee ee ene 141 Current Phase LOSS 2 0 0c ccc cee eee eee eee enna 145 Current Phase Reversal 0 0000 ccc eee eee eee eee enna 148 kong Starta raain arna anA ameter re ane hg dad cans aa abet Mae eee RUS bea Ae Spee 149 AM k cena i
29. 184 1639501 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Undervoltage Description Functional Characteristics The undervoltage function signals e a warning when voltage in a phase falls below a set threshold e afault when voltage in a phase falls and remains below a separately set threshold for a set period of time This function has a single fault time delay Both the fault and warning thresholds are defined as a percentage of the Motor Nominal Voltage Vnom parameter setting The undervoltage function is available only in ready state and run state when the LTM R controller is connected to an expansion module Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled The function applies to both single phase and 3 phase motors The undervoltage function includes the following features e 2 thresholds e Warning Threshold e Fault Threshold e 1 fault time delay e Fault Timeout e 2 function outputs e Undervoltage Warning e Undervoltage Fault e 1 counting statistic e Undervoltage Faults Count 1639501 12 2006 185 Motor Protection Functions Block Diagram Undervoltage warning and fault Vi V2 gt Vmax V3 gt Parameter Settings Function Characteristics Ready state Run state T amp Undervoltage warning OR m Vmax lt Vsi gt Vmax lt Vs2 AND T 0 Under
30. 693 Ulnt Network port comm loss timeout Modbus only 694 Ulnt Network port parity setting Modbus only 695 Ulnt Network port baud rate setting 1639501 12 2006 491 Use Register Variable type Read Write variables Note p 455 696 Ulnt Network port address setting 697 699 Not significant 492 1639501 12 2006 Use Command Variables Command Variables Command variables are described below Register Variable type Read Write variables Note p 455 700 Word Logic outputs command register bit O Logic output 1 command bit 1 Logic output 2 command bit 2 Logic output 3 command bit 3 Logic output 4 command bit 4 Logic output 5 command bit 5 Logic output 6 command bit 6 Logic output 7 command bit 7 Logic output 8 command bits 8 15 Reserved 701 703 Reserved 704 Word Control register 1 bit O Motor run forward command bit 1 Motor run reverse command bit 2 Reserved bit 3 Fault reset command bit 4 Reserved bit 5 Self test command bit 6 Motor low speed command bits 7 15 Reserved 705 Word Control register 2 bit O Clear all command bit 1 Clear statistics command bit 2 Clear thermal capacity level command bit 3 Clear controller settings command bit 4 Clear network por
31. Verify Configuration a se saesae eet eee 336 Chapter 8 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 8 5 8 6 Ue er eh ee re ee ees ee ee re 337 IMthODUCTION 234 4 cic sap aot hain Peace adie By steed a ieee 338 Hardware Configurations 00 00 c eects 338 Using the LTM R Controller Alone 00 0000 cece 339 Stand Alone Configuration 0 0 c cece eee 339 Configuring the Magelis XBTN410 0 0 0 e cece eee eee 343 Installing Magelis XBT L1000 Programming Software 344 Download 1 to 1 and 1 to many Software Application Files 346 Transferring Application Software Files to Magelis XBTN410 HMI 347 Using the Magelis XBTN410 HMI 1 to 1 2 2 22 eee eee eee 348 Physical Description 1 to 1 0 0 0 eee eee 349 LCD Display 1 to 1 3 22 dr na i he ee eee va eee ee eg ee 351 Navigating the Menu Structure 1 to 1 0 0 0 0 cee ee 357 Editing Values 1 to 1 0 tees 358 Menu Structure 1 to 1 0 etna 362 Main Menu 1 to 1 2 0 cette eae 363 Main Menu Settings 1 to 1 26 tee 364 Main Menu Statistics 1 to 1 2 0 2 eee 371 Main Menu Product ID 1 to 1 0 2 eee 378 Monitoring Using the Scrolling HMI Display 1 to 1 00 379 Main Menu Services 1 to 1 2 0 cette 382 Fault Management 1 to 1 0 eects 386 HMI Keypad Control 1 to 1 0 aana anaua 389 Using the Magelis XBTN410 HMI 1 to many 0
32. 1639501 12 2006 437 Use Configuration Functions Using PowerSuite Overview Restore Factory Defaults Password The configuration software s Services menu provides access to the following configuration functions e Reset to Factory Restore Factory Defaults e Password Use the Services Reset to Factory command to clear all settings and restore factory defaults This menu command executes the Clear All Command parameter For a list of general parameters and their factory default settings see p 45 for a list of protection parameters and their factory default settings see p 119 Use the Services Password command to access a dialog where you can enable password protection and create a password Using a password helps prevent unauthorized configuration of controller parameters Password protection is disabled by default Your password must be an integer between 0000 and 9999 The controller saves the password in the HMI Keypad Password parameter 438 1639501 12 2006 Use Metering and Monitoring Overview Use the PowerSuite software to monitor dynamically changing parameter values To locate dynamically changing parameter values use the tree control to navigate to and select sub branches of either of the following main branches e Monitoring e Parameters Before you can monitor parameter values an active communications link must be established between the configuration software
33. 25 s in 0 1 s increments 10s Fault threshold 0 1 in 0 01 increments 0 90 Warning enable Enable Disable Disable Warning threshold 0 1 in 0 01 increments 0 90 124 1639501 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Motor Protection Characteristics Overview Operation The protection functions of the LTM R controller continuously monitor the values of current parameters When connected to an expansion module the LTM R controller also provides voltage protection and monitors voltage and power parameters The following diagram describes the operation of a typical motor protection function This diagram and the following diagrams are expressed in terms of current However the same principles apply to voltage l l gt lIs1 Inst p gt Warning Timer I gt is2 HPs T o p Faut Measurement of the monitored parameter Is1 Warning threshold setting Is2 Fault threshold setting T Fault timeout setting Inst Instantaneous warning fault detection 1639501 12 2006 125 Motor Protection Functions Settings Some protection functions include configurable settings including e Fault threshold A limit setting for the monitored parameter that triggers a protection function fault e Warning threshold A limit setting for the monitored parameter that triggers a protection function warning e Fault timeout A time delay that must expire before the protection function fault
34. Converts this measured time difference to a phase angle in degrees Calculates the absolute value of the cosine of the phase angle The following diagram displays an example of the average rms current sinusoidal curve lagging slightly behind the average rms voltage sinusoidal curve and the phase angle difference between the two curves 360 q aa voltage i Haa Ne Bee Y current se K x 7 S z r y S 7 t N 7 S A 7 phase angle 9 1639501 12 2006 85 Metering and Monitoring Functions After the phase angle is measured the power factor can be calculated as the cosine of the phase angle the ratio of side a Active Power over the hypotenuse h Apparent Power 1 Characteristics The active power function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Accuracy 3 for cos gt 0 6 Resolution 0 01 Refresh interval 30 ms typical 1 The refresh interval depends on the frequency 86 1639501 12 2006 Metering and Monitoring Functions Active Power Consumption Description The active power consumption function displays the accumulated total of the active electrical power delivered and used or consumed by the load Characteristics The active power consumption function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Unit kWh Accuracy 5 Resolution 0 1 k
35. LTM E Functional description Reference number expansion module Voltage sensing 110 690 Vac 3 phase voltage inputs 4 additional discrete logic inputs power LED indicator logic input status LED indicators Additional components required for an optional expansion module e LTM R controller to LTM E connection cable additional voltage protection metering and monitoring functions LTMEV40BD 24 Vdc LTMEV40FM 100 240 Vac 1639501 12 2006 19 Introduction PowerSuite PowerSuite software is a Microsoft Windows based application that enables you Software to configure and commission the LTM R controller from a PC You can also use PowerSuite software to modify default logic or create new logic using pre made function blocks and elements PowerSuite software Functional description Reference number commission the system through menu entries LTM CONF a e configure the system through menu entries VW3A8106 Ty e display warnings and faults PC communications cable Additional components required for PowerSuite software e aPC separate power source e LTM R LTM E to PC communication cable Magelis The system uses the Magelis XBTN410 HMI human machine interface device XBTN410 HMI with a liquid crystal display and navigation buttons for metering configuring and operating the LTM R controller This HMI device is com
36. This port provides communication between the LTM R controller and a network PLC via an RJ45 connector 32 1639501 12 2006 Introduction LEDs LTM R controller LED descriptions LED name Describes Appearance Status HMI Comm Communication between LTM R flashing yellow communication controller and HMI device PC or off no communication expansion module Power LTM R controller power or internal fault solid green power on motor off no internal faults condition flashing green power on motor on no internal faults off power off or internal faults exist Alarm Protection warning or fault or internal solid red internal or protection fault fault flashing red warning 2 flashes s flashing red load shed or rapid cycle 5 flashes s off no faults warnings load shed or rapid cycle when power is on Fallback Indicates communications loss solid red fallback between the LTM R controller and off no power not in fallback network or HMI control source PLC Comm indicates network activity flashing yellow communication on the network bus 0 2 s on 1 0 s off off no network bus communication Plug in The LTM R controller has the following plug in terminals and pin assignments Terminals and Pin Assignments Terminal block Common Source Terminals For information on logic input behavior see p 226 Control Voltage Logic Input and A1
37. Transfer Configuration File Transferring your configuration to the LTM R controller is a 2 step process e connect your PC to the LTM R controller e transfer the configuration file To do this Step Description 1 Be sure your configurations are displayed in the PowerSuite software 2 Check the task bar to see whether your PC is connected to the LTM R controller 3 If the task bar reads Disconnected select Connect in either the Link menu or the icon bar A progress bar briefly appears as your PC connects to the LTM R controller and the word Connected appears in the task bar when the connection process successfully completes 4 Select PC to Device in either the Link File Transfer sub menu or the icon bar The Upload Configuration dialog opens asking if you want to continue 5 In the Upload Configuration dialog click Continue A progress bar briefly appears 6 To confirm that the transfer succeeded check the results in the Output window which opens automatically at the bottom of the Main window 1639501 12 2006 57 Application Example 58 1639501 12 2006 Metering and Monitoring Functions 3 At a Glance Overview The LTM R controller provides current sensing metering and monitoring in support of the current temperature and ground fault protection functions When connected to an expansion module the LTM R controller also provides voltage and power se
38. Two Step Autotransformer Mode Wiring Diagrams Application The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse local control wiring Diagram with diagram 3 Wire Impulse Local Control 3a ee i L1 L2 L3 R R R 2s 2s 2S 100 100 84 84 65 65 50 50 0 0 1S 1S Start Stop A Q10 LTMR Ti T2 T3 M 1S i 2s i 1639501 12 2006 545 NEMA Format Wiring Diagrams Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Local Control Application Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Local Control with Network Control Selectable Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Local Control with Network Control Selectable The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained local control wiring diagram The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse local control with network control selectable wiring diagram H Hand Local Control O Off A Automatic Network Control The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained local control with network control selectable wiring diagram H Hand Local Control H O A O Off Ai HOA A Automatic Network Control A2 fe Ke 0 0 546 1639501 12 2006 NEMA Format Wiring Diagrams Two Speed Mode Wiring Diagram
39. discrete A variety of TCC or TVC where the initial magnitude of the trip time delay remains a constant and does not vary in response to changes in the value of the measured quantity e g current Contrast with inverse thermal In the broadest terms any electronic unit that can be added to a network More specifically a programmable electronic unit e g PLC numeric controller or robot or I O card DeviceNet is a low level connection based network protocol that is based on CAN a serial bus system without a defined application layer DeviceNet therefore defines a layer for the industrial application of CAN Deutsches Institut f r Normung The European organization that organizes the creation and maintenance of dimensional and engineering standards A steel mounting rail made pursuant to DIN standards typically 35 mm wide that allows for easier snap on mounting of IEC electrical devices including the LTM R controller and the expansion module Contrast with screw mounting of devices to a control panel by drilling and tapping holes Describes inputs e g switches or outputs e g coils that can be only On or Off Contrast with analog 552 1639501 12 2006 Glossary DPST double pole single throw A switch that connects or disconnects two circuit conductors in a single branch circuit A DPST switch has 4 terminals and is the equivalent of two single pole single throw switches controlled by a single mecha
40. e navigate from e a menu the sub menus e a sub menu the functions e a function the settings Some menus or sub menus contain only functions and their settings Others include functions with many parameters and their settings e confirm and save the displayed setting When a setting is saved e the is replaced by and e the saved setting is displayed for 2 seconds then the display automatically returns to the next highest level Performs motor control commands as configured For example Run Forward and Run Slow Note Enabled when Control Mode is Local terminal strip or HMI Disabled when Control Mode is Network see p 210 Performs motor control commands as configured For example Run Reverse and Run Fast Note Enabled when Control Mode is Local terminal strip or HMI Disabled when Control Mode is Network see p 210 Stops the motor Local Stop command Resets the LTM R controller and clears all faults that can be reset Local Reset command Note Behavior of the Reset key depends on Fault Reset Mode see p 254 350 1639501 12 2006 Use LCD Display 1 to 1 Overview In a 1 to 1 configuration the Magelis XBTN410 presents two different LCD displays LCD mode Displays Description Configuration mode SysConfig menu Contains basic configuration settings required for commissioning Opens at first power
41. 1 5 NC AU G3 Overpower RB 1 5 AU G3 RB 1 5 AU G3 RB 1 5 NC AU G3 Under Power Factor RB 1 5 AU G2 RB 1 5 AU G2 RB 1 5 NC AU G2 Over Power Factor RB 1 5 AU G2 RB 1 5 AU G2 RB 1 5 NC AU G2 Communication Loss PLC to LTM R RB 1 5 AU G3 RB 1 5 AU G3 RB 1 5 NC AU G3 LTM E to LTM R RB 1 5 AU G3 RB 1 5 AU G3 RB 1 5 NC AU G3 NC network command RB Test Reset button on the LTM R controller front face or the local HMI PC Power cycle on the LTM R controller 1 5 Set 1 5 logic input on the LTM R controller AU GX Automatic with conditions configured for the protection function group Where GX G1 G2 or G3 G1 Fault AutoGroup 1 has a configurable number of resets 0 manual 1 2 3 4 5 unlimited and setting delay G2 Fault Auto Group 2 has a configurable number of resets 0 manual 1 2 3 4 5 unlimited and setting delay G3 Fault Auto Group 3 has a configurable number of resets 0 manual 1 2 3 4 5 unlimited and setting delay 264 1639501 12 2006 Motor Control Functions Remote Reset Introduction Remote Reset Setting the Fault Reset Mode parameter to Remote adds resetting faults from the PLC over the LTM R network port This provides centralized monitoring and control of equipment installations The Control Mode parameter selection determines the available reset methods Both manual reset methods and remote reset methods reset a fault The
42. 1 5 Thermal overload Definite RB 1 5 RB I 5 RB 1 5 Inverse Thermal RB I 5 RB 1 5 RB 1 5 RB Test Reset button on the LTM R controller front face or a local HMI PC Power cycle on the LTM R controller 1 5 Set 1 5 logic input on the LTM R controller network control mode 1 Remote network reset commands are not allowed even when the LTM R controller is configured for 258 1639501 12 2006 Motor Control Functions Protection Category Monitored fault Control mode Local terminal strip Local HMI Network 4 Current Long Start RB 1 5 RB 1 5 RB 1 5 Jam RB 1 5 RB 1 5 RB 1 5 Current Phase RB 1 5 RB 1 5 RB 1 5 Imbalance Current Phase Loss RB 1 5 RB 1 5 RB 1 5 Undercurrent RB 1 5 RB 1 5 RB 1 5 Overcurrent RB 1 5 RB 1 5 RB 1 5 External Ground Current RB 1 5 RB I 5 RB I 5 Internal Ground Current RB 1 5 RB 1 5 RB 1 5 Voltage Undervoltage RB 1 5 RB 1 5 RB 1 5 Overvoltage RB 1 5 RB 1 5 RB 1 5 Voltage Phase RB 1 5 RB 1 5 RB 1 5 Imbalance Power Underpower RB I 5 RB I 5 RB I 5 Overpower RB 1 5 RB 1 5 RB 1 5 Under Power Factor RB 1 5 RB 1 5 RB 1 5 Over Power Factor RB 1 5 RB 1 5 RB 1 5 Communication loss PLC to LTM R RB 1 5 RB 1 5 RB 1 5 LTM E to LTM R RB 1 5 RB 1 5 RB 1 5 RB Test Reset button on the LTM R controller front face or a local HMI PC Power cycle on the LTM R controller
43. 1 5 Set 1 5 logic input on the LTM R controller 1 Remote network reset commands are not allowed even when the LTM R controller is configured for network control mode 1639501 12 2006 259 Motor Control Functions Automatic Reset Introduction Setting the Fault Reset Mode parameter to Automatic lets you e configure the LTM R controller to attempt to reset motor protection and communications faults without the intervention of either a human operator or the remote PLC for example e for anon networked LTM R controller installed at a location that is physically remote or locally hard to access e configure fault handling for each protection fault group in a manner that is appropriate to the faults in that group e seta different timeout delay e permit a different number of reset attempts e disable automatic fault resetting The Control Mode parameter selection determines the available reset methods Each protection fault is included in 1 of 3 auto reset fault groups based on the characteristics of that fault as described below Each fault group has two configurable parameters e a timeout the Auto Reset Group number 1 2 or 3 Timeout parameter and e a maximum number of permissible fault resets the Auto Reset Attempts Group number 1 2 or 3 Setting parameter A WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION An auto reset command may restart the motor if the LTM R controller is used in a 2 wire
44. 1 to many When a Magelis XBTN410 is used in a 1 to many physical configuration the face Interface of the HMI looks like this O00000 1 LCD display 2 8 button keypad 1639501 12 2006 393 Use 1 to Many Keypad The 1 to many configuration requires a customized keypad label Using a blank keypad label add the names of the 6 bottom buttons to the label For instructions on creating and installing a customized keypad label refer to the Telemecanique Magelis Instruction Sheet that ships with the Magelis XBTN410 HMI In a 1 to many configuration the keypad buttons perform the following functions Keys Use this key to enter the menu structure for a selected LTM R controller at address 1 4 move to the adjacent left character within a numerical setting value execute remote reset commands for a selected LTM R controller at address 1 4 reset statistics to factory defaults for a selected LTM R controller display the description of another fault when the LCD displays fault messages V enter the menu structure for a selected LTM R controller at address 5 8 move to a lower level in a LTM R controller menu structure move to the adjacent right character within a numerical setting value toggle between alternate values for Boolean settings execute remote reset commands for a selected LTM R controller at address 5 8 reset settings to factory defaults for a selected LTM R controller display the description of a
45. 171 Ulnt Active power n 0 1 172 Ulnt Power factor n O x 0 01 1 173 179 Not significant 1639501 12 2006 469 Use N 1 Fault The n 1 fault statistics are completed by variables at addresses 330 to 339 Statistics Register Variable type Read only variables Note p 455 180 Ulnt Fault code n 1 181 Ulnt Motor full load current ratio n 1 FLC max 182 Ulnt Thermal capacity level n 1 trip level 183 Ulnt Average current ratio n 1 FLC 184 Ulnt L1 current ratio n 1 FLC 185 Ulnt L2 current ratio n 1 FLC 186 Ulnt L3 current ratio n 1 FLC 187 Ulnt Ground current ratio n 1 FLC min 188 Ulnt Full load current max n 1 x 0 1 A 189 Ulnt Current phase imbalance n 1 190 Ulnt Frequency n 1 x 0 1 Hz 191 Ulnt Motor temperature sensor n 1 192 195 Word 4 Date and time n 1 See DT_DateTime p 460 196 Ulnt Average voltage n 1 V 1 197 Ulnt L3 L1 voltage n 1 V 1 198 Ulnt L1 L2 voltage n 1 V 1 199 Ulnt L2 L3 voltage n 1 V 1 200 Ulnt Voltage phase imbalance n 1 x 1 1 201 Ulnt Active power n 1 1 202 Ulnt Power factor n 1 x 0 01 1 203 209 Ulnt Not significant 470 1639501 12 2006 Use N 2 Fault The n 2 fault statistics are completed by variables at addresses 360 to 369 Statistics Register Variable type R
46. 477 test 476 thermal overload 476 under power factor 477 undercurrent 476 underpower 477 undervoltage 477 voltage phase imbalance 477 voltage phase loss 477 voltage phase reversal 477 wiring 477 fault code 94 267 476 n 0 373 469 n 1 374 470 n 2 375 471 n 3 376 472 n 4 377 473 fault counters protection 91 560 1639501 12 2006 Index fault enable current phase imbalance 487 current phase loss 488 current phase reversal 488 diagnostic 488 ground current 487 HMI port 487 jam 487 long start 487 motor temperature sensor 488 network port 487 over power factor 488 overcurrent 488 overpower 488 overvoltage 488 register 1 487 register 2 488 test 487 thermal overload 487 under power factor 488 undercurrent 487 underpower 488 undervoltage 488 voltage phase imbalance 488 voltage phase loss 488 voltage phase reversal 488 wiring 488 fault management 253 introduction 254 fault power cycle requested 478 fault reset authorized 477 auto reset active 478 fault reset mode 46 365 408 413 automatic 260 485 manual 257 485 remote 265 485 thermal overload 485 fault statistics 88 characteristics 64 history 94 faults count 90 91 371 468 auto reset 467 controller internal 372 467 current phase imbalance 371 467 current phase loss 371 468 diagnostic 372 468 ground current 371 467 HMI port 372 467 internal port 372 467 jam 371 46
47. 5 and 6 of the menu structure The settings page is your starting place for locating and editing settings including motor local control transfer mode reset fault current voltage power load shed rapid cycle lockouts communication loss The settings page is located in level 4 of the menu structure To navigate to the settings page use one of the following paths Level From this page Select 1 Home page Starters currents or Starters status 2 Starters Currents page or LTM R controller number Starters Status page 3 Motor Starter page Settings For information on navigating the 1 to many menu structure see p 398 412 1639501 12 2006 Use Motor Control and Transfer Settings Fault Reset Settings Use the settings page to navigate to and edit the following motor local control and transfer mode settings Level 4 Level 5 Parameter name Settings Addr 1 8 Motor Nom Power kW Motor Nominal Power expressed in kW Nom Power Hp Motor Nominal Power expressed in HP TEMP SENSOR Fault Motor Temp Sensor Fault Enable Fault Level Motor Temp Sensor Fault Threshold Warn Motor Temp Sensor Warning Enable Warn Level Motor Temp Sensor Warning Threshold Local Control Control Local Channel Setting Transfer Mode Bumpless Transfer Mode Use the settings page to navigate to and edit the following f
48. 517 For examples of independent operating mode NEMA diagrams see p 537 234 1639501 12 2006 Motor Control Functions VO Assignment Independent operating mode provides the following logic inputs Logic inputs 2 wire maintained assignment 3 wire impulse assignment I Start Stop motor Start motor 1 2 Open Close 0 2 Close 0 2 1 3 Free Free 1 4 Free Stop motor and open O 1 and O 2 1 5 Reset Reset 1 6 Local 0 or network 1 Local 0 or network 1 Independent operating mode provides the following logic outputs Logic outputs Assignment 0 1 13 and 14 KM1 contactor control 0 2 23 and 24 Controlled by 1 2 0 3 33 and 34 Warning signal 0 4 95 96 97 and 98 Fault signal Independent operating mode uses the following HMI keys HMI keys 2 wire maintained assignment 3 wire impulse assignment Aux 1 Control motor Start motor Aux 2 Control 0 2 Close 0 2 Stop Stop motor and open O 2 while pressed Stop motor and open O 2 1639501 12 2006 235 Motor Control Functions Timing The following diagram is an example of the timing sequence for the Independent Sequence operating mode that shows the inputs and outputs for a 3 wire impulse configuration 1 1 Start 1 2 optional 1 4 Stop
49. AU GX Automatic with conditions configured for the protection function group Where GX G1 G2 or G3 G1 Fault AutoGroup 1 has a configurable number of resets 0 manual 1 2 3 4 5 unlimited and setting delay G2 Fault Auto Group 2 has a configurable number of resets 0 manual 1 2 3 4 5 unlimited and setting delay G3 Fault Auto Group 3 has a configurable number of resets 0 manual 1 2 3 4 5 unlimited and setting delay 1639501 12 2006 263 Motor Control Functions Protection category Monitored fault Control mode Local terminal strip Local HMI Network Current Long Start RB 1 5 AU G2 RB 1 5 AU G2 RB 1 5 NC AU G2 Jam RB 1 5 AU G2 RB 1 5 AU G2 RB 1 5 NC AU G2 Current Phase Imbalance RB 1 5 AU G2 RB 1 5 AU G2 RB 1 5 NC AU G2 Current Phase Loss RB I 5 RB I 5 RB 1 5 NC Undercurrent RB 1 5 AU G3 RB 1 5 AU G3 RB 1 5 NC AU G3 Overcurrent RB 1 5 AU G3 RB 1 5 AU G3 RB 1 5 NC AU G3 External Ground Current RB 1 5 AU G2 RB 1 5 AU G2 RB 1 5 NC AU G2 Internal Ground Current RB 1 5 AU G2 RB 1 5 AU G2 RB 1 5 NC AU G2 Voltage Undervoltage RB 1 5 AU G2 RB 1 5 AU G2 RB 1 5 NC AU G2 Overvoltage RB 1 5 AU G2 RB 1 5 AU G2 RB 1 5 NC AU G2 Voltage Phase Imbalance RB 1 5 AU G2 RB 1 5 AU G2 RB 1 5 NC AU G2 Power Underpower RB 1 5 AU G3 RB 5 AU G3 RB
50. Active Pwr Active Power n 0 Power Factor Power Factor n 0 Temp Sensor Motor Temp Sensor n 0 420 1639501 12 2006 Use Level 4 Level 5 Parameter name Statistics Addr 1 8 Fault n 1 Date Date And Time n 1 Time Date And Time n 1 FLC Ratio Motor Full Load Current Ratio n 1 FLC Max Motor Full Load Current Max n 1 Avg Current Average Current n 1 L1 Current L1 Current Ratio n 1 L2 Current L2 Current Ratio n 1 L3 Current L3 Current Ratio n 1 GRCurr Ground Current Ratio n 1 Curr Imbalance Current Phase Imbalance n 1 Th Capacity Thermal Capacity Level n 1 Avg Voltage Average Voltage n 1 L1 L2 Voltage L1 L2 Voltage n 1 L2 L3 Voltage L2 L3 Voltage n 1 L3 L1 Voltage L3 L1 Voltage n 1 Volt Imbalance Voltage Phase Imbalance n 1 Frequency Frequency n 1 Active Pwr Active Power n 1 Power Factor Power Factor n 1 Temp Sensor Motor Temp Sensor n 1 1639501 12 2006 421 Use Product ID 1 to many Overview Product ID The Magelis XBTN410 HMI provides a description of the product number and firmware for both the LTM R controller and expansion module To navigate to the product ID page use one of the following paths Level From this page Select 1 Home page Starters currents or Starters status 2 Starters Currents page or LTM R
51. O Off A Automatic Network Control Al A2 I LOW HIGH HOA with Network SAL Control eal gt o Selectable T PTEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEN Oii OOO Ae O i 2 13 t4 16 550 1639501 12 2006 Glossary A active power analog apparent power Also known as real power active power is the rate of producing transferring or using electrical energy It is measured in watts W and often expressed in kilowatts kW or megawatts MW For single phase motors its calculation is Active Power Apparent Power x Power Factor For 3 phase motors its calculation is Active Power Avg RMS Voltage x Avg RMS Current x JB x Power Factor Describes inputs e g temperature or outputs e g motor speed that can be set to a range of values Contrast with discrete The product of current and voltage apparent power consists of both active power and reactive power It is measured in volt amperes and often expressed in kilovolt amperes kVA or megavolt amperes MVA Its calculation is Apparent Power Avg RMS Current x Avg RMS Voltage 1639501 12 2006 551 Glossary CANopen CT An open industry standard protocol used on the internal communication bus The protocol allows the connection of any standard CANopen device to the island bus current transformer definite time device DeviceNet DIN DIN rail
52. Watchdog ROM Checksum EEROM CPU XIX mK X X X X X X X X OK OK x x x lt K X X Xx x Xx Internal Temperature X Monitored Not monitored 1639501 12 2006 255 Motor Control Functions Protection category Monitored fault LTM R controller LTM R controller with Saved on expansion module power loss Thermal resistance Motor PTC Binary X X X temp sensor PTC Analog xX X x NTC Analog X X X Thermal overload Definite X X X Inverse Thermal X X X Current Long Start X X X Jam X X x Current Phase X X X Imbalance Current Phase Loss X X X Overcurrent X X Xx Undercurrent X X X Internal Ground Current X X X External Ground Current X X X Voltage Overvoltage X X Undervoltage X X Voltage Phase X X Imbalance Power Underpower X X Overpower 7 X X Under Power Factor X X Over Power Factor X X Communication loss PLC to LTM R X X X HMI to LTM R X xX Xx X Monitored Not monitored 256 1639501 12 2006 Motor Control Functions Manual Reset Introduction When the Fault Reset Mode parameter is set to Manual the LTM R controller allows resets usually performed by a person via a power cycle of the control power or by using a local reset means including e Local Terminal Strip logic input 1 5 e Reset button on the LTM R controller e Res
53. a p Start state gt Run state Al Percentage difference between current in any phase and the 3 phase current average Is2 Fault threshold 144 1639501 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Current Phase Loss Description The current phase loss function signals e a warning when the current in any phase differs by more than a 80 from the average current in all 3 phases e a fault when the current in any phase differs by more than 80 from the average current in all 3 phases for a set period of time Note Use this function to detect and guard against large current phase imbalances in excess of 80 of the average current in all 3 phases For smaller current imbalances use the current phase imbalance motor protection function This function has a single adjustable fault time delay which is applied when the motor is in start state or run state The function identifies the phase experiencing a current loss If the maximum deviation from the 3 current average is the same for two phases the function identifies both phases Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled The function applies only to 3 phase motors Functional The current phase loss function includes the following features Characteristics 1 fixed fault and warning threshold equal to 80 of the 3 phase average current e fault time delay e Current Phase Loss Timeout e 2 funct
54. bits 1 15 Reserved 578 UInt Load shedding timeout 1 579 UInt Load shedding threshold 1 580 UInt Load shedding restart timeout 1 581 UInt Load shedding restart threshold 1 582 Reserved 583 UInt Motor nominal power 1 584 UInt Overpower fault timeout 1 585 UInt Overpower fault threshold 1 586 UInt Overpower warning threshold 1 587 UInt Underpower fault timeout 1 588 UInt Underpower fault threshold 1 589 UInt Underpower warning threshold 1 590 UInt Under power factor fault timeout 1 591 UInt Under power factor fault threshold 1 484 1639501 12 2006 Use Register Variable type Read Write variables Note p 455 592 Ulnt Under power factor warning threshold 1 593 Ulnt Over power factor fault timeout 1 594 Ulnt Over power factor fault threshold 1 595 Ulnt Over power factor warning threshold 596 599 Reserved 600 Ulnt HMI keypad password 601 Word General configuration register 1 bit O Controller system config required 0 exit the configuration menu 1 go to the configuration menu bits 1 7 Reserved Control mode configuration bits 8 10 one bit is set to 1 bit 8 Config via HMI keypad enable bit 9 Config via HMI engineering tool enable bit 10 Config via network port enable bit 11 Not significant bit 12 Motor phases sequence 0 ABC 1 ACB bits 13 14 Motor phases 1 3 phase de
55. control circuit Equipment operation must conform to local and national safety regulations and codes Failure to follow this instruction can result in death serious injury or equipment damage 260 1639501 12 2006 Motor Control Functions Reset Behavior After power is cycled the LTM R controller clears and sets to 0 the values of the following parameters e Auto Reset Group number 1 2 or 3 Timeout and e Auto Reset Group number 1 2 or 3 Setting On a successful reset the Number of Resets count is cleared and set to 0 A reset is successful if after reset the motor runs for 1 minute without a fault of a type in the designated group Emergency Use the Clear Thermal Capacity Level Command in applications where it is Restart necessary to clear the Thermal Capacity Level parameter following a Thermal Overload inverse thermal fault This command permits an emergency restart before the motor has actually cooled It also clears and sets to 0 auto restart group timeout and number of auto resets statistics A WARNING LOSS OF MOTOR PROTECTION Clearing the thermal capacity level inhibits thermal protection and can cause equipment overheating and fire Continued operation with inhibited thermal protection must be limited to applications where immediate restart is vital Failure to follow this instruction can result in death serious injury or equipment damage Number of Each protection gro
56. e Voltage Phase Loss Faults Count e 3 indicators identifying the phase experiencing the voltage loss e L1 L2 Voltage loss e L2 L3 Voltage loss e L3 L1 Voltage loss 1639501 12 2006 181 Motor Protection Functions Block Diagram Voltage phase loss fault and warning v gt V1 Vavg l gt 0 4x Vavg V2 V2 Vavg l gt 0 4x Vavg V3 V3 Vavg gt 0 4x Vavg Parameter Settings Function Characteristics Ready state Voltage phase amp T 0 loss fault AND Voltage phase OR loss warning SSS p AVmax Ln voltage phase loss V1 L1 L2 voltage V2 L2 L3 voltage V3 L3 L1 voltage Ln Line voltage number or numbers with the greatest deviation from Vavg Vavg 3 phase average voltage T Fault timeout The voltage phase loss function has the following configurable parameters Parameters Setting range Factory setting Fault enable Enable Disable Enable Fault timeout 0 1 30 s in 0 1 s increments 3s Warning enable Enable Disable Enable The voltage phase loss function has the following characteristics Characteristics Value Hysteresis 45 of the 3 phase average voltage Trip time accuracy 0 1 s or 5 182 1639501 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Example The following diagram describes the occurrence of a voltage phase loss fault of
57. f Settings f General lotor O E Current f Power f Load Shedding f Diagnostics f5 Lock Outs f Communication f HMI Display Fault Enable 1 Statistics f5 Monitoring Fault Time start i Seconds Parameters f Logic Functions Fault Time Run Seconds Fault Level Warn Enable Warning level z PowerSuite amp Connected Expand or contract branch on tree control Green shaded arrow indicates the selected tree control branch Main window displays the contents of the selected tree control branch Tabs indicate this main window selection includes multiple pages Click on a tab to display its contents 5 Left and right arrows indicate additional tabbed pages Click on these arrows to display additional pages kon 434 1639501 12 2006 Use Steps Navigating the configuration software interface is a simple 2 step process Step Description 1 In the tree control on the left side of the interface navigate to an end branch if necessary click on a node to open that branch then e select the branch you want The selected branch is marked by a green shaded arrow The main window displays information related to the selected branch In the main window on the right side of the interface e if necessary for some multi tabbed pages click on the lt or gt arrow to navigate through the page tabs then s
58. for editing Because this digit will be 0 no further editing is required 2 Q Note Any digit not the focus of editing is hidden and displayed as an asterisk 384 1639501 12 2006 Use Step Description Screen display 6 Press the button to move to the third digit for Change Pswd editing Because this digit also will be 0 no further editing is required 2 O 7 rs Press the button to move to the fourth digit for Change Pswd editing 9 k k k k 0 8 Press the O button once to increment the first Change Pswd digit to the value 1 The sign changes to indicating the value is being edited Qeeey 9 rs Press the button to complete the first entry of Confirm Pswd the new password The LCD displays the screen for confirming the new password 0000 10 Repeat steps 3 through 9 When the new password is confirmed the LCD returns to the previous higher level screen HMI Password Change Pswd 1639501 12 2006 385 Use Fault Management 1 to 1 Overview Fault and Warning Codes When a warning or fault occurs the HMI LCD display e suspends the scrolling parameter list and displays a description of the fault or warning e displays a fault if both a fault and warning are active e shows the most recent fault or warning if multiple faults or multiple warnings are active When a fault or warning occurs
59. n 0 373 420 469 n 1 374 421 470 n 2 375 471 n 3 376 472 n 4 377 473 1639501 12 2006 565 Index motor history 108 characteristics 66 last start max current 110 last start time 110 motor operating time 111 motor starts 109 motor starts per hour 109 motor operating mode independent 225 overload 225 reverser 225 two speed 225 two step 225 motor phases sequence 148 motor predefined operating mode independent 233 overload 230 reverser 237 two speed 247 two step 241 motor protection functions 126 characteristics 125 current phase imbalance 141 current phase loss 145 current phase reversal 148 external ground current 163 ground current 159 internal ground current 160 jam 152 long start 149 motor temperature sensor 166 motor temperature sensor NTC analog 172 motor temperature sensor PTC analog 169 motor temperature sensor PTC binary 167 operation 125 over power factor 204 overcurrent 156 overpower 198 overvoltage 188 thermal overload 130 thermal overload definite time 138 thermal overload inverse thermal 131 under power factor 201 undercurrent 154 underpower 195 undervoltage 185 voltage phase imbalance 177 voltage phase loss 181 voltage phase reversal 184 motor starts count 467 motor step 1 to 2 threshold 489 timeout 489 motor temperature sensor 94 166 481 fault enable 122 166 365 413 fault threshold 122 170 173 365 413 fault
60. the LTM R controller increments a single counter for all warnings However when the LTM R controller detects a thermal overload warning it also increments the thermal overload warnings counter When a fault is automatically reset the LTM R controller increments only the auto resets counter Clearing Counters All fault and warning counters are reset to 0 by executing the Clear Statistics Command 1639501 12 2006 89 Metering and Monitoring Functions All Faults Counter Description The Faults Count parameter contains the number of faults that have occurred since the Clear All Statistics Command last executed The Faults Count parameter increments by a value of 1 when the LTM R controller detects any fault All Warnings Counter Description The Warnings Count parameter contains the number of warnings that have occurred since the Clear All Statistics Command last executed The Warnings Count parameter increments by a value of 1 when the LTM R controller detects any warning Auto Reset Counter Description The Auto Reset Count parameter contains the number of times the LTM R controller attempted but failed to auto reset a fault The Auto Reset Count parameter increments by a value of 1 each time the LTM R controller unsuccessfully attempts to auto reset a fault If an auto reset attempt is successful defined as the same fault not recurring within 60 s this counter is reset to zero If a
61. timeouts and thresholds To clear controller settings parameters set register 705 3 to 1 The following settings are not cleared by this command e Controller characteristics e Connections CT temperature sensor and I O settings e Operating mode e Custom logic Controller setting parameters are cleared without the system being forced into configuration mode Static characteristics are preserved The Clear network port settings command restores the controller s network setting default values port address baud rate and parity To clear controller settings parameters set register 705 4 to 1 After executing this command the network connection is closed To re start the connection you must enter a value for the network port address Other port settings can be used with their default values Controller setting parameters are cleared without the system being forced into configuration mode Static characteristics are preserved Only the network communication becomes ineffective Note For more information about clear commands see p 382 1639501 12 2006 449 Use Simplified Control and Monitoring Overview This is a simplified example of the main registers which control and monitor a Motor Management Controller Registers for The illustration below provides basic setup information using the following registers Simplified configuration control and monitoring system status measure
62. x 100 lavg Current imbalance ratio for three phase in limb Max li1 li2 1i3 The line current imbalance function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Unit Accuracy e 1 5 for 8 A and 27 A units e 3 for 100 A units Resolution 1 Refresh interval 100 ms 76 1639501 12 2006 Metering and Monitoring Functions Thermal Capacity Level Description Trip Current Characteristics Thermal Capacity Models The thermal capacity level function calculates the amount of thermal capacity used and estimates the amount of time remaining until a fault condition is reached Refer to Time to Trip p 112 After a fault this function estimates the thermal capacity and time required for the motor to cool calculations Refer to Minimum Wait Time p 114 This function uses two thermal models one for copper stator and rotor windings of the motor and the other for the iron frame of the motor The thermal model with the maximum utilized capacity is reported This function also estimates and displays e the time remaining before a thermal overload fault is triggered and e the time remaining until the fault condition is cleared after a thermal overload fault has been triggered The Thermal Capacity level function uses one of the following selected trip current characteristics TCCs e definite time e inverse thermal default Both copper and iron mo
63. 000 02 ee ae 391 Physical Description 1 to many 0 000 c eee cee eee 393 Command Lines 1 to many 0 0 0 60 aaea 397 Navigating the Menu Structure 1 to many 00 00 e eee eee eee 398 Editing Values 1 to many 2 0 0 0 e cece eee 400 Executing a Value Write Command 1 to many 00e eee eee 403 Menu Structure 1 to many 0000 cece eee 405 Menu Structure Home Page 1 to many 00 cece eee eee 406 Menu Structure All LTM R Controllers and the HMI 1 to many 407 Motor Starter Page 1 to many 0 0 0 c cece eee 410 Settings 1 to many 2 0 0 c eee eee 412 Statistics 1 to many nuaa cece tees 419 Product ID 1 to many 0 cece eee eee 422 Monitoring 1 to many 00 00 c ete tees 423 Fault Management 1 to many 0 0 0 0 e eect eee 424 Service Commands 1 to many 00 00 e cece eee 425 Using PowerSuite Software 0000s 426 Software Installation 0 0 0 c cee eee 427 User Interface i niga edsb tere bo Shed eh de idee a dan held 428 File M gemMeNt r evens eens e Sek wale okt Vile wees bee See ed 430 Navigation s svea betes ie Fie eS a ee Dees ed 434 Configuring Parameters 0 0 0 cece tees 436 8 7 Chapter 9 Appendices Appendix A Appendix B Configuration Functions Using PowerSuite 0 0 0 0 0c eee eee ee 438 Metering and Monitoring 0 c
64. 1 increments Warning enable Enable Disable Disable Warning threshold 20 800 of Motor nominal power 150 The overpower function has the following characteristics Characteristics Value Hysteresis 95 of Fault threshold or Warning threshold Accuracy 5 1639501 12 2006 199 Motor Protection Functions Example The following diagram describes the occurrence of an overpower fault P A PS24 echoes oa Secs Slaece ste Se Dae hobs cle A fault timeout lt ___ Ps2 Overpower fault threshold 200 1639501 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Under Power Factor Description Functional Characteristics The under power factor protection function monitors the value of the power factor and signals e a warning when the value of the power factor falls below a set threshold e a fault when the value of the power factor falls below a separately set threshold and remains below that threshold for a set period of time This function has a single fault time delay The under power factor protection function is available only in run state when the LTM R controller is connected to an expansion module Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled The function applies to both single phase and 3 phase motors The under power factor function includes the following features e 2 thresholds e Under Power Factor Warnin
65. 1 Master PLC PC or communication module 2 Modbus cable depending on the type of master with polarization integrated on the master side or on another part of the bus See the List of connection accessories Modbus splitter box LU9 GC3 Modbus drop cables VW3 A8 306 Ree Line terminators VW3 A8 306 R Modbus T junction boxes VW3 A8 306 TFee with cable Modbus cable to another splitter box VW3 A8 306 Ree replaces 5 NO oR W Note Place a line terminator at each end of the bus to avoid malfunctions on the communication bus A T junction box should not have a free connector if it is not connected to a slave or to the master attach a line terminator Note It is important to connect the bus to the IN input or the screw terminals on the bottom of the splitter box Connection to another splitter box is made via the OUT output 1639501 12 2006 309 Installation List of connection accessories Designation Description Reference Modbus splitter box 10 RJ45 connectors and LU9 GC3 1 screw terminal Modbus T junction boxes With 0 3 m 1 ft integrated cable VW3 A8 306 TFO3 With 1 m 3 2 ft integrated cable VW3 A8 306 TF10 Line terminators for R 150 Q VW3 A8 306 R RJ45 connector List of connection cables Designation Connectors Length Reference Cables for 1 RJ45 connector and 3 m 9 8 ft VW3 A8 306 D30 Modbus bus 1 stripped end 0 3 m 1 ft VW3 A8 306 R03 2 RJ
66. 1 minutes Restart threshold 68 115 of Motor nominal voltage 90 1639501 12 2006 123 Motor Protection Functions Power Protection Functions When connected to an expansion module the LTM R controller provides the additional power protection functions listed below All of the following functions can be enabled or disabled Protection functions Parameters Setting range Factory setting Underpower Fault enable Enable Disable Disable Fault Timeout 1 100 s in 1 s increments 60s Fault threshold 20 800 of Motor nominal power 20 of Motor in 1 increments nominal power Warning enable Enable Disable Disable Warning threshold 20 800 of Motor nominal power 20 of Motor in 1 increments nominal power Overpower Fault enable Enable Disable Disable Fault timeout 1 100 s in 1 s increments 60s Fault threshold 20 800 of Motor nominal power in 1 increments 150 of Motor nominal power Warning enable Enable Disable Disable Warning threshold 20 800 of Motor nominal power in 1 increments 150 of Motor nominal power Under power factor Fault enable Enable Disable Disable Fault timeout 1 25 s in 0 1 s increments 10s Fault threshold 0 1 in 0 01 increments 0 60 Warning enable Enable Disable Disable Warning threshold 0 1 in 0 01 increments 0 60 Over power factor Fault enable Enable Disable Disable Fault timeout 1
67. 195 Overpower 198 Under Power Factor 201 Over Power Factor 204 194 1639501 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Underpower Description Functional Characteristics The underpower function signals e a warning when the value of active power falls below a set threshold e a fault when the value of active power falls and remains below a separately set threshold for a set period of time This function has a single fault time delay Both the fault and warning thresholds are defined as a percentage of the Motor Nominal Power parameter setting Pnom The underpower function is available only in run state when the LTM R controller is connected to an expansion module Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled The function applies to both single phase and 3 phase motors The underpower function includes the following features e 2 thresholds e Underpower Warning Threshold e Underpower Fault Threshold e 1 fault time delay e Underpower Fault Timeout e 2 function outputs e Underpower Warning e Underpower Fault e 1 counting statistic e Underpower Faults Count 1639501 12 2006 195 Motor Protection Functions Block Diagram Underpower warning and fault Vavg gt lavg gt Power Factor Parameter Settings Function Characteristics Run state amp Underpower warning pe P lt P
68. 202 1639501 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Example The following diagram describes the occurrence of an under power factor fault PF PFs2 N e ee pee eee re eee fault timeout lt __ _ UPFs2 under power factor fault threshold 1639501 12 2006 203 Motor Protection Functions Over Power Factor Description Functional Characteristics The over power factor protection function monitors the value of the power factor and signals e a warning when the value of the power factor exceeds a set threshold e a fault when the value of the power factor exceeds a separately set threshold and remains above that threshold for a set period of time This function has a single fault time delay The over power factor protection function is available only in run state when the LTM R controller is connected to an expansion module Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled The function applies to both single phase and 3 phase motors The over power factor function includes the following features e 2 thresholds e Over Power Factor Warning Threshold e Over Power Factor Fault Threshold e 1 fault time delay e Over Power Factor Fault Timeout e 2 function outputs e Over Power Factor Warning e Over Power Factor Fault e 1 counting statistic e Over Power Factor Faults Count 204 1639501 12 2006 Motor Protection Functi
69. 396 1639501 12 2006 Use Command Lines 1 to many Overview line is identified by a Use the HMI keypad and keys to execute text line commands A command e atthe right end of the text line or e atthe left end of the text line A command can be executed only when its text line has focus A text line has focus when the lt or gt at either end of the text line plus any additional command character is blinking Command Lines The 1 to many menu structure presents 4 different kinds of command lines depending upon the command character if any next to the command line arrow as follows Command line characters Description Left Right lt gt Links to a page With no character next to the blinking arrow click the e keypad button to move to the page indicated by the left arrow e S keypad button to move to the page indicated by the right arrow N A 0p Toggle bit commands zore With a 0 or a 1 next to the blinking arrow click the S 1 gt keypad button to toggle the Boolean setting value 4 v gt Value write commands With a v next to the blinking arrow click the e keypad button to execute the command indicated by the left arrow e keypad button to execute the command indicated by the right arrow For example e Reset to Defaults Statistics e Reset to Defaults Settings Self Test 4 gt Command cannot execute There is no connection between the HMI and the
70. 4 Avg Volts Average Voltage n 4 L3 L1 Volts L3 L1 Voltage n 4 L1 L2 Volts L1 L2 Voltage n 4 L2 L3 Volts L2 L3 Voltage n 4 Volt Ph Imb Voltage Phase Imbalance n 4 Frequency Frequency n 4 Active Power Active Power n 4 Power Factor Power Factor n 4 Temp Sensor Motor Temp Sensor n 4 1639501 12 2006 377 Use Main Menu Product ID 1 to 1 Product ID menu LTMR Controller Expansion Module Network Sub menus The Product ID sub menu is the fourth selection in Level 2 of the Main menu The Product ID menu contains information about the LTM R controller expansion module and network communications module in the following Level 3 sub menus e LTM R controller e Expansion module e Network The Controller Expansion Module and Network sub menus contain the following read only parameters Level 3 Level 4 Parameter name reference Controller Comm Ref Controller Commercial Reference Firmware Controller Firmware Version CurrentRange LTM R controller amperage Control Volt LTM R controller voltage Digital 1 0 The number of logic inputs and logic outputs Exp Module Comm Ref Expansion Commercial Reference Firmware Expansion Firmware Version Control Volt LTM R controller voltage Digital 1 0 The number of logic inputs Ready The operational status of the expansion module Network Protocol Network Port Commercial Reference Firmware Network Port Firmware Version
71. 463 48 UInt Expansion compatibility code 1 49 60 Not significant 61 Ulnt Network port ID code 62 Ulnt Network port firmware version See DT_Firmware Version p 463 63 Ulnt Network port compatibility code 64 69 Word 6 Controller commercial reference See DT_CommercialReference p 459 70 74 Word 5 Controller serial number 75 Word Controller ID code 76 Ulnt Controller firmware version See DT_Firmware Version p 463 77 Ulnt Controller compatibility code 78 Ulnt Current scale ratio 0 1 79 Ulnt Current sensor max 80 Word Not significant 1 81 Ulnt Current range max x 0 1 A 82 94 Not significant 95 Ulnt Load CT ratio x 0 1 A 96 Ulnt Full load current max maximum FLC range FLC Full Load Current x 0 1 A 97 99 Forbidden 1639501 12 2006 465 Use Statistics Variables Statistics Overview Statistics variables are grouped according to the following criteria Trip statistics are contained into a main table and an extension table Statistics variable groups Registers Global statistics 100 to 121 LTM monitoring statistics 122 to 149 Last trip statistics 150 to 179 and extension 300 to 309 Trip n 1 statistics 180 to 209 and extension 330 to 339 Trip n 2 statistics 210 to 239 and extension 360 to 369 Trip n 3 statistics 240 to 269 and extension 390 to 399 Trip n 4 statistics 270 to 299 and extension 420 to 429 466 1639501 12 2006 Use Global Statis
72. A CAUTION and and and e operating in Run state and See instructions below FAILURE TO STOP AND RISK OF UNINTENDED OPERATION LTM R controller operation cannot be stopped from the terminals when control mode is changed to Local Terminal Strip control mode if the LTM R controller is e operating in Overload operating mode e configured for Bumpless transfer of control mode e operated over a network using Network control mode e configured for 3 wire impulse control Failure to follow this instruction can result in injury or equipment damage 212 1639501 12 2006 Motor Control Functions Fallback Transitions Whenever control mode is changed to Local Terminal Strip control mode operation of the LTM R controller cannot be stopped from the terminals because no terminal input is assigned to a STOP command If this behavior is not intended the control mode must be changed to either Network control mode or Local HMI control mode to command a STOP To implement this change take one of the following precautionary steps e the commissioner should configure the LTM R controller for either bump transfer of control mode or 2 wire control e the installer should provide the LTM R controller with a means of interrupting current to the contactor coil for example a push button station wired in series with the LTM R controller outputs e the controls engineer should assign a terminal input to disable
73. Connector Terminal block and RJ45 Polarization At master level Physical The LTM R controller is equipped with 2 connector types on the front face Interface and 1 a female shielded RJ45 connector Connectors 2 an open style pull apart terminal block The figure shows the LTM R front face with the Modbus connectors TINNA A1 A2 13 C 14 I5 C LTMRO8MBD MODBUS Ia o l i gt B 4 Oo oO Q O E N 97098 95426 HMI Comm _ Power f Alarm Fallback PLC Comm _ N14 23 24 33 34 ISSSSCY Both connectors are electrically identical They follow the Schneider Electric interoperability standards The product must be connected only through 1 port 1639501 12 2006 305 Installation RJ45 Connector The LTM R controller is connected to the Modbus network with an RJ45 connector Pinout in compliance with the following wiring Front view D1 DO OVL The RJ45 wiring layout is Pin no Signal Description 1 Do not connect 2 Do not connect 3 PMC Port mode control optional 4 D1 or D B Transceiver terminal 1 5 DO or D A Transceiver terminal 0 6 Do not connect 7 VP Positive 5 24 Vdc power supply recommended 8 OVL Signal and power supply common Open Style The LTM R controller front face shows a 5 position terminal block with 5 08 mm
74. Example Components The application example includes the following components Deed Item Component description Reference number 1 LTM R 100 240Vac Modbus Motor Management LTMR27MFM Controller 1 35 27 A FLC 2 LTM E 24VDC Expansion Module LTMEV40BD 3 LTM R to LTM E RJ45 connection cable LU9R10 4 PowerSuite cable kit VW3A8106 5 PowerSuite software on CD ROM with LTM R upgrade LTM CONF 6 External ground fault CT TA30 7 External PTC binary motor temperature sensor User supplied Functions e Motor status is indicated Performed e Motor state On Off Warning Fault is indicated by LTM R controller LEDs e Thermal overload protection is provided e Motor temp sensor protection is provided e Voltage protection is required because undervoltage conditions are known to cause motor winding damage e External ground fault protection is provided e Initial system configuration is performed during commissioning using PC and PowerSuite software External HMI device or PLC not required However an HMI is optional for later use to fine tune parameter settings after an initial period of operation Prerequisites This application example assumes that the application designer has selected and properly installed the required hardware and that the application has been commissioned by setting all minimally required configuration parameters This example further assumes e The motor is present e The LTM R contro
75. Fault 2 counting statistics e Thermal Overload Faults Count e Thermal Overload Warnings Count 1 setting for an external auxiliary motor cooling fan e Motor Aux Fan Cooled 1 measure of utilized thermal capacity e Thermal Capacity Level Note For LTM R controllers configured for 2 speed predefined operating mode two fault thresholds are used FLC1 and FLC2 1639501 12 2006 135 Motor Protection Functions Block Diagram Thermal Omax gt 0s1 Overload Warning e max gt 100 Thermal Lp Overload Fault 11 e Copper temperature cu 12 te Imax E deuce Imax x 1 Le t TC x Vee 13 Seen Oxo 8cu 2 Ocu Ocu FLC x 1 414 Omax Scaled Ode Ofe te 2 pr Ofe Ofe FLC x 1 125 Fast Motor Aux Fan Cooled cooling lavg gt 0 1 x FLC gt OR Imax e gt Iron temperature Ofe L E Ofe Imax x 1 Lee 4 58 71 Motor Trip Class TC e Iron Trip Class TCfe x4 JA 17 79 copper trip class constant 58 71 iron trip class constant e Eulers constant 2 71828 FLC Full load current parameter value FLC1 or FLC2 Imax Maximum phase current t time TC Motor Trip Class value TCfe Iron Trip Class value cu Copper temperature cu Scaled copper temperature o
76. Fault Threshold Fault Time External Ground Current Fault Timeout Fit AftStart Ground Current Fault After Starting Warn Enable Ground Current Warning Enable Warn Level External Ground Current Warning Threshold WarnAftStart Ground Current Warning After Starting 1639501 12 2006 367 Use Voltage The Voltage sub menu contains the following editable parameters Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Parameter name reference Voltage Volt Ph Imb Fault Enable Voltage Phase Imbalance Fault Enable Fault Level Voltage Phase Imbalance Fault Threshold FitTimeStart Voltage Phase Imbalance Fault Timeout Starting FitTimeRun Voltage Phase Imbalance Fault Timeout Running Warn Enable Voltage Phase Imbalance Warning Enable Warn Level Voltage Phase Imbalance Warning Threshold Volt Ph Loss Fault Enable Voltage Phase Loss Fault Enable Fault Time Voltage Phase Loss Fault Timeout Warn Enable Voltage Phase Loss Warning Enable Volt Ph Rev Fault Enable Voltage Phase Reversal Fault Enable UnderVoltage Fault Enable Undervoltage Fault Enable Fault Level Undervoltage Fault Threshold Fault Time Undervoltage Fault Timeout Warn Enable Undervoltage Warning Enable Warn Level Undervoltage Warning Threshold Voltage continued OverVoltage Fault Enable Overvoltage Fault Enable Fault Level Overvoltage Fault Threshold Fault Time Overvoltage Fault Timeout Warn Enable Overvoltage Warning Enable Warn Level Overvoltage
77. Functions Protection Category Monitored fault Control mode Local terminal strip Local HMI Network Thermal overload Definite RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC Inverse Thermal RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC Current Long Start RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC Jam RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC Current Phase Imbalance RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC Current Phase Loss RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC Undercurrent RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC Overcurrent RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC External Ground Current RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC Internal Ground Current RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC Voltage Undervoltage RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC Overvoltage RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC Voltage Phase Imbalance RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC Power Underpower RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC Overpower RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC Under Power Factor RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC Over Power Factor RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC Communication Loss PLC to LTM R RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC LTM E to LTM R RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB Test Reset button on the LTM R controller front face or the local HMI PC Power cycle on the LTM R controller 1 5 Set 1 5 logic input on the LTM R controller NC Network command 266 1639501 12 2006 Motor Control Func
78. GrCurrRatio Ground Current Ratio n 0 Curr Ph Imb Current Phase Imbalance n 0 Th Capacity Thermal Capacity Level n 0 Avg Volts Average Voltage n 0 L3 L1 Volts L3 L1 Voltage n 0 L1 L2 Volts L1 L2 Voltage n 0 L2 L3 Volts L2 L3 Voltage n 0 Volt Ph Imb Voltage Phase Imbalance n 0 Frequency Frequency n 0 Active Power Active Power n 0 Power Factor Power Factor n 0 Temp Sensor Motor Temp Sensor n 0 1639501 12 2006 373 Use Fault n 1 records information in the following parameters Level 3 Level 4 Parameter name reference Fault n 1 Fault Code Fault Code n 1 Date Date And Time n 1 Time FLC Ratio Motor Full Load Current Ratio n 1 FLC Max Motor Full Load Current Max n 1 Avg Current Average Current n 1 L1 Current L1 Current n 1 L2 Current L2 Current n 1 L3 Current L3 Current n 1 Gr Current Ground Current n 1 AvgCurrRatio Average Current Ratio n 1 L1CurrRatio L1 Current Ratio n 1 L2CurrRatio L2 Current Ratio n 1 L3CurrRatio L3 Current Ratio n 1 GrCurrRatio Ground Current Ratio n 1 Curr Ph Imb Current Phase Imbalance n 1 Th Capacity Thermal Capacity Level n 1 Avg Volts Average Voltage n 1 L3 L1 Volts L3 L1 Voltage n 1 L1 L2 Volts L1 L2 Voltage n 1 L2 L3 Volts L2 L3 Voltage n 1 Volt Ph Imb Voltage Phase Imbalance n 1 Frequency Frequency n 1 Active Power Active Power n 1 Power Factor Power Factor n 1 Temp Sensor Motor Temp Sens
79. LOSS Fault Current Phase Loss Fault Enable Fault Time Current Phase Loss Timeout Warn Current Phase Loss Warning Enable Current Curr Ph Reversal Fault Current Phase Reversal Fault Enable continued Long Start Fault Long Start Fault Enable Fault Level Long Start Fault Threshold Fault Time Long Start Fault Timeout Jam Fault Jam Fault Enable Fault Level Jam Fault Threshold Fault Time Jam Fault Timeout Warn Jam Warning Enable Warn Level Jam Warning Threshold 414 1639501 12 2006 Use Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Parameter name Settings Addr 1 8 Current Over Under Current OVER CURRENT continued Fault Overcurrent Fault Enable Fault Level Overcurrent Fault Threshold Fault Time Overcurrent Fault Timeout Warn Overcurrent Warning Enable Warn Level Overcurrent Warning Threshold UNDER CURRENT Fault Undercurrent Fault Enable Fault Level Undercurrent Fault Threshold Fault Time Undercurrent Fault Timeout Warn Undercurrent Warning Enable Warn Level Undercurrent Warning Threshold Current Ground Current Fault Ground Current Mode continued GR CT Mode Ground Current Fault Enable IntFitLvl Internal Ground Current Fault Threshold IntFitTime Internal Ground Current Fault Timeout ExtFitLvl External Ground Current Fault Threshold ExtFitTime External Ground Current Fault Timeout Warn Ground Current Warning Enable IntWarnLvl Internal Grou
80. LTM R dynamically changing values of the following parameters Controller e Current Average Current Ratio L1 Current Ratio L2 Current Ratio L3 Current Ratio Ground Current Ratio Current Phase Imbalance e Thermal e Thermal Capacity Level e Time To Trip e Motor Temp Sensor e Voltage e Average Voltage e L1 L2 Voltage e L2 L3 Voltage e L3 L1 Voltage e Voltage Phase Imbalance e Power e Power Factor e Active Power e Reactive Power For more information on the motor starters page see p 470 1639501 12 2006 423 Use Fault Management 1 to many Overview Fault Display Pages Opening Closing the Fault Display When a fault occurs the Magelis XBTN410 HMI automatically opens a fault display consisting of 1 page for each active fault Each page contains the e fault name e address of the LTM R controller experiencing the fault e total number of unresolved faults A typical fault display page looks like this oO a THERMAL OVERLOAD Motor Starter 1 lt fault display page number total number of active faults fault name flashing address of LTM R controller experiencing the fault flashing kOoONnD If more than 1 fault is active use the gt and keypad buttons to move back and forth through the fault display pages Because some fault messages contain more than 4 lines of text you may need to use the and P keypad buttons to scroll up and down within
81. Ln FLC Where e FLC FLC1 or FLC2 parameter setting whichever is active at the time Ln L1 L2 or L3 current value in amperes 1639501 12 2006 69 Metering and Monitoring Functions Line Current Ratio Characteristics The line current ratio function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Unit of FLC Accuracy See p 69 Resolution 1 FLC Refresh interval 100 ms 70 1639501 12 2006 Metering and Monitoring Functions Ground Current Description and as a percentage of FLCmin The LTM R controller measures ground currents and provides values in amperes The internal ground current is a measured value and reports 0 when the current falls below 10 of FLCmin The external ground current depends on the parameter settings and reports the calculated value at any current level Ground Current The ground current function returns the value of the ground current The ground current is either calculated by the LTM R controller from the 3 line currents measured by the load current transformers I0 or measured by the external ground current transformer l0 Configurable The control mode configuration has the following configurable parameter setting Parameters Parameter Setting range Factory setting Ground Current Mode Internal Internal e External Ground Current Ratio e None None 100 1 e 200 1 5
82. MWO 1 Read report MW100 4 ou hh WN Example of a The example below describes a WRITE_VAR request within a TSX Micro or Write Operation Premium platform in order to control an LTM R by sending the contents of internal Modbus Request word MW 502 Code 16 If MO AND NOT MW200 X0 THEN WRITE VAR ADRH3 0 4 0 4 Teun Boa n P uws02 1 1 MW200 fa0r200 4 RESET M10 n Ee Sb Address of the device with which you wish to communicate 3 device address 0 channel 4 device address on the bus Type of PL7 objects to be written MW internal word Address of the first register to be written 704 Number of consecutive registers to be written 1 Word table containing the value of the objects to be sent MW502 1 Write report MW200 4 ORON 452 1639501 12 2006 Use User Map User Defined Indirect Registers User Map User Map is based on an indirect addressing system It is designed to improve Overview communication performance and flexibility User Map Details User Map allows you to read values of non contiguous registers in a continuous way Information is organized into 2 tables containing addresses and values The first table stores the addresses of registers to be read or written By default all addresses are null which means that the addresses have not been assigned The second table is the read and write access point to assigned register values 1639501 12 2006 453 Use Mo
83. OO000000000 OOOO A1 A2 1 4 12 13 C 14 15 C 16 97 98 95 96 NO NC Peer LTMR100MBD MODBUS p o ESE Ess 8 Satas S WL i a G co Cc Test Reset NO NO NO 13 14 23 24 33 34 Zi Z2 T1 T2 D1 DO S V NC 0 02 0019 OOOO De DoE TO 7 1 Test Reset button N modu COON OO amp WO le 7 HMI port with RJ45 connector connecting the LTM R controller to an HMI PC or expansion Network port with RJ45 connector connecting the LTM R controller to a Modbus PLC Status indicating LEDs Plug in terminal control power and internally powerd logic inputs and commons Plug in terminal double pole single throw DPST output relay Plug in terminal output relay Plug in terminal ground fault input and temperature sensor input Plug in terminal PLC network The Test Reset button performs a reset a self test or places the LTM R controller in an internal fault state For a detailed description of the test rest button functions see p 342 This port connects the LTM R controller to the following devices over the HMI port using an RJ45 connector e an expansion module e a PC running PowerSuite software e a Magelis XBTN410
84. Overload 3 wire e Independent 2 wire e Independent 3 wire e Reverser 2 wire e Reverser 3 wire e Two Step 2 wire e Two Step 3 wire e Two Speed 2 wire Two Speed 3 wire e Custom Control Direct Transition e Yes No X e No Motor Transition Timeout 000 999 s 10s X 7 Motor Step 1 To 2 Threshold 20 800 FLC in 50 Xx increments of 1 Motor Step 1 To 2 Timeout 000 999 s 50 s Motor Nominal Power 0 1 999 9 kW in 7 5 kW X increments of 0 1 kW Motor Aux Fan Cooled e Yes No X X e No Motor Temp Sensor Type e None None X e PTC binary e PTC analog e NTC analog 1 Only for 2 Step Operating Mode X The parameter is located in the indicated menu in the Magelis XBTN410 HMI 1 to 1 The parameter is not located in the indicated menu in the Magelis XBTN410 HMI 1 to 1 324 1639501 12 2006 Commissioning Load CT Required parameters include the following load current transformer settings Parameters Parameter Setting Range Factory Default Sys Config Main Load CT Ratio e None No Default X e 10 1 e 15 1 e 30 1 e 50 1 e 100 1 e 200 1 e 400 1 e 800 1 e Other Ratio Load CT Multiple Passes 1 100 1 X Load CT Primary 1 65535 1 X Load CT Secondary 1 500 1 X X The parameter is located in the indicated menu in the Magelis XBTN410 HMI 1 to 1 The parameter is not located in the
85. PTC connection error Check for e short circuit or open circuit in the motor temp sensor wiring wrong type of motor temp sensing device improper configuration of parameters for selected device After all checks are complete 1 Perform a fault reset 2 If the fault persists cycle power and wait 30 s 3 If the fault persists replace the LTM R controller Voltage phase loss error Check for improper wiring such as loose terminations blown fuse cut wire single phase motor configured for 3 phase operation failure to wire a single phase motor through both A and C load CT windows e failure of power source for example utility power failure After all checks are complete 1 Perform fault reset 2 If the fault persists cycle power and wait 30 s 3 If the fault persists replace the LTM R controller 1639501 12 2006 501 Maintenance Preventive Maintenance Overview The following protective measures should be performed between major system checks to help maintain your system and protect it against irrecoverable hardware or software failure e continuously review operating statistics e save LTM R controller parameter configuration settings to a backup file e maintain the LTM R controller s operating environment e periodically perform a LTM R controller self test e check the LTM R controller internal clock to ensure accuracy Statistics The LTM R controller collects the fo
86. R controller will be used to be able to configure the protection monitoring and control functions for the application For information about configuring control parameters see p 207 For information about configuring protection parameters see p 115 The LTM R controller is ready to be initialized after the hardware installation is complete To initialize the LTM R controller e be sure the motor is off then e turn on the LTM R controller A CAUTION IMPROPER INITIALIZATION Disconnect power to the motor before initializing the LTM R controller Failure to follow this instruction can result in injury or equipment damage Neither the LTM R controller nor the expansion module require additional hardware configuration for example turning dials or setting dip switches to be initialized When powered up for the first time the LTM R controller enters an initial state and is ready for commissioning 316 1639501 12 2006 Commissioning Configuration Tools Identify the configuration control source and the configuration tool before configuring parameters The LTM R controller and expansion module can be configured locally using an HMI device or remotely via the network connection The LTM R controller can be commissioned using ea Magelis XBTN410 HMI on which a 1 to 1 software application has been installed e aPC running PowerSuite software e a PLC connected to the LTM R controller s network p
87. Structure 1 to 1 Overview Example Use the Er and buttons to navigate the Sys Config and Main menus scroll within a value list select a setting in a value list exit a value list without making a selection Note that in the example below the button serves 2 different purposes 1 steps into the next lower level of the menu structure 2 selects an item in a value list and returns to the previous higher level screen Menu structure navigation example Settings Language Language Language Francais Francais lt Settings Date Time ENTE Date Time Year Year 2006 1639501 12 2006 357 Use Editing Values 1 to 1 Overview Use the Gre and buttons to select and edit settings There are 2 ways to edit setting values using the Magelis XBTN410 HMI in a 1 to 1 configuration e selecting an item in a value list e editing a numerical value one digit at a time Note Some settings although expressed as numerical values are selected in the same manner as an item in a value list For example a setting with a value that is expressed in units but can be incremented or decremented only by tens or hundreds of units is edited by scrolling through a value list Editing any value requires familiarity with the Magelis XBTN410 menu structure
88. Sys Config menu parameters is complete when the End Config setting is set to Yes This clears the Controller System Config Required parameter After the Sys Config menu has been configured the Magelis XBTN410 HMI displays the Main menu on subsequent power ups The HMI will not again display the Sys Config menu unless e the Controller System Config Required parameter has been cleared by e executing a Clear All Command or e upgrading the LTM R controller s firmware e Sys Config is selected in the Services menu see p 382 1639501 12 2006 327 Commissioning Sys Config Menu The SysConfig menu contains the following 4 levels of sub menu items Structure Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Parameter name Language HMI Language Setting Date Time Year Date And Time Setting Month Day Hour Minutes Seconds Motor Nom Voltage Motor Nominal Voltage Phases Motor Phases Phase Seq Motor Phases Sequence Oper Mode Motor Operating Mode Dir Transit Control Direct Transition Transit Time Motor Transition Timeout 2 Step Level Motor Step 1 To 2 Threshold 2 Step Time Motor Step 1 To 2 Timeout Aux Fan Motor Aux Fan Cooled Temp Sensor Motor Temp Sensor Type Gr CT Mode Ground Current Mode Load CT Load CT Ratio Load CT Ratio Primary Load CT Primary Secondary Load CT Secondary Load CT Multiple Passes Load CT Multiple Passes GF CT Ratio Primary
89. UInt Controller port ID 511 UInt Time to trip x 1 s 512 UInt Motor last start current ratio FLC 1639501 12 2006 481 Use Register Variable type Read only variables Note p 455 513 UInt Motor last start duration s 514 UInt Motor starts per hour count 515 Word Phase imbalances register bit O L1 current highest imbalance bit 1 L2 current highest imbalance bit 2 L3 current highest imbalance bit 3 L1 L2 voltage highest imbalance 1 bit 4 L2 L3 voltage highest imbalance 1 bit 5 L3 L1 voltage highest imbalance 1 bits 6 15 Not significant 516 523 Reserved 524 539 Forbidden 482 1639501 12 2006 Use Configuration Variables Configuration Configuration variables are described below Variables Configuration variable groups Registers Configuration 540 to 649 Setting 650 to 699 Register Variable type Read Write variables Note p 455 540 UInt Motor operating mode B See DT_ExtOperatingMode p 461 541 UInt Motor transition timeout s 542 545 Reserved 546 UInt Thermal overload configuration B bits 0 2 Motor temperature sensor type 0 None 1 PTC binary 3 PTC analog 4 NTC analog bits 3 4 Thermal overload mode 0 Definite 1 Inverse thermal bits 5 15 Reserved 547 UInt Thermal overload fault definite timeout 548 Rese
90. Unit 65535 Network Port Commercial Reference5 Unit 0 65535 Network Port Commercial Reference6 Unit 65535 Network Port SerialNumber1 Unit 0 65535 Network Port SerialNumber2 Unit 65535 Network Port SerialNumber3 Unit 65535 Network Port SerialNumber4 Unit 65535 Network Port SerialNumber5 Unit 65535 Network Port IDCode Unit 255 Network Port Firmware Version Unit 65535 Network Port Compatibility Code Unit 0 65535 Controller Commercial Reference1 Unit 0 19540 65535 Controller Commercial Reference2 Unit 19794 65535 Controller Commercial Reference3 Unit 12344 65535 Controller Commercial Reference4 Unit 19782 65535 Controller Commercial Reference5 Unit 19744 65535 Controller Commercial Reference6 Unit 8224 65535 Controller SerialNumber1 Unit 18765 65535 Controller SerialNumber2 Unit 20562 65535 Controller SerialNumber3 Unit 11568 65535 Controller SerialNumber4 Unit 12850 65535 Controller SerialNumber5 Unit 8224 65535 Controller IDCode Unit 0 65535 Controller Firmware Version Unit 11507 65535 Address Find NT 1 1 1 1 1 a a a a a a Zz a a a a a a a a PDP PPPPPPPPPE 0069000060090 PowerSuite E Connected QuickWatch Instead of monitoring large groupings of parameters you can elect to monitor only Window a short list of parameters that you select To do this Step Description 1 In the View menu select QuickWatch Window The QuickWatch Window opens 2 In the QuickWatch Window type in a
91. Warning Threshold 368 1639501 12 2006 Use Power LoadShed The Voltage and Load Shed sub menus contain the following editable parameters Diagnostics and Lock Outs Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Parameter name reference Power UnderPower Fault Enable Underpower Fault Enable Fault Level Underpower Fault Threshold Fault Time Underpower Fault Timeout Warn Enable Underpower Warning Enable Warn Level Underpower Warning Threshold OverPower Fault Enable Overpower Fault Enable Fault Level Overpower Fault Threshold Fault Time Overpower Fault Timeout Warn Enable Overpower Warning Enable Warn Level Overpower Warning Threshold Power continued Under PF Fault Enable Under Power Factor Fault Enable Fault Level Under Power Factor Fault Threshold Fault Time Under Power Factor Fault Timeout Warn Enable Under Power Factor Warning Enable Warn Level Under Power Factor Warning Threshold Over PF Fault Enable Over Power Factor Fault Enable Fault Level Over Power Factor Fault Threshold Fault Time Over Power Factor Fault Timeout Warn Enable Over Power Factor Warning Enable Warn Level Over Power Factor Warning Threshold Load Shed Fault Enable Load Shedding Enable Fault Level Load Shedding Threshold Fault Time Load Shedding Timeout Restart Level Load Shedding Restart Threshold Restart Time Load Shedding Restart Timeout Diagnostics DiagFault
92. a fault display page and display the entire fault message The 1 to many HMI automatically opens the fault display whenever a fault occurs When you remove the cause of a specific fault and execute a fault reset command that fault no longer appears in the fault display You can also close the fault display by clicking the keypad button This does not fix the underlying cause of any fault nor it does not clear any fault You can re open the fault display at any time by navigating to the Home page scrolling to the Faults command line then clicking the keypad button If you open the fault display when no faults are active the HMI displays the message No Faults Present For more information about navigating the menu structure see p 398 424 1639501 12 2006 Use Service Commands 1 to many Overview The Magelis XBTN410 in 1 to many configuration provides the following service commands Command Description Location reference Self Test Performs an internal check of the LTM R Level 3 Motor Starter page see p 411 controller and expansion module and p 503 Reset to Defaults Statistics Executes the Clear Statistics Command for a selected LTM R controller Level 2 Reset to Defaults page see p 409 Reset to Defaults Settings Executes the Clear Controller Settings Command for a selected LTM R controller Level 2 Reset to Defaults page see p 409
93. and general navigation principles For information on menu navigation see p 357 For information on the menu structure see p 362 358 1639501 12 2006 Use Selecting Values in a List The following example describes the selection of a Thermal Overload Trip Class setting Step Description Screen display 1 Navigate to the Thermal Overload Trip Class parameter Th Overload Trip Class 2 Press the button to step into the Thermal Overload Trip Class Trip Class value list The sign indicates the displayed value is this parameter s saved setting 5 3 Press the A button to move to the next value in the Trip Class list and press the Co button move to the previous 24 value in the list The indicates the displayed value is 10 not this parameter s saved setting 4 When you have displayed the desired value press the Ge Trip Class button to save the setting The changes to a indicating the selected value is now this parameter s 10 saved setting After displaying the new setting for 2 seconds the HMI automatically returns to the previous higher level screen Th Overload Trip Class 1639501 12 2006 359 Use Editing Numerical Values The following example describes changing the Long Start Fault Timeout setting from its default value of 10 seconds to a new setting of 25 seconds
94. and sets the behavior of the input command following the return of power after an outage Control Circuit Type Behavior of logic inputs I 1 and 1 2 2 wire maintained The LTM R controller after detecting the rising edge on the input assigned to start the motor issues a run command The run command remains active only while the input is active The signal is not latched 3 wire impulse The LTM R controller e after detecting the rising edge on the input assigned to start the motor latches the run command and e after a stop command disables the run command to disable the output relay wired in series with the coil of the contactor that turns the motor on or off e following a stop must detect a rising edge on the input to latch the run command Control logic assignments for logic inputs 1 1 1 2 1 3 and 1 4 are described in each of the predefined motor operating modes Note In Network control mode network commands behave as 2 wire control commands regardless of the control circuit type of the selected operating mode For information on Control Modes see p 210 In each pre defined operating mode logic inputs 1 3 1 4 1 5 and 1 6 behave as follows Logic Input Behavior 1 3 User defined 1 4 e In 3 wire impulse control a Stop command e In 2 wire maintained control a user defined input that can be configured to send information to a PLC address over the network
95. and the LTM R controller The configuration software periodically updates parameter values accessed through the Monitoring and Parameters branches The refresh rates for updating Monitoring branch and Parameters branch values are separately editable Communications To monitor dynamically changing parameters a communications link must be active Link between the configuration software in your PC and the LTM R controller To find out if a link exists check the taskbar at the bottom of the configuration software If the taskbar indicates e Connected a communications link between the PC and LTM R controller exists and you can monitor dynamically changing parameter values e Disconnected select Connect in either the icon bar or the Link menu Refresh Rates Use the Monitoring page of the Preferences dialog to set the rates the LTM R controller uses to update monitored parameter values Step Action 1 In the Settings menu select Preferences The Preferences dialog opens In the Preferences dialog select the Monitoring tab 3 In the Monitoring page e Set the Readings Refresh Rate in seconds for parameter values displayed in the Monitoring branch e Set the Parameters Refresh Rate in seconds for parameter values displayed in the Parameters branch 4 Click OK to save your settings 1639501 12 2006 439 Use Monitoring Select a Monitoring sub branch to display a series of graphical gauge
96. appropriate response the fault becomes latched Once a fault becomes latched it remains latched even if the underlying fault condition is eliminated until cleared by a reset command The setting of the Fault Reset Mode parameter determines how the LTM R controller manages faults The fault reset mode selections listed below are described in the topics that follow e Manual the default setting e Automatic e Remote The fault reset mode cannot be changed while a fault remains active All faults must be reset before the fault reset mode can be changed Fault Reset A Reset command can be issued using any of the following means Methods cycling power reset button on the LTM R controller reset button on the HMI keypad reset command from the HMI engineering tool logic input 1 5 a network command automatic reset A WARNING RISK OF UNINTENDED OPERATION When the LTM R controller is operating in 2 wire control with an active Run command a Reset command will immediately restart the motor Failure to follow this instruction can result in death serious injury or equipment damage 254 1639501 12 2006 Motor Control Functions Fault Specific Reset Behaviors Fault Characteristics The LTM R controller s response to faults depends on the nature of the fault that has occurred and how the related protection function is configured For example Thermal faults can be reset after the Fault Rese
97. are as follows Designation Description Type of trunk cable Single shielded twisted pair cable and at least a 3rd conductor Maximum length of bus 1000 m 3 281 ft at 19 200 bps Maximum number of stations without repeater 32 stations i e 31 slaves Maximum length of tap offs e 20 m 66 ft for one tap off e 40 m 131 ft divided by the number of tap offs on the multiple junction box Bus polarization e A 450 to 650 Q pulldown resistor at the 5 V e A 450 to 650 Q pulldown resistor at the Common This polarization is recommended for the master There is no polarization at the RS 485 terminal on the LTM R controller Line terminator A 150 Q resistor 5 Common polarity Yes Common connected to the protective ground in at least one point on the bus 308 1639501 12 2006 Installation Connectiontothe The connection diagram for connection to the bus via a splitter box is as follows Bus via a Splitter Box RJ45 Wiring System 4 8 loli LTM R db 5 6 d ee nl
98. as follows When the control source is LCD displays the icon s local L remote network R See p 381 and p 387 for examples of the LCD displaying control source icons 1639501 12 2006 353 Use Scrolling Variable List The LCD uses the presentation mode LCD to display a scrolling list of dynamically changing parameter values when there is no active fault or warning and the LTM R controller state is Not Ready state Ready state Start state Run state For a description of LTM R controller states see p 214 The scrolling variable list can contain the following information Line Displays Values Description A Motor state OFF The motor is Off Wait The motor is Off and awaits completion of one or more of the following e Load shed e Rapid cycle lockout e Counting by another timeout e g thermal time to restart START Motor is in start cycle Run Start cycle complete Run1 Step 1 2 step operating mode Run2 Step 2 2 step operating mode Fwd Forward reverser operating mode Rev Reverse reverser operating mode STOP Stop command issued motor still running above On current level Slow Low speed 2 speed operating mode Fast High speed 2 speed operating mode WARN Warning event detected FAULT Fault event detected Parameter value Parameter Displays the values of parameters added to specific the HMI display LTM R
99. controller and the expansion module Dimensions are given in both millimeters and inches and apply to all LTM R and LTM E units LTM R Controller Dimensions Note The height of the controller may increase when using alternate wiring terminals 272 1639501 12 2006 Installation Expansion Module o 2 a f o Qa 273 1639501 12 2006 Installation Clearance Zone The maximum rated ambient temperature of the controller depends on the clearance Dimensions zone dimensions They are shown in the table below fo HMI Comm Powerlii Fallback il PLC Comm Test Reset 3334 Zi_Z2_ T1 T2 D1 D0 S V NC S ISSSIPSVGVGS E H 1 1 N LLLLLELLELLLE LLL LLL LL LLLLL ELL LLL LL LLL ELLE LLL LLL LL LLL LLL LL LL lt 9 mm 0 35 in 45 C 113 F 9 40 mm 0 35 1 57 in 45 55 C 113 131 F gt 40 mm 1 57 in 60 C 140 F g CLELEELLLELLLLLL ELL LLLLL LLL LLL LL LLL LLL LLL LL LLL LL LLL LLL LL LL LL 1 ba C DEBE boo in 136 5 35 274 1639501 12 2006 Installation Mounting the LTM R Controller and the Expansion Module Overview This section describes how to mount the LTM R controller and the
100. controller number Starters Status page 3 Motor Starter page Product ID For information on navigating the 1 to many menu structure see p 398 In the Product ID page you can read the following information about the LTM R controller and expansion module Level 4 Parameter name description Product ID Addr 1 8 LTMR Catalog Ref Controller Commercial Reference product number LTMR Firmware Controller Firmware Version LTME Catalog Ref Expansion Commercial Reference product number LTME Firmware Expansion Firmware Version 422 1639501 12 2006 Use Monitoring 1 to many Overview Use the Magelis XBTN410 HMI in a 1 to many configuration to monitor e operating status and average current for multiple LTM R controllers or e current voltage and power parameters for a selected LTM R controller Monitoring Navigate to the following pages to simultaneously monitor these dynamically Multiple LTM R changing values for all LTM R controllers pontrellers Navigate to this page To simultaneously monitor every LTM R controller s Starters currents page Average current ratio Starters status page Operating status On Off Fault For more information on both the starters currents page and the starters status page see p 407 Monitoring a Navigate to the motor starter page for a selected LTM R controller to monitor the Single
101. current function is disabled A DANGER IMPROPER FAULT DETECTION External ground current function will not protect people from harm caused by ground current Ground fault thresholds must be set to protect the motor and related equipment Ground fault settings must conform to national and local safety regulations and codes Failure to follow this instruction will result in death or serious injury The LTM R controller has 2 terminals Z1 and Z2 that can be connected to an external ground current transformer The external ground current function measures ground current delivered by the secondary of the external current transformer and signals e a warning when the delivered current exceeds a set threshold e a fault when the delivered current continuously exceeds a separately set threshold for a set period of time The external ground current function has a single fault time delay The external ground current function can be enabled when the motor is in ready state start state or run state When the LTM R controller is operating in custom mode this function can be configured so that it is disabled only during start state and enabled during ready state and run state Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled The function applies to both single phase and 3 phase motors 1639501 12 2006 163 Motor Protection Functions Functional Characteristics e Ground Current e 2 thresholds
102. e J Heel aaia F Ei el a ot i 299999 J922 9929S 9 JOC COOH T AZAS 1639501 12 2006 291 Installation Internal CT Wiring Using Multiple Passes The controller will physically support up to a maximum of 5 passes of 2 5 mm 14 AWG wire through the CT windows There are three looping windows located under the CT windows that physically support up to a maximum of 4 wire loops You can set the parameter Load CT Multiple Passes to account for the number of times the motor wires pass through the CT window in order to display the correct current readings For more information see p 325 Typical wiring using 2 passes 1 wire loop 3 A L1 L2 L3 erro COOL ECOG Multiply the current by the number of times that the motor wires pass through the CT windows to determine the amount of current passing through the internal current sensors You may add multiple passes for one of the following reasons e To increase the current sensed by the internal current sensors to a level that the controller can properly detect e To provide a more accurate reading by the internal current sensors 292 1639501 12 2006 Installation We recommend that you select a controller with an FLC value range that includes the motor FLC However if the motor FLC is less than
103. e 1000 1 e 2000 1 OtherRatio Ground CT Primary e 1 65535 1 Ground CT Secondary e 1 65535 1 External Ground The external ground current value depends on the parameter settings Current Formula Calculated measurement Formula External ground current Ground CT Secondary x Ground CT Primary Ground CT Secondary 1639501 12 2006 71 Metering and Monitoring Functions Ground Current Characteristics The ground current function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Internal ground current I0 gt External ground current I0 Unit A A Accuracy LTM R 08xxx Igr gt 0 3A 5 the greater of 5 or 0 01A 0 2A lt lIgr lt 0 3A 10 0 1A lt lIgr lt 0 2A 15 Igr lt 0 1A N A LTM R 27xxx Igr gt 0 5A 5 0 3A lt lIgr lt 0 5A 10 0 2A lt lIgr lt 0 3A 15 Igr lt 0 2A N A LTM R 100xxx Igr gt 1 0A 5 0 5A lt lIgr lt 1 0A 10 0 3A lt lIgr lt 0 5A 15 Igr lt 0 3A N A Resolution 0 01A 0 01A Refresh interval 100 ms 100 ms 1 For currents of this magitude or lower the internal ground current function should not be used Instead use external ground current transformers Ground Current Ratio Ground Current Ratio Formulas The Ground Current Ratio parameter provides the ground current value as a percentage of FLCmin The ground current value is compared to FLCmi
104. example of the timing sequence for the Run Check Back and Stop Check Back Start Command i Run Check sa z Stop Command 1 Stop Check Back t PNN on Main Circuit Current GH 4 ai Normal operation Fault or warning condition After the motor enters the run state the LTM R controller continuously monitors the main circuit to detect current until a stop command is given or the function is disabled The LTM R controller continuously monitors the main circuit to detect no current until a Start command is given or the function is disabled The LTM R controller reports a Run Check Back fault and or warning if the current is not detected for longer than 0 5 seconds without a Stop command The LTM R controller reports a Stop Check Back fault or warning if the current is detected for longer than 0 5 seconds without a Start command No current flowing for less than 0 5 seconds Current flowing for less than 0 5 seconds 1639501 12 2006 101 Metering and Monitoring Functions Wiring Faults Description Enabling Fault The LTM R controller checks external wiring connections and reports a fault when it detects incorrect or conflicting external wiring The LTM R controller can detect the following 5 wiring errors CT Reversal Error Phase Configuration Error Voltage Phase Reversal Error e e e Motor Tempera
105. factory default configuration settings or e any previously saved configuration settings file Creating Files The recommended way to create a configuration file is to transfer a configuration from the LTM R controller and save it When you do this all of the descriptive information about the LTM R controller and expansion module is automatically retrieved and copied to your PC When you create a new file using the File menu s New Configuration command you must manually input this information which is internally stored by the devices but may not otherwise be readily available Note When you edit the network protocol for either a new configuration file or for a configuration file transferred from the LTM R controller the configuration software automatically changes network settings to their default values for the selected network protocol 430 1639501 12 2006 Use File Transfer Device to PC Saving Files To transfer configuration settings from the LTM R controller to the PC and save those settings in a new configuration file Step Action 1 Be sure the configuration software is communicating with the LTM R controller If the task bar indicates Disconnected select Connect in either the icon bar or in the Link menu 2 Transfer the configuration from the LTM R controller to your PC Select Device to PC in either the icon bar or the Link to File gt Transfer sub menu 3 After the confi
106. fallback state 3 wire impulse A stop command overrides the fallback condition and turns off logic outputs O 1 and O 2 The outputs remain off after the stop command is removed and do not return to their programmed fallback state For information on configuring fallback related parameters see p 107 In all operating mode types the following logic outputs behave as described below Logic Output Behavior 0 3 Activated by any enabled protection warning e Terminals NO 33 34 0 4 Activated by any enabled protection fault e Terminals NC 95 96 e Terminals NO 97 98 Note When control voltage is too low or off e NC 95 96 open e NO 97 98 close 1639501 12 2006 227 Motor Control Functions Control Wiring and Fault Management Overview When Overload predefined operating mode is selected the LTM R controller does not latch logic output commands unless directed by either a PLC master control program or the LTM R controller s custom logic program For all other predefined operating modes Independent Reverser 2 Step and 2 Speed the predefined control logic in the LTM R controller is designed to meet the the objectives of many common motor starting applications This includes managing motor behavior in response to e start and stop actions and e fault and reset actions Because the LTM R controller can be used in special applications such as fire pumps that require the motor
107. fault is reset either manually or remotely the counter is not incremented For information on fault management see p 253 90 1639501 12 2006 Metering and Monitoring Functions Protection Faults and Warnings Counters Protection Fault Each protection function has a counter that contains the total number of faults for Counts that protection function that occurred since the Clear Statistics Command last executed Protection function counters include Current Phase Imbalance Faults Count Current Phase Loss Faults Count Current Phase Reversal Faults Count Ground Current Faults Count Jam Faults Count Long Start Faults Count Motor Temp Sensor Faults Count Over Power Factor Faults Count Overcurrent Faults Count Overpower Faults Count Overvoltage Faults Count Thermal Overload Faults Count Under Power Factor Faults Count Undercurrent Faults Count Underpower Faults Count Undervoltage Faults Count Voltage Phase Imbalance Faults Count Voltage Phase Loss Faults Count Voltage Phase Reversal Faults Count When the LTM R controller increments any of the above protection function counters it also increments the Faults Count parameter Protection The Thermal Overload Warnings Count parameter contains the total number of Warning Counts warnings for the thermal overload protection function When any warning occurs including a thermal overload warning the LTM R controller increments the Warnings Count parameter
108. fault management 228 preferences dialog communication 437 preventive maintenance 502 configuration settings 502 environment 503 statistics 502 protection functions 117 communication 256 configuration 216 255 current 216 256 customized 117 diagnostic 216 255 faults 118 Internal 216 internal 255 motor temperature sensor 216 256 operating states 216 power 194 217 256 thermal and current 129 thermal overload 216 256 voltage 176 216 256 warnings 118 wiring 216 255 PTC analog 169 PTC binary 167 Q QuickWatch window 441 R rapid cycle 174 lockout 478 lockout timeout 122 174 369 383 418 483 reactive power 84 411 481 consumption 87 readings refresh rate 439 replacement expansion module 505 LTM R controller 505 Restore factory defaults 438 S scrolling parameter display 1 to 1 379 self test 444 503 start cycle 218 starts per hour lockout threshold 418 568 1639501 12 2006 Index starts count motor LO1 468 motor LO2 468 system fault 114 407 477 on 114 407 477 ready 114 477 tripped 477 warning 114 477 system and device monitoring faults 95 system and device monitoring faults characteristics 65 control command diagnostic errors 99 system operating status 113 characteristics 67 minimum wait time 114 motor state 114 system selection guide 24 system status logic inputs 478 logic outputs 479 register 1 477 registe
109. following characteristics Characteristics Value Hysteresis 95 of Fault threshold or Warning threshold Trip time accuracy 0 1 s or 5 The following diagram describes the occurrence of a jam fault Start state Run state Fault condition Is2 a gt q gt lt Jam fault timeout Is2 Jam fault threshold 1639501 12 2006 153 Motor Protection Functions Undercurrent Description Functional Characteristics Block Diagram The undercurrent function signals e a warning when the 3 phase Average Current falls below a set threshold after the motor has reached run state e a fault when the 3 phase Average Current falls and remains below a separately set threshold for a set period of time after the motor has reached run state The undercurrent function is triggered when the motor current falls below the desired level for the driven load for example if a drive belt or shaft has broken allowing the motor to run free rather than under load This function has a single fault time delay Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled The function applies to both single phase and 3 phase motors The undercurrent function includes the following features e 2 thresholds e Warning Threshold e Fault Threshold e 1 fault time delay e Fault Timeout e 2 function outputs e Undercurrent Warning e Undercurre
110. from the 3 phase current average is the same for two phases the function identifies both phases Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled The function applies only to 3 phase motors 1639501 12 2006 141 Motor Protection Functions Functional Characteristics The current phase imbalance function includes the following features e 2 thresholds e Warning Threshold e Fault Threshold 2 fault time delays e Fault Timeout Starting e Fault Timeout Running 2 function outputs e Current Phase Imbalance Warning e Current Phase Imbalance Fault 1 counting statistic e Current Phase Imbalance Faults Count 3 indicators identifying the phase or phases with the highest current imbalance e L1 Current Highest Imbalance e L2 Current Highest Imbalance e L3 Current Highest Imbalance 142 1639501 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Block Diagram Current phase imbalance warning 11 lavg x 100 lavg gt Ist 12 lavg x 100 lavg gt Ist 13 lavg x 100 lavg gt Is1 Current phase imbalance fault n 2 gt eor 71 p Current phase imbalance warning OR Lg ec p Allmax gt Ln current highest imbalance 11 lavg x 100 lavg gt Is2 12 lavg x 100 lavg gt Is2 B 4 13 lavg x 100 lavg gt Is2 e gt
111. hardware device to be added to the system 1639501 12 2006 319 Commissioning First Power up Overview First power up describes the first time power is cycled to e anew LTM R controller or e an LTM R controller that has been previously commissioned but whose parameter settings have been restored to the factory defaults either as a result of e execution of the Clear All Command or e a firmware upgrade On first power up the LTM R controller enters a locked non configured state called the initialized state and the Controller System Config Required parameter is turned On The LTM R controller exits this state only after certain parameters called required parameters have been configured Using the Magelis XBTN410 HMI configuring the SysConfig menu parameters clears the Controller System Config Required parameter and brings the LTM R controller out of initialization Using PowerSuite software all parameters both required and optional are configured offline then downloaded to the LTM R controller in a configuration file A successful download clears the Controller System Config Required parameter and brings the LTM R controller out of initialization In either case the LTM R controller is no longer locked and is ready for operations For information on operating states see p 214 In a 1 to 1 configuration the Magelis XBTN410 HMI displays the SysConfig menu the very first time the LTM R
112. indicated LTM R controller 1639501 12 2006 397 Use Navigating the Menu Structure 1 to many Overview Use the HMI keypad D Y and s9 buttons to scroll within a page link to a page in the next lower level in the menu structure return to a page in the next higher level in the menu structure jump to the Home page 398 1639501 12 2006 Example The following navigation example begins and ends at the Home page TeSys T T Starters currents gt Starters status gt TeSys T ize Starters currents Starters status Scroll within page Navigate between pages 9 STARTERS STATUS ZJ 1 0N 5 ON SN 42 0FF 6 0FF 43 OFF 7 OFF Motor Starter 5 Avg Current 90 FLC L1 Current 85 FLC Statistics gt Self Test gt Product ID p gt Home 1639501 12 2006 399 Use Editing Values 1 to many Overview Boolean settings Use the HMI keypad and lt buttons to edit setting values There are three kinds of editable settings e Boolean e numeric e value list Only settings that are displayed in the LCD can be edited To display a setting navigate to the page that contains the setting With the correct page opened you may need to scroll down to display the setting See p 400 for information about navigating the 1 to many menu structure A Boolea
113. is triggered The behavior of a timeout depends on its trip current characteristic profile e Trip curve characteristic TCC The LTM R controller includes a definite trip characteristic for all protection functions except the Thermal Overload Inverse Thermal protection function which has both an inverse trip and definite trip curve characteristic as described below Definite TCC The duration of the fault timeout remains a constant regardless of changes in the value of the measured quantity current as described in the following diagram At lt No operation Delayed operation 126 1639501 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Inverse TCC The duration of the time delay varies inversely with the value of the measured quantity here thermal capacity As the measured quantity increases the potential for harm also increases thereby causing the duration of the time delay to decrease as described in the following diagram At No operation Delayed operation 0s2 10 x s2 1639501 12 2006 127 Motor Protection Functions Hysteresis To improve stability motor protection functions apply a hysteresis value that is added to or subtracted from limit threshold settings before a fault or warning response is reset The hysteresis value is calculated as a percentage typically 5 of the limit threshold and is e subtracted from the threshold value for upper limit thresholds e added to the
114. of 10 70 10 Current phase loss Fault enable Enable Disable Enable Timeout 0 1 30 s in 0 1 s increments 3s Warning enable Enable Disable Enable Current phase reversal Fault enable Enable Disable Disable Phase sequence e A B C A B C e A C B 1 Thermal Overload Inverse Thermal Fault Reset Timeout is set by the Auto Reset Group 1 Timeout parameter OC1 and OC2 are set via the Motor Full Load Current and the Motor High Speed Full Load Current parameters respectively OC1 and OC2 settings can be set directly in Amperes in the Settings menu of an HMI or in the Settings branch of PowerSuite software 3 Thermal Overload Definite Time D Time is set by the Long Start Fault Timeout parameter 120 1639501 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Protection functions Parameters Setting range Factory setting Long start locked rotor at Fault enable Enable Disable Enable start Fault timeout 1 200 s in 1 s increments 10s Fault threshold 100 800 of FLC in 10 increments 100 of FLC Jam locked rotor during run Fault enable Enable Disable Enable Fault timeout 1 30 s in 1 s increments 5s Fault threshold 100 800 of FLC in 1 increments 200 of FLC Warning enable Enable Disable Disable Warning threshold 100 800 of FLC in 1 increments 200 of FLC Undercurrent Fault enable Enable Disable Disable Fault timeout 1 200 s in 1 s in
115. or group of bits represents command monitoring or configuration data Example Address 455 Word System Status Register 1 bit 0 System ready bit 1 System on bit 2 System fault bit 3 System warning bit 4 System tripped bit 5 Fault reset authorized bit 6 Not significant bit 7 Motor running bits 8 13 Motor average current ratio bit 14 Control via HMI bit 15 Motor starting in progress 456 1639501 12 2006 Use Word n Word n Data encoded on contiguous registers Examples Addresses 64 to 69 Word 6 Controller Commercial Reference see DT_CommercialReference Addresses 655 to 658 Word 4 Date and Time setting see DT_DateTime 1639501 12 2006 457 Use Data Types Overview Data types are specific variable formats which are used to complement the description of internal formats for instance in case of a structure or of an enumeration The generic format of data types is DT_xxx List of Data Here is the list of the most commonly used DT_xxx formats Types DT_xxx names DT_CommercialReference DT_DateTime DT_ExtOperatingMode DT_FaultCode DT_FirmwareVersion DT_Language5 DT_WarningCode Note The DT_xxx formats are described below 458 1639501 12 2006 Use DT_Commercial Reference DT_CommercialReference format is Word 6 and indicates a Commercial Reference
116. parameter address and click the Add Watch button The parameter is added to the list Note You can find a parameter address by selecting All Parameters in the Parameters branch then looking for the parameter name and address 3 Repeat step 2 for every parameter you wish to add to the list The QuickWatch Window parameter list is updated with the same frequency as the screens in the Parameters branch 1639501 12 2006 441 Use Fault Management Overview Fault Monitoring Use PowerSuite software to monitor the status of all enabled fault parameters In the tree control navigate to and select Monitoring gt Active Faults to display a graphical display of fault LEDs see below The LTM R controller monitors its global status and detects warnings and faults PowerSuite software displays this information using color coded LEDs Information type LED color Description Global status Solid gray Condition not detected Solid green Condition detected Warnings and Faults Solid gray No warning or fault or protection not enabled Solid yellow Warning Solid red Fault 442 1639501 12 2006 Use The fault monitoring screen in PowerSuite software looks like this PowerSuite Default File Edit Services Link Settings Tools View Help SFHaxX es SES ere ercran Active Faults Global Status Warnings and Faults Ready Under Current Thermal Overload e O
117. pick up the new values for the cleared parameters Note When you clear all parameters static characteristics are also lost Only the following parameters are not cleared after a clear all command Motor LO1 starts count Motor LO2 starts count Controller internal temperature max Thermal capacity level To clear statistics parameters set register 705 1 to 1 Statistics parameters are cleared without the system being forced into configuration mode Static characteristics are preserved The following parameters are not cleared after a clear statistics command e Motor LO1 starts count e Motor LO2 starts count e Controller internal temperature max 448 1639501 12 2006 Use Clear Thermal Capacity Level Command 705 2 Clear Controller Settings Command 705 3 Clear Network Port Settings Command 705 4 To clear thermal memory parameters set register 705 2 to 1 This action clears the following parameters e Thermal capacity level e Thermal overload fault reset timeout e Rapid cycle lockout timeout Thermal memory parameters are cleared without the system being forced into configuration mode Static characteristics are preserved Note This bit is writeable at any time even when the motor is turning For more information about the Clear Thermal capacity level command see p 132 The Clear controller settings command restores the controller protection default values
118. same sensor type as set in the The following parameter setting using Motor Temp Sensor parameter either PowerSuite software or the LCD display of the Magelis XBTN410 HMI e Motor Temp Sensor 334 1639501 12 2006 Commissioning 1 0 Wiring Verify the wiring for any I O connections by checking the following Look at Action The wiring diagram Visually confirm that the actual wiring matches the intended wiring as described in the wiring diagram The Aux1 Aux2 and Stop buttons on the Magelis XBTN410 HMI and The following parameter setting using either PowerSuite software or the LCD display of the Magelis XBTN410 HMI e Control Local Channel Setting Confirm that each command performs the intended start or stop function when control is via the local terminal strip or the local HMI port The Reset button on the Magelis XBTN410 HMI and The following parameter setting using either PowerSuite software or the LCD display of the Magelis XBTN410 HMI Thermal Overload Fault Reset Confirm that the local HMI can command a manual fault reset when control is set to manual The PLC if the LTM R controller is connected to a network and The following parameter setting using either PowerSuite software or the LCD display of the Magelis XBTN410 HMI e Thermal Overload Fault Reset Confirm that the PLC can command the intended start stop and remote reset functio
119. saved to a file and subsequently downloaded to a replacement LTM R controller Use PowerSuite software to save and download settings The Main menu s Statistics Services and Product ID sub menus are not saved and therefore cannot be downloaded to a replacement LTM R controller Main Menu 1 to 1 Overview In a 1 to 1 configuration the HMI displays a Main menu that consists of 4 second level sub menus each with up to 3 additional levels of sub menus The 4 second level sub menus are displayed below Level 1 Level 2 Contains Main Menu Settings Configurable settings for all parameters plus HMI display selections For a list of Settings sub menu parameters see the following topic Statistics A read only history of all measured statistics including motor operation faults and counters For a list of Statistics sub menu parameters see p 377 Services Executable operating commands including self test clear statistics and password For a description of the Services commands see p 382 Product ID A read only description of the LTM R controller expansion module and network module For a list of Product ID sub menu parameters see p 378 1639501 12 2006 363 Use Main Menu Settings 1 to 1 Settings menu Language and The Settings sub menu is the first selection in Level 2 of the Main menu The Settings menu contains the following Level 3 sub menus Languag
120. the FLC range of the controller multiple passes can increase the current level sensed by the internal current sensors to one that the controller can detect For example if you use a controller with an FLC range of 5 to 100 A and the motor FLC is 3 A the controller cannot properly sense the current In this case if you pass the power wiring through the internal current sensors of the controller 2 times the internal current sensors of the controller sense 6 A 2 passes x 3 A a current level that falls within the FLC range of the controller For more information about controller types see p 19 1639501 12 2006 293 Installation Internal CT Wiring using a Lug Lug kit External Load CT Wiring The controller accepts the Class 9999 Type MLPL lug lug kit Typical wiring using the lug lug kit 30 Note The lug lug kit is IPO For more information on the lug lug kit refer to instruction bulletin 30072 013 101 supplied with the kit or available from www us SquareD com under Technical Library The controller can accept 5A and 1A secondary signals from external current transformers The recommended controller model for these currents is the 0 4 8A model You can also use multiple passes through the controller CT windows if required External CTs are specified with a transformation ratio The ratio of the external CT is the ratio of the motor input current to the CT output current 29
121. the Run command using Custom Configuration Mode assignments The LTM R controller enters a fallback state when communication with the control source is lost and exits the fallback state when communication is restored The transition into and out of the fallback state is as follows Transition Control source transfer Entering the fallback state bumpless when the Control Direct Transition bit is on Exiting the fallback state determined by the settings for Bumpless Transfer Mode bump or bumpless and Control Direct Transition on or off For a information on how to configure communications fallback parameters see p 107 1639501 12 2006 213 Motor Control Functions Operating States Introduction The LTM R controller responds to the state of the motor and provides control monitoring and protection functions appropriate to each of the motor s operating states A motor can have many operating states Some operating states are persistent while others are transitional A motor s primary operating states are Operating state Description Ready e The motor is stopped and is not drawing current e The LTM R controller e detects no fault e is not performing load shedding e is not counting down the rapid cycle timer e is ready to start Not Ready e The motor is stopped and is not receiving current e The LTM R controller e detects a fault e is performing load shedd
122. the product should be communicating but the LEDs are not lit check the cables and connectors and correct any connection problems 1639501 12 2006 331 Commissioning Step 3 If the product is still not communicating check the configuration via e PowerSuite software or e the HMI The communication failure can be the result of a wrong address speed or parity an incorrect PLC configuration etc Verifying System Wiring Overview After all required and optional parameters have been configured be sure to check your system s wiring which can include e motor power wiring e LTM R controller wiring e external current transformer wiring e diagnostic wiring e O wiring Motor Power To verify the motor power wiring check the following Wiring Look at Action The motor nameplate Confirm that the motor generates current and voltage within the ranges of the LTM R controller The power wiring diagram Visually confirm that the actual power wiring matches the intended power wiring as described in the power wiring diagram The list of faults and warnings in Look for any of the following faults or warnings PowerSuite software or the LCD overpower display of the Magelis XBTN410 HMI underpower e over power factor e under power factor The list of all or read only parameters in Look for unexpected values in the following PowerSuite software or the scrolling HMI paramete
123. to run despite a known fault condition the predefined control logic is designed so that the control circuit and not the predefined control logic determines how the LTM R controller interrupts current flow to the contactor coil Control Logic Predefined control logic acts upon start and stop commands as follows Action on Starts e For all 3 wire impulse control wiring diagrams when input 4 is configured as a and Stops stop command the LTM R controller must detect input current at logic input 1 4 in order to act on a start command e f logic input 1 4 is active and a user start action initiates current at logic inputs 1 1 or 1 2 the LTM R controller detects the rising edge of the current and sets an internal firmware latch command that directs the appropriate relay output to close and remain closed until the latch command is disabled e A stop action that interrupts current at logic input 1 4 causes the LTM R controller to disable the latch command Disabling the firmware latch causes the output to open and remain open until the next valid start condition e For all 2 wire maintained control wiring diagrams the LTM R controller detects the presence of current at logic inputs 1 1 or 1 2 as start commands and the absence of current disables the start command Control Logic Predefined control logic manages faults and reset commands as follows Action on Faults e Logic output O 4 opens in response to a fault condition an
124. used in a e 1 HMI to1LTM R controller 1 to 1 physical configuration or e 1 HMI to up to 8 LTM R controllers 1 to many physical configuration In each configuration the HMI presents a unique user interface including both LCD display and keypad Each configuration requires the use of a distinct e software application file and e keypad label This section shows you how to obtain and install a software application in the Magelis XBTN410 for a 1 to 1 or 1 to many configuration Refer to the Telemecanique Magelis Instruction Sheet that ships with the Magelis XBTN410 HMI for instructions on selecting and installing the keypad label that is appropriate for your configuration What s in this This section contains the following topics Section F Topic Page Installing Magelis XBT L1000 Programming Software 344 Download 1 to 1 and 1 to many Software Application Files 346 Transferring Application Software Files to Magelis XBTN410 HMI 347 1639501 12 2006 343 Use Installing Magelis XBT L1000 Programming Software Overview The LTM R controller comes with a copy of Magelis XBT L1000 programming software You need to e install the Magelis XBT L1000 programming software on your PC and e use it to transfer either a 1 to 1 or 1 to many software application to the Magelis XBTN410 HMI Note Magelis XBT L1000 programming software is a powerful programming tool This document describes only its utility in op
125. voltage transformers and I O on the Expansion Module See Inputs Wiring below and p 38 e Wiring the communication port See p 304 The controller has 6 digital inputs available via field wiring terminals 1 1 1 6 The input voltage is the same voltage as the controller supply voltage the controller logic inputs are internally powered by the control voltage of the controller Controller inputs are isolated from the inputs of the expansion module The 3 controller terminals for common wiring are not connected to the common of the LTM R but are internally connected to the A1 control voltage terminal see p 289 VIQIVIGIO VSHPYLYVOYYYYY QLOGY Lv1 Lv2 Lv3 At A2KI1 C 12 13 C 14 15 C 169 97098 954096 LTMEV40FM LTMRO8MBD MODBUS Lj 2705334 2705334 TELE O e Power 7 1 8 1 9 1 10 Test Reset 17 C7 18 C8 19 CO 110 C10 13814 234 33034 Z1 Z2 T1 T2 D1 DO S V NC SSSSSSSYI IOGCVLVVPG INS VKVOSVVS 4144 mq ma The 4 digital inputs on the expansion module I 7 1 10 are not powered by the control voltage of the controller They are externally powered and the inputs voltage depends on the expansion module model 24 Vdc 110 Vac or 220 Vac Note Because the expansion module is powered by the controller it doesn t have a separate control voltage For more information on input characteristics see p 38 1639
126. warning and no timer This function can be enabled or disabled 104 1639501 12 2006 Metering and Monitoring Functions Controller Configuration Checksum Description To verify that the software configuration has not been accidentally modified the LTM R controller re calculates checksums for the EEROM and FLASH memories This check occurs at power up and periodically thereafter If the LTM R controller detects any variation it reports a Controller Internal Fault Communication Loss Description The LTM R controller monitors communication through the e network port e expansion module e HMI and e local terminal connection Network Port The LTM R controller monitors network communications and can report both a fault Parameter and a warning when network communications is lost Both fault and warning Settings monitoring are enabled by default The network port communications has the following configurable settings Parameter Setting Range Factory Default Network port fault enable Enable Disable Enable Network port warning enable Enable Disable Enable Network port fallback setting Hold 0 1 0 2 off e Run e 0 1 0 2 off e 0 1 0 2 on e 0 1 off e 022 off 1 The operating mode affects the configurable parameters for the network port fallback settings 1639501 12 2006 105 Metering and Monitoring Functions HMI Port Parameter Settings The LTM R control
127. 0 65535 s 1200 s Auto reset attempts group 3 setting 0 manual 1 2 3 4 5 unlimited number of reset attempts 0 Auto reset group 3 timeout 0 65535 s 60s Load Current Load current transformer configurable parameters for the LTM R controller and the Transformer expansion module include Parameter Settings Parameter Setting Range Factory Default Load CT multiple passes dx 100 1 Load CT primary 1 65535 1 Load CT secondary i 500 1 Load CT ratio None 10 1 15 1 30 1 50 1 100 1 200 1 400 1 800 1 Other Ratio No Default 1639501 12 2006 47 Introduction Ground Current Transformer Parameter Settings Ground current transformer configurable parameters for the LTM R controller and the expansion module include Parameter Setting Range Factory Default Ground current mode Internal Internal e External Ground current ratio e None No Default e 100 1 e 200 1 5 e 1000 1 e 2000 1 e Other Ratio Ground CT primary 1 65535 1 Ground CT secondary 1 65535 1 Motor Parameter Settings Motor configurable parameters for the LTM R controller and the expansion module include Parameter Setting Range Factory Default Motor operating mode Overload 2 wire Overload 3 wire Independent 2 wire Independent 3 wire Reverser 2 wire Reverser 3 wire
128. 0 two step operating mode 245 562 1639501 12 2006 Index HMI language 489 HMI language setting 46 Deutsch 489 English 489 Espa ol 489 Frangais 489 Italiano 489 HMI port address setting 50 370 485 baud rate setting 50 370 409 485 comm loss 478 endian setting 485 fallback setting 106 370 489 fault enable 50 106 370 418 fault time 50 faults count 93 372 parity setting 50 370 409 485 warning enable 50 106 370 hysteresis 128 I O status 479 internal clock 504 internal ground current 160 fault threshold 121 162 415 486 fault timeout 121 162 415 486 warning threshold 121 162 415 486 internal port faults count 93 372 introduction 15 J jam 152 fault enable 121 153 367 414 fault threshold 121 153 367 414 486 fault timeout 121 153 367 414 486 faults count 91 371 warning enable 121 153 367 414 warning threshold 121 153 367 414 486 L L1 current n 0 373 n 1 374 474 n 2 375 474 n 3 376 475 n 4 377 475 L1 current highest imbalance 142 L1 current ratio 94 411 n 0 373 420 469 n 1 374 421 470 n 2 375 471 n 3 376 472 n 4 377 473 L1 L2 highest imbalance 178 L1 L2 voltage 94 n 0 373 420 469 n 1 374 421 470 n 2 375 471 n 3 376 472 n 4 377 473 L2 current n 0 373 n 1 374 474 n 2 375 474 n 3 376 475 n 4 377 475 L2 current highest imbalance 142 L2 current ratio 94 4
129. 0 Ulnt Voltage phase imbalance n 4 1 291 Ulnt Active power n 4 1 292 Ulnt Power factor n 4 x 0 01 1 293 299 Not significant 1639501 12 2006 473 Use Last Fault n 0 The last fault main statistics are listed at addresses 150 179 Statistics Extension Register Variable type Read only variables Note p 455 300 301 UDint Average current n 0 302 303 UDint L1 current n O 304 305 UDInt L2 current n O 306 307 UDInt L3 current n O 308 309 UDint Ground current n 0 N 1 Fault The n 1 fault main statistics are listed at addresses 180 209 Statistics Extension Register Variable type Read only variables Note p 455 330 331 UDint Average current n 1 332 333 UDint L1 current n 1 334 335 UDint L2 current n 1 336 337 UDint L3 current n 1 338 339 UDint Ground current n 1 N 2 Fault The n 2 fault main statistics are listed at addresses 210 239 Statistics Extension Register Variable type Read only variables Note p 455 360 361 UDint Average current n 2 362 363 UDint L1 current n 2 364 365 UDint L2 current n 2 366 367 UDint L3 current n 2 368 369 UDint Ground current n 2 474 1639501 12 2006 Use N 3 Fault The n 3 fault main statistics are listed at addresses 240 269 Statistics Extension Register Variable ty
130. 11 n 0 373 420 469 n 1 374 421 470 n 2 375 471 n 3 376 472 n 4 377 473 L2 L3 highest imbalance 178 L2 L3 voltage 94 n 0 373 420 469 n 1 374 421 470 n 2 375 471 n 3 376 472 n 4 377 473 1639501 12 2006 563 Index L3 current n 0 373 n 1 374 474 n 2 375 474 n 3 376 475 n 4 377 475 L3 current highest imbalance 142 L3 current ratio 94 411 n 0 373 420 469 n 1 374 421 470 n 2 375 471 n 3 376 472 n 4 377 473 L3 L1 highest imbalance 178 L3 L1 voltage 94 n 0 373 420 469 n 1 374 421 470 n 2 375 471 n 3 376 472 n 4 377 473 languages 46 437 line currents 69 load CT multiple passes 47 328 486 primary 47 328 486 ratio 47 328 362 465 secondary 47 328 486 load shedding 191 478 enable 123 192 369 418 484 restart threshold 123 192 369 418 484 restart timeout 123 192 369 418 484 threshold 123 192 369 418 484 timeout 123 192 369 418 484 load sheddings count 110 372 468 logic file 252 logic input 211 logic input behavior 226 independent operating mode 235 overload operating mode 232 reverser operating mode 239 two speed operating mode 250 two step operating mode 245 logic inputs characteristics expansion module 44 LTM R controller 40 logic output behavior 227 independent operating mode 235 overload operating mode 232 reverser operating mode 239 two speed operating mode 250 two step oper
131. 14 Step 1 contactor control 0 2 23 and 24 Step 2 contactor control 0 3 33 and 34 Warning signal 0 4 95 96 97 and 98 Fault signal Two step operating mode uses the following HMI keys HMI keys 2 wire maintained assignment 3 wire impulse assignment Aux 1 Control motor Start motor Aux 2 Free Free Stop Stop motor while pressed Stop motor 1639501 12 2006 245 Motor Control Functions Timing The following diagram is an example of the timing sequence for the Two Step Sequence operating mode that shows the inputs and outputs for a 3 wire impulse configuration 1 1 Start 1 4 Stop y Current lt Motor i i Step 1 to 2 Threshold Motor Step 1 To 2 Timeout 1 0 1 Step 1 BA O 2 Step 2 1 y i Motor On bit Motor Lockout T Timeout q q 4 gt 1 Normal operation 2 Step 1 start 3 Step 2 start 4 Start command ignored Stop command active 5 Current falling below the Motor Step 1 To 2 Threshold ignored preceded by expiration of the Motor Step 1 To 2 Timeout Parameters Two step operating mode has the following parameters Parameter Setting range Factory setting Motor step 1 to 2 timeout 0 999 9 s 5s Motor transition timeout 0 999 9 s 100 ms Motor step 1 to 2 threshold 20 800 FLC in 1 increm
132. 1639501 TeSys T LTM R Modbus Motor Management Controller Users Manual 1639501 1 0 12 2006 AON POD ad anid a brand of Schneid i chneider Telemecanique AE EEE Table of Contents Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 3 1 3 2 Safety Information ssasnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 11 About the BOOK shi 30 bisa awiseew tee sti we keane as 13 Introducing the TeSys T Motor Management System 15 Presentation of the TeSys T Motor Management System 16 System Selection Guide 0 0 0 ects 24 Physical Description of the LTM R Motor Management Controller with Modbus Protocole na fit bara tarde amet cb See ee Beets 31 Physical Description of the LTM E Expansion Module 35 Technical Specifications of the LTM R Controller 0000 38 Technical Specifications of the Expansion Module 000 42 Configurable Parameters 0 0c cece cette eee eee 45 Application Example 0 0c eee eee ee eee 51 PUMDOSO 5 Ss enn aheties 3 case ideas Peale ane a eee ee haa eo eee 52 LTM R Controller Wiring 2 0 0c teens 54 Configuring Parameters 0 0 0 0 e ect eee 55 Metering and Monitoring Functions 0005 59 Summary of Characteristics 0 0 0 0 saaana 61 OVervieWs miera napa n a teh se Onis UR a Pere Pied 61 Accessing Metering Functions and Parameter Data 62 Measurem
133. 168 1639501 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Motor Temperature Sensor PTC Analog Description The PTC Analog motor temperature sensing function is enabled when the Motor Temp Sensor Type parameter is set to PTC Analog and the LTM R controller is connected to an analog PTC thermistor embedded in the motor The LTM R controller monitors the state of the temperature sensing element and signals e a motor temperature sensor warning when the measured resistance exceeds a configurable warning threshold e a motor temperature sensor fault when the measured resistance exceeds a separately set fault threshold The fault or warning condition continues until the measured resistance falls below 95 of the fault or warning threshold There is no time delay to the motor temperature sensor fault or warning Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled The function is available for all operating states It applies to both single phase and 3 phase motors Functional The PTC Analog motor temperature sensor function includes the following features Characteristics e 2 configurable thresholds e Motor Temp Sensor Warning Threshold e Motor Temp Sensor Fault Threshold e 2 function outputs e Motor Temp Sensor Warning e Motor Temp Sensor Fault e 1 counting statistic e Motor Temp Sensor Faults Count 1639501 12 2006 169 Motor Protection Functions Block Diagram Motor temperature sensor war
134. 2006 Commissioning Commissioning information Specific information or parameter Selections Fault Threshold and Warning Threshold Trip resistance Control source Control Local Channel Setting e Local terminal only e Local HMI only e Remote only e Selectable Remote HMI e Selectable Remote terminal Control transition type If Selectable Bumpless Transition Mode e Bump e Bumpless External Load CTs Used in application e No e Yes If yes Load CT Primary e 1 65535 If yes Load CT Secondary e 1 500 Load CT Multiple Passes e 1 100 Ground fault CT settings Used in application e No optional e Yes If Yes Ground CT Primary e 1 65535 If Yes Ground CT Secondary e 1 65535 Motor temperature sensor Type used in application e None e Binary e PTC analog e NTC analog If PTC analog or NTC analog Known Wiring resistance e Not known If PTC analog or NTC analog e 100 5100 Q in 0 1 Q increments Required Documents The source of much of the required information described above will be documents that describe your application These documents can include e wiring diagrams for the LTM R controller and expansion module e alist of all general parameters and protection parameters that must be configured and the setting value for each parameter e design documents for the motor application motor specifications and characteristic e specifications describing each
135. 209 Control Mod s ori riena ees aie ded e a a edt ad Aten s Ske Abou 210 Operating States cco cca ik ia ee eee ee Se ee See 214 Start Cycles ici ar edge ics oad bed ad Sete Sa a Mo eel esa beige 218 Operating Modes ss ecce orir cneia chee ba se eva eee betwee ee els 222 Control Principle Siei res eise ag Gl a atacand taa Ritter pete nee aS ane Aap ee 223 5 3 Chapter 6 6 1 6 2 Chapter 7 Predefined Operating Modes ccc cece eee eee 225 Control Wiring and Fault Management 0 00 e eee eee ee 228 Overload Operating Mode 0 cece eet 230 Independent Operating Mode 0 0 c cece eee ee 233 Reverser Operating Mode 0 c eect tees 237 Two Step Operating Mode 0 0 0 ete 241 Two Speed Operating Mode 0 0 0 cece ett eee 247 Custom Operating Mode 0 ccc eect eee 252 Fault Management 00 eee eens 253 Fault Management Introduction 0 0 0 eee eee 254 Mantal Resetic icc 2 creer elas L nah bee boa bese e bed 257 Automatic ReSetrre nr rerireni araa State etait Seles ee ead 260 Remote RSet ent pe girar on cherie tie Siew eater Ga kalte hele dake e oe 265 Fault and Warning Codes 0 0 0 0 ccc cee ee eens 267 Installation sips ad oases paaa aad key mena dav area ae ae ce ae 269 Introduction siss eee cath pe 2a lever ethan ede wt Ue yet al ahah 269 LTM R Controller and LTM E Expansion Module Installation 271
136. 237 241 247 493 self test 382 493 503 statistics 97 commissioning first power up 320 introduction 316 PowerSuite software 329 required information 318 required parameters 322 sys config menu 1 to 1 327 verify configuration 336 verify wiring 332 communications link 439 config via HMI engineering tool enable 46 50 317 370 485 HMI keypad enable 46 50 317 370 485 HMI network port enable 46 317 network port enable 49 370 485 configurable settings 126 configuration file 252 creating 430 manage 430 saving 431 transfer 431 432 configuration software configuration functions 438 installation 427 power up 430 QuickWatch window 441 connect PC to LTM R controller 439 contactor rating 45 328 486 control bumpless transfer mode 491 direct transition 48 240 247 328 365 local channel setting 46 210 365 413 491 principles 223 register 1 493 register 2 493 setting register 491 terminal strip mode 491 control circuit 2 wire 226 3 wire 226 control modes 209 210 local HMI 211 local terminal strip 211 network 211 selecting 210 control via HMI 477 control voltage characteristics LTM R controller 39 control wiring 226 controller altitude derating 41 commercial reference 378 422 465 compatibility code 465 config checksum 481 firmware version 378 465 ID code 465 internal fault 96 105 internal faults count 93 372 internal temperature 97 481 intern
137. 248 1639501 12 2006 Motor Control Functions 2 Speed The following wiring diagram represents a simplified example of the LTM R Pole Changing controller in a two speed pole changing local control 3 wire impulse application Application Diagram 30 Low High Speed _ Speed Stop E e E ETA OTO TO TOT eo oreo eTo 1 A pole changing application requires two sets of wires passing through the CT windows The LTM R controller can also be placed upstream of the contactors If this is the case all the wires downstream of the contactors must be the same size 2 The N C interlock contacts KM1 and KM2 are not mandatory because the LTM R controller firmware interlocks O 1 and O 2 For additional examples of pole changing IEC diagrams see p 529 For examples of pole changing NEMA diagrams see p 549 1639501 12 2006 249 Motor Control Functions I O Assignment Two Speed operating mode provides the following logic inputs Logic inputs 2 wire maintained assignment 3 wire impulse assignment 1 1 Low speed command Low speed start 1 2 High speed command High speed start 1 3 Free Free 1 4 Free Stop 1 5 Reset Reset 1 6 Local 0 or network 1 Local 0 or network 1 Two Speed operating mode provides the following logic outputs Logic outputs Assignment 0 1 13 and 14 Low speed control 0 2 23 and 24
138. 369 417 485 overcurrent 156 fault enable 121 157 415 fault threshold 121 157 415 483 fault timeout 121 157 415 483 faults count 91 371 warning enable 121 157 415 warning threshold 121 157 415 483 overpower 198 fault enable 124 199 369 417 fault threshold 124 199 369 417 484 fault timeout 124 199 369 484 fault timeout starting 417 faults count 91 372 warning enable 124 199 369 417 warning threshold 124 199 369 417 484 overvoltage 188 fault enable 123 189 368 416 419 fault threshold 123 189 368 416 419 484 fault timeout 123 189 368 416 419 484 faults count 91 372 warning enable 123 189 368 416 419 warning threshold 123 189 368 416 419 484 parameters configurable 45 parameters refresh rate 439 password 438 password HMI keypad 382 phase imbalances register 482 1639501 12 2006 567 Index physical description expansion module 35 LTM R controller 31 power consumption active 468 reactive 468 power factor 83 84 85 94 411 481 n 0 373 420 469 n 1 374 421 470 n 2 375 471 n 3 376 472 n 4 377 473 power motor protection functions parameter setting ranges 124 PowerSuite software configuring parameters 436 control commands 444 fault management 442 fault monitoring 442 metering and monitoring 439 navigation 434 user interface 428 predefined operating modes control wiring and
139. 4 1639501 12 2006 Installation Set the parameters Load CT Primary the first number of the CT ratio Load CT Secondary the second number of the CT ratio and Load CT Multiple Passes the number of times the CT output wires pass through the controller s internal CT windows to enable the controller to adjust the FLC range and display the actual line current For more information see p 325 Typical wiring using external CTs 34 a me er L3 4 it H H J SICC ICI CICC ICI CISC lOVeO Bl o E 29992 f 12 CECE eC SSO Note The controller measures current at 47 63 Hz fundamental frequency Therefore if the controller is used with a variable speed drive the controller must be installed between the drive and the line The CTs cannot be used between the drive outputs and the motor since the drive can output fundamental frequencies outside the 47 63 Hz range For a description of external CT characteristics see p 21 1639501 12 2006 295 Installation Wiring Ground Fault Current Transformers Ground Fault Current Transformer Wiring The LTM R controller has 2 terminals that can be connected to an external ground fault current transformer GFCT Z1 and Z2 The following diagram shows typical wiring using a GFCT 34 A A D L1 L2 L3
140. 45 connectors 1m 3 2 ft VW3 A8 306 R10 3 m 9 8 ft VW3 A8 306 R30 310 1639501 12 2006 Installation List of Modbus connection accessories for RJ45 wiring system Type of master Interface with the master Description Reference Twido PLC Mini DIN RS 485 adapter or interface module 3 m 9 8 ft cable equipped with a mini DIN connector and an RJ45 connector TWD XCA RJ030 Screw terminal RS 485 adaptor or interface module 3 m 9 8 ft cable equipped with an RJ45 connector and stripped at the other end VW3 A8 306 D30 TSX Micro PLC Mini DIN RS 485 3 m 9 8 ft cable equipped TWD XCA RJ030 terminal port with a mini DIN connector and an RJ45 connector PCMCIA card Stripped cable TSX SCP CX4030 TSX SCP114 TSX Premium PLC TSX SCY 11601 Cable equipped with a 25 pin TSX SCY CM6030 or TSX SCY SUB D connector and 21601 module stripped at the other end for 25 pin SUB D connection to the screw port terminals on the LU9GC3 splitter box PCMCIA card Stripped cable TSX SCP CX4030 TSX SCP114 Serial port PC PC with 9 pin RS 232 RS 485 converter TSX SCA 72 male SUB D RS 232 serial port 3 m 9 8 ft cable equipped with an RJ45 connector and stripped at the other end for connection to the screw terminals on the LU9GC3 splitter box VW3 A8 306 D30 1639501 12 2006 311 Installation Connection to T
141. 5 LO4 495 memory space 495 memory used 495 network control 495 non volatile space 495 phase reverse 495 reset 495 run 495 status register 495 stop 495 stop LED 495 temporary space 495 transition 495 version 495 custom operating mode 252 D date and time 94 n 0 373 420 469 n 1 374 421 470 n 2 375 471 n 3 376 472 n 4 377 473 setting 45 328 364 491 diagnostic fault 92 fault enable 46 99 369 faults count 92 372 warning enable 46 99 369 1639501 12 2006 559 Index diagnostic faults communication loss 105 controller configuration checksum 105 wiring faults 102 E expansion commercial reference 378 422 465 compatibility code 465 firmware version 378 465 ID code 465 serial number 465 expansion module physical description 35 technical specifications 42 external ground current 163 fault threshold 121 164 367 415 484 fault timeout 121 164 367 415 484 warning threshold 121 164 367 415 484 F fallback control transition 213 fault controller internal 476 current phase imbalance 476 current phase loss 477 current phase reversal 477 diagnostic 477 ground current 476 HMI port 476 internal port 476 jam 476 long start 476 motor temperature sensor 477 network port 476 network port config 476 network port internal 476 over power factor 477 overcurrent 477 overpower 477 overvoltage 477 register 1 476 register 2
142. 501 12 2006 287 Installation Terminal Wiring Both the Controller and Expansion Module terminals have the same characteristics Characteristics Terminals have an insulation rating of 250 Vac The table below describes the characteristics of cables that may be used to wire the terminals Cable Type No of Conductors Conductor section mm2 AWG Flexible stranded cable Single conductor 0 2 2 5 24 14 Two conductors 0 2 1 5 24 16 Solid cable Single conductor 0 2 2 5 24 14 Two conductors 0 2 1 0 24 18 Flexible stranded cable with Single conductor 0 25 2 5 24 14 insulated cable ends Two conductors 0 5 1 5 20 16 Flexible stranded cable with Single conductor 0 25 2 5 24 14 non insulated cable ends Two conductors 0 2 1 0 24 18 The following table describes connector details Connectors 3 and 6 pins Pitch 5 08 mm 0 2 in Tightening torque 0 5 to 0 6 Nem 5 Ib in Flat screwdriver 3mm 0 10 in 288 1639501 12 2006 Installation Wiring Diagram The following diagram shows the connections between the power supply and the Example I Os in the terminal block when the controller is in 3 wire impulse independent mode 3a 1639501 12 2006 289 Installation The following diagram shows connections when the controller is in single phase independe
143. 6 Motor Control Functions At a Glance Overview Your selection of motor operating mode serves as the primary control function for the LTM R controller Select the combination of operating mode and control wiring option required to start stop or monitor the state of the motor that the LTM R controller protects The topics in this chapter describe the LTM R controllers operating states listed below which determine the objectives of the motor control function energized or de energized configured or not configured ready to start a motor starting a motor running or not running a motor warning response fault response operating modes select from 1 of 10 predefined control programs the selected control program monitors inputs executes commands and directs outputs to transition between states according to the specific needs of common motor starter applications and control sources control mode selection which directs the LTM R controller to respond to commands that originate from local terminal strip inputs via hard wired input devices local HMI commands via the HMI port remote commands from the network via the network port This chapter also introduces custom operating mode which you can use to either tailor a predefined control program or create a new program to meet the needs of your specific application 1639501 12 2006 207 Motor Control Functions What s in this Chapter e fault
144. 7 long start 371 467 motor temperature sensor 371 468 network port 372 467 network port config 372 467 network port internal 372 467 over power factor 372 468 overcurrent 371 468 overpower 372 468 overvoltage 372 468 thermal overload 371 467 under power factor 372 468 undercurrent 371 467 underpower 372 468 undervoltage 372 468 voltage phase imbalance 371 468 voltage phase loss 372 468 wiring 468 file transfer device to PC 431 PC to device 432 first power up 320 FLC 218 247 FLC1 247 FLC2 247 frequency 79 94 481 n 0 373 420 469 n 1 374 421 470 n 2 375 471 n 3 376 472 n 4 377 473 full load current max 94 465 n 0 469 n 1 470 n 2 471 n 3 472 n 4 473 1639501 12 2006 561 Index G general configuration register 1 485 register 2 485 general purpose registers for logic functions 495 ground CT primary 48 71 163 328 484 secondary 48 71 163 328 484 ground current 71 159 fault after starting 367 fault configuration 483 fault enable 121 159 367 415 faults count 91 371 mode 48 71 121 159 160 163 328 367 415 483 n 0 373 n 1 374 474 n 2 375 474 n 3 376 475 n 4 377 475 ratio 48 71 411 warning after starting 367 warning enable 121 159 367 415 ground current ratio 94 n 0 373 420 469 n 1 374 421 470 n 2 375 471 n 3 376 472 n 4 377 473 H hardware configurat
145. 8 416 419 voltage phase reversal 184 fault 102 fault enable 102 122 184 368 416 419 faults count 91 148 184 570 1639501 12 2006 Index W warning controller internal temperature 480 current phase imbalance 480 current phase loss 480 current phase reversal 480 diagnostic 480 ground current 480 HMI port 480 internal port 480 jam 480 motor temperature sensor 480 network port 480 over power factor 480 overcurrent 480 overpower 480 overvoltage 480 register 1 480 register 2 480 thermal overload 480 under power factor 480 undercurrent 480 underpower 480 undervoltage 480 voltage phase imbalance 480 voltage phase loss 480 voltage phase reversal 480 warning code 479 warning counters protection 91 warning enable controller internal temperature 487 current phase balance 487 current phase loss 488 diagnostic 488 ground current 487 HMI port 487 jam 487 motor temperature sensor 488 network port 487 over power factor 488 overcurrent 488 overpower 488 overvoltage 488 register 1 487 register 2 488 thermal overload 487 under power factor 488 undercurrent 487 underpower 488 undervoltage 488 voltage phase imbalance 488 voltage phase loss 488 warnings count 90 91 371 468 thermal overload 371 467 wiring fault 102 fault enable 46 102 369 faults count 372 wiring faults count 92 1639501 12 2006 571 You can down
146. 9501 12 2006 381 Use Main Menu Services 1 to 1 Services menu Menu Structure The Services sub menu is the third selection in Level 2 of the Main menu The Services menu contains the following service commands e Self Test Go to Sys Config e e Clear e HMI Password The Maintenance Clear and HMI Password sub menus contain the following editable parameters and executable commands Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Parameter name reference Maintenance Self Test Self Test Command Go to SysCfg Controller System Config Required Clear All Confirm Clear All Command CntlSettings Confirm Clear Controller Settings Command NtwkSettings Confirm Clear Network Port Settings Command Statistics Confirm Clear Statistics Command Th Cap Level Confirm Clear Thermal Capacity Level Command HMI Password Password Confirm HMI Keypad Password Self Test Use the self test command to perform in sequence a watchdog check and a RAM check For more information on the self test function see p 503 Executing a self test sets the value of the Self Test Command parameter to 1 After the self test finishes the value of this parameter returns to 0 382 1639501 12 2006 Use Go to Sys Config Clear Use the Go to Sys Config sub menu command to e set the Controller System Configuration Required parameter and e re open the Sys Config menu for editing No
147. 9501 12 2006 527 IEC Format Wiring Diagrams Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Local Control Application Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Local Control with Network Control Selectable Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Local Control with Network Control Selectable The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained local control wiring diagram LS Low Speed O Off HS High Speed The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse local control with network control selectable wiring diagram L Local control O Off N Network control LS Low Speed HS High Speed The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained local control with network control selectable wiring diagram L Local control O Off N Network control LS Low Speed HS High Speed 528 1639501 12 2006 IEC Format Wiring Diagrams Two Speed Pole Changing Mode Wiring Diagrams Application The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse local control wiring Diagram with diagram 3 Wire Impulse Local Control ey KM2 Jan Low High Speed Speed Stop EA e 1 A pole changing application requires two sets of wires passing through the CT windows The controller can also be placed upstream of the con
148. Application The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse local control wiring Diagram with diagram 3 Wire Impulse Local Control 3a poer ok COTA e KM1 1639501 12 2006 517 IEC Format Wiring Diagrams Application The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained local control wiring Diagram with diagram 2 Wire Maintained Local Control ae A e EEEE EEEE iiO OOOO s i i Ie e f 96 Application The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse local control with Diagram with network control selectable wiring diagram 3 Wire Impulse Local Control cara with Network N Network control A Control bi op Selectable fe iOO O a asii ZS 96 Application The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained local control with Diagram with network control selectable wiring diagram 2 Wir L Local trol Maintained O oa cage Local Control N Network control with Network Control Selectable gt gth gg gg Mgnt gion a git i G 96 518 1639501 12 2006 IEC Format Wiring Diagrams Reverser Mode Wiring Diagrams Application The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse local control wiring Diagram with diagram 3 Wire Impulse Local Control 1 The N C interlock contacts K
149. Avg Current Average Current n 3 L1 Current L1 Current n 3 L2 Current L2 Current n 3 L3 Current L3 Current n 3 Gr Current Ground Current n 3 AvgCurrRatio Average Current Ratio n 3 L1CurrRatio L1 Current Ratio n 3 L2CurrRatio L2 Current Ratio n 3 L3CurrRatio L3 Current Ratio n 3 GrCurrRatio Ground Current Ratio n 3 Curr Ph Imb Current Phase Imbalance n 3 Th Capacity Thermal Capacity Level n 3 Avg Volts Average Voltage n 3 L3 L1 Volts L3 L1 Voltage n 3 L1 L2 Volts L1 L2 Voltage n 3 L2 L3 Volts L2 L3 Voltage n 3 Volt Ph Imb Voltage Phase Imbalance n 3 Frequency Frequency n 3 Active Power Active Power n 3 Power Factor Power Factor n 3 Temp Sensor Motor Temp Sensor n 3 376 1639501 12 2006 Use Fault n 4 records information in the following parameters Level 3 Level 4 Parameter name reference Fault n 4 Fault Code Fault Code n 4 Date Date And Time n 4 Time FLC Ratio Motor Full Load Current Ratio n 4 FLC Max Motor Full Load Current Max n 4 Avg Current Average Current n 4 L1 Current L1 Current n 4 L2 Current L2 Current n 4 L3 Current L3 Current n 4 Gr Current Ground Current n 4 AvgCurrRatio Average Current Ratio n 4 L1CurrRatio L1 Current Ratio n 4 L2CurrRatio L2 Current Ratio n 4 L3CurrRatio L3 Current Ratio n 4 GrCurrRatio Ground Current Ratio n 4 Curr Ph Imb Current Phase Imbalance n 4 Th Capacity Thermal Capacity Level n
150. CT Multiple Passes parameter accurately reflects the number of passes the wiring makes through the LTM R controller s embedded CT windows The following load motor parameter setting using PowerSuite software Motor Phases Visually confirm that the motor and LTM R controller are wired for the number of phases set in the Motor Phases parameter The following load motor parameter setting using either PowerSuite software or the LCD display of the Magelis XBTN410 HMI Motor Phases Sequence If the motor is a 3 phase motor visually check that the phase wiring sequence matches the Motor Phases Sequence parameter setting 1639501 12 2006 333 Commissioning Diagnostic Verify the wiring for any motor temperature sensing device or external ground current Wiring transformer if the application includes these devices by checking the following Look at Action The wiring diagram Visually confirm that the actual wiring matches the intended wiring as described in the wiring diagram The external ground CT specifications Confirm that the combination of Ground CT and Primary and Ground CT Secondary parameters The following ground CT parameter accurately reflect the intended ground CT ratio settings using PowerSuite software e Ground CT Primary e Ground CT Secondary The motor temp sensor specifications Confirm that the motor temp sensor actually and employed is the
151. Current phase me amp T1 0 imbalance fault J koee motor starting AND Current phase amp T2 o Lee imbalance fault Run state p ot motor running OR AND J L l imax Ln current highest imbalance 11 Phase 1 current I2 Phase 2 current I3 Phase 3 current Is1 Warning threshold Is2 Fault threshold Ln Line number or numbers with greatest deviation from lavg lavg 3 phase current average T1 Fault timeout starting T2 Fault timeout running 1639501 12 2006 143 Motor Protection Functions Parameter The current phase imbalance function has the following parameters Settings Parameters Setting range Factory setting Fault enable Enable Disable Enable Fault timeout starting 0 2 20 s in 0 1 s increments 0 7s Fault timeout running 0 2 20 s in 0 1 s increments 5s Fault threshold 10 70 of the calculated 10 imbalance in 1 increments Warning enable Enable Disable Disable Warning threshold 10 70 of the calculated 10 imbalance in 1 increments Function The current phase imbalance function has the following characteristics Characteristics Characteristics Value Hysteresis 95 of fault or warning threshold Trip time accuracy 0 1 s or 5 Example The following diagram describes the detection of a current phase imbalance occurring during run state Fault timeout running Fault timeout starting
152. E noted oe ener Pana ea eee 88 Introducing Fault and Warning Counters a s aasa 0 000 cece eee eee 89 All Faults Counter occ tke er ia aw de Jeane vole et cae 90 All Warnings Counter 0 0 0 cece tees 90 Auto Reset Counter 0 0 0 cece teens 90 Protection Faults and Warnings Counters 0000 eee eee eee ee 91 Control Command Errors Counter 00 0 eect ee ee 92 Wiring Faults Counter 0 0 0 cect tenets 92 Communication Loss Counters 00 cece ete eee 93 Internal Fault Counters 0 0 0c cece eee 93 Fault IStOny faucet pared Soe ae ee eds Seach Me ie AE 94 System and Device Monitoring Faults 0 0 0 0 cece eee eee 95 OVEIVIEW ein Saige ee eet dace Sane ene gO Pin a ee 95 Controller Internal Fault 0 0 000s 96 Controller Internal Temperature 2 0 0 0 c ce eee 97 Control Command Diagnostic Errors 0 00 eee 99 Wiring Fauls aioin ean ed Bee ew ee MURR Rint E 102 Controller Configuration Checksum 00 0 cece eee eee 105 Communication Loss 0 00 c tte 105 Motor HISTORY a anei ls acts blue arena A E i E Redeemed vege 108 OVEIVIOW oui sco E E PEA ey eee ae AG SE TBS wae 108 Motor Starts 2025 datwhe ads havin et eae nee E 109 Motor Starts Per Hour 1 0 eee tet e ee 109 Load Sheddings Counter 0 c eect tees 110 Last Start Max Current 0 0 0 cect tte ee 110 Last Stant Time inc Sacto oka tae Pane ee Pe ee es 110 Motor Operating Time
153. Fault Enable Diagnostic Fault Enable Warn Enable Diagnostic Warning Enable Wiring WiringFlt Fault Enable Wiring Fault Enable Lock Outs RpdCycl time Rapid Cycle Lockout Timeout 1639501 12 2006 369 Use Network Port The Network Port and HMI Port sub menus contain the following editable and HMI Port parameters Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Parameter name reference Network Port Address Network Port Address Setting Baud Rate Network Port Baud Rate Setting Parity Network Port Parity Setting Config Ctrl Config Via Network Port Enable Comm Loss Fault Network Port Fault Enable Fallback Network Port Fallback Setting Warning Network Port Warning Enable HMI Port Address HMI Port Address Setting Baud Rate HMI Port Baud Rate Setting Parity HMI Port Parity Setting Config Ctrl HMI Keypad Config Via HMI Keypad Enable HMI Eng Tool Config Via HMI Engineering Tool Enable Comm Loss Fault HMI Port Fault Enable Fault Time Network Port Comm Loss Timeout Fallback HMI Port Fallback Setting Warning HMI Port Warning Enable HMI Display Use the HMI Display sub menu to add items to the scrolling display of dynamically changing parameter values For information about using this feature see p 379 370 1639501 12 2006 Use Main Menu Statistics 1 to 1 Statistics menu The Statistics sub menu is the second selection in Level 2 of the Main men
154. Ground CT Primary Secondary Ground CT Secondary Contactor Rtg Contactor Rating Th Overload Thermal Overload Mode Network Address Network Port Address Setting End Config Controller System Config Required 328 1639501 12 2006 Commissioning Commissioning Using PowerSuite Software Introduction Power Supply and Connections A PC running PowerSuite software can commission the LTM R controller by configuring required parameters at first power up The procedure to configure parameters using PowerSuite software is the same both at first power up or at any later time In all cases use PowerSuite software to 1 configure parameters offline 2 save your settings to a configuration file 3 transfer the configuration from your PC to the LTM R controller For information about configuring parameters using PowerSuite software see p 436 For information about working with configuration files including transferring configuration settings from your PC to the LTM R controller see p 430 The PC requires its own power source and must be connected to the local HMI port with RJ45 connector on either the LTM R controller the expansion module 1639501 12 2006 329 Commissioning Modbus Communication Checking Introduction Configure the networking function last Even when the connectors are plugged in communication between the controller s and the PLC cannot start until you enter the correct
155. HJO A H Hand Local Control AT O Off rA i A Automatic Network Control a3 T M M M HOA CA wal 4AM 0 0 T O 0o22 5 oA 536 1639501 12 2006 NEMA Format Wiring Diagrams Independent Mode Wiring Diagrams Application The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse local control wiring Diagram with diagram 3 Wire Impulse Local Control 3a L1 L2 L3 1639501 12 2006 537 NEMA Format Wiring Diagrams Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Local Control Application Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Local Control with Network Control Selectable Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Local Control with Network Control Selectable The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained local control wiring diagram The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse local control with network control selectable wiring diagram H O A Stop All E gt a H Hand Local Control O Off A Automatic Network Control The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained local control with network control selectable wiring diagram H Hand Local Control H O Off Al HOA A Automatic Network Control A2 rhe Ae 0 0 A2
156. High speed control 0 3 33 and 34 Warning signal 0 4 95 96 97 and 98 Fault signal Two speed operating mode uses the following HMI keys HMI keys 2 wire maintained assignment 3 wire impulse assignment Aux 1 Low speed control Low speed start Aux 2 High speed control High speed start Stop Stop the motor Stop the motor 250 1639501 12 2006 Motor Control Functions Timing The following diagram is an example of the timing sequence for the two speed Sequence operating mode that shows the inputs and outputs for a 3 wire impulse configuration when the Control Direct Transition bit is On 1 1 Low speed start 1 2 High speed start 1 4 Stop i r i Y M Y Bs sa 4 0 1 KM1 Low speed i i y y A 0 2 KM2 amp KM high speed Lt ii l Y y t yow y Motor On bit I Y Y y i y 1 y Motor transition timeout iO Oo o o 1 Normal operation with stop command 2 Normal operation without stop command 3 Low speed start command ignored motor transition timeout active 4 Low speed start command ignored stop command active Parameters The following table lists the parameters associated with the Two Speed operating mode Parameters Setting range Factory sett
157. Installation Overview 0 0 0 ect ete eee 271 LTM R Controller and Expansion Module Dimensions 272 Mounting the LTM R Controller and the Expansion Module 275 Assembling the LTM R Controller and the Expansion Module 280 Connecting to an HMI Device 00 c cette 283 Wiring General Principles nenau aeaaaee 287 Wiring Current Transformers CTS 0 000 cece eee eee ee 291 Wiring Ground Fault Current Transformers 002 cece eee eee 296 Wiring Temperature Sensors 0 0 0 0 cette 298 Recommended Contactors 0 0 c cece tte eee 299 Wiring of the Modbus Communication Network 000e ee eee 304 Modbus Communication Network 00000 cee eee 304 Modbus Communication Port Wiring Terminal Characteristics 305 Modbus Network Connection 000 eee ete 307 COMMISSIONING 3 nsicieve as Ceewdde yee rect eGew eae 315 Introduction pisne Steed aed alee aah tate aod a a le eng Rca bard a E guna a 316 Required Information 0 2 0 0 e eee 318 First PowerUp an x tae egies ds al Ea ald Qa a a aa ea 320 Required Parameters 0 000 eee eee ees 322 Commissioning Using Magelis XBTN410 1 to 1 2008 327 Commissioning Using PowerSuite Software 000000 eee 329 Modbus Communication Checking 000 eee eee eee 330 Verifying System Wiring 0 0 0 cette eee 332
158. Is2 Fault threshold T Fault timeout The overcurrent function has the following parameters Parameters Setting range Factory setting Fault enable Enable Disable Disable Fault timeout 1 250 s in 1 s increments 10s Fault threshold 20 800 of FLC in 1 increments 80 of FLC Warning enable Enable Disable Disable Warning threshold 20 800 of FLC in 1 increments 80 of FLC The overcurrent function has the following characteristics Characteristics Value Hysteresis 95 of Fault threshold or Warning threshold Trip time accuracy 0 1 s or 5 1639501 12 2006 157 Motor Protection Functions Example The following diagram describes the occurrence of an overcurrent fault Start state Run state A aa Is2 a f Fault condition Over current fault timeout Is2 Overcurrent fault threshold 158 1639501 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Ground Current Overview Parameter Settings The LTM R controller can be configured to detect ground current e internally by summing the 3 phase current signals from the secondary of the internal current transformers e externally by measuring the current delivered by the secondary of an external ground fault current transformer Use the Ground Current Mode parameter to select either internal or external ground fault
159. LTM E expansion module on a DIN rail a solid mounting plate or a pre slotted mounting plate known as a TE plate such as a Telequick plate It also describes the accessories needed for mounting as well as how to remove each component Mounting on DIN You can mount the controller and the expansion module on a 35 mm 1 38 in DIN Rails rail with a thickness of 1 35 mm 0 05 in and 0 75 mm 0 02 in When mounted the controller mounting feet may not extend beyond the controller dimensions see p 272 To mount the controller Step Action 1 On the back of the controller are two DIN rail clips Fit the top clip onto the DIN rail 2 Push the controller in toward the DIN rail until the bottom clip catches The controller clicks into place 1639501 12 2006 275 Installation Removing from To remove the controller from the DIN rail DIN Rail Step Action 1 Using a screwdriver pull down the white locking mechanism to release the controller 2 Lift the controller away from the DIN rail 276 1639501 12 2006 Installation Mounting ona You can mount the controller and the expansion module on a metal mounting plate Solid Mounting using ST2 9 steel tapping screws 4 for the controller and 2 for the expansion Plate module The thickness of the mounting plate must not exceed 7 mm 0 275 in When mounted the contro
160. LTM R controller provides the following remote reset methods Methods Protection Category Monitored fault Control mode Local terminal strip Local HMI Network Diagnostic Run Command Check RB PC 1 5 NC RB PC 1 5 NC RB PC 1 5 NC Stop Command Check RB PC 1 5 NC RB PC 1 5 NC RB PC 1 5 NC Run Check Back RB PC 1 5 NC RB PC 1 5 NC RB PC 1 5 NC Stop Check Back RB PC 1 5 NC RB PC 1 5 NC RB PC 1 5 NC Wiring configuration PTC connection RB PC 1 5 NC RB PC 1 5 NC RB PC 1 5 NC GITOrs CT Reversal RB PC 1 5 NC RB PC 1 5 NC RB PC 1 5 NC Voltage Phase Reversal RB PC 1 5 NC RB PC 1 5 NC RB PC 1 5 NC Current Phase Reversal RB PC 1 5 NC RB PC 1 5 NC RB PC 1 5 NC Voltage Phase Loss RB PC 1 5 NC RB PC 1 5 NC RB PC 1 5 NC Phase Configuration RB PC 1 5 NC RB PC 1 5 NC RB PC 1 5 NC Internal Stack Overflow PC PC PC Watchdog PC PC PC ROM Checksum PC PC PC EEROM PC PC PC CPU PC PC PC Internal Temperature PC PC PC Motor temp sensor PTC Binary RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC PTC Analog RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC NTC Analog RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB 1 5 NC RB Test Reset button on the LTM R controller front face or the local HMI PC Power cycle on the LTM R controller 1 5 Set 1 5 logic input on the LTM R controller NC Network command 1639501 12 2006 265 Motor Control
161. M R controller and LTM E expansion module I do o o o OF TLOOOOOOCOCOOOPYIOOCOF LVI Lv2 Lv3 at A2 11 C 12 13 C 14 15 lef 197 98 95 96 d no O SENE MEVo EEE LmMR00MBD MODBUS ia m1 i OOooo EREA E Ir Raa a IL HA Z 2 cm a J gist PETET EET 4 i Test 7 Reset H 17 C7 18 C8 19 C9110C10 am og ea aa ae h dzi Z2 T1 T2 D1 bo s v NCL COOCOO dO OOO OChkdOOOC IOO OOO 340 1639501 12 2006 Use LTM R Controller Use the 5 LEDs on the face of the LTM R controller to monitor its state as follows LEDs LED Color Describes Indicates HMI Comm yellow Communication activity e On communication between LTM R controller Off no communication and expansion module Power green LTM R controller power or Solid green power on no internal internal fault condition faults and motor off e Flashing green power on no internal faults and motor on e Off power off or internal faults exist Alarm red Protection fault or warning Solid red internal or protection or internal fault condition fault e Flashing red 2 x per s warning e Flashing red 5 x per s load shed or rapid cycle condition e Off no faults warnings load shed or rapid cycle when power is On Fallback red Communication connection e Solid red in fallback between LTM R controller e Off no
162. M1 and KM2 are not mandatory because the controller electronically interlocks O 1 and O 2 1639501 12 2006 519 IEC Format Wiring Diagrams Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Local Control Application Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Local Control with Network Control selectable Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Local Control with Network Control selectable The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained local control wiring diagram FW Forward O Off RV Reverse The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse local control with network control selectable wiring diagram L Local control O Off N Network control FW Forward RV Reverse The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained local control with network control selectable wiring diagram L Local control O Off N Network control FW Forward RV Reverse 520 1639501 12 2006 IEC Format Wiring Diagrams Two Step Wye Delta Mode Wiring Diagrams Application Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Local Control 1 The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse local control wiring diagram f Start Stop JKM3 KM3 KM1 KM1 KM2 KM3 The N C interlock contacts KM1 a
163. MI menu structure includes two configurable menus e Sys Config menu e Main menu Each menu consists of up to 7 levels of nested parameters When using the Magelis XBTN410 HMI to navigate to an editable setting or to a read only value you must be aware of the menu structure and the location of your destination parameter Sys Config Menu The Sys Config menu e opens on first power up of the LTM R controller e contains basic settings for operating the LTM R controller expansion module and equipment e closes after its settings are saved The Sys Config menu is configured as part of the commissioning process For information on the Sys Config menu see p 327 Main Menu The Main menu appears on power up of the LTM R controller after the Sys Config menu settings have been saved if no fault or warning is active e contains optional configuration settings for the LTM R controller expansion module and equipment e closes if no key is pressed within 10 seconds e re opens by pressing the ENTER key If the motor is running when the LCD displays the Main menu some parameters cannot be re configured and some commands cannot be executed including Load CT Ratio Motor Operating Mode Fault Reset Mode during a fault condition Clear All Command 362 1639501 12 2006 Use Saving Settings Only configurable parameter settings the Sys Config menu parameters and the Main menu s Settings sub menu parameters can be
164. Module 505 Communication Warnings and Faults 0 0 0 e cee eee eee 506 eT TT TT Lee Te T ee eee Te ee ore 509 Wiring Diagrams iee aisa ang teehee aah ol ak Ges ees Ms E la 509 IEC Format Wiring Diagrams 000ee eee eeee 511 IEC Wiring Diagrams eiee a a u riaa ea eee 511 Overload Mode Wiring Diagrams sasana 00 0 c eee eee 513 Independent Mode Wiring Diagrams aaaea 517 Reverser Mode Wiring Diagrams 0 00 eee ees 519 Two Step Wye Delta Mode Wiring Diagrams 0 00 0c eee eee 521 Two Step Primary Resistor Mode Wiring Diagrams 205 523 Two Step Autotransformer Mode Wiring Diagrams 0 005 525 Two Speed Dahlander Mode Wiring Diagrams 00 0 eee ee 527 Two Speed Pole Changing Mode Wiring Diagrams 05 529 NEMA Format Wiring Diagrams 0000eeeeee 531 NEMA Wiring Diagrams 0 0 eee 531 Glossary Index Overload Mode Wiring Diagrams 0 000 c ee eee eee 533 Independent Mode Wiring Diagrams 0 c eee eee 537 Reverser Mode Wiring Diagrams 0 0 cee eee eee 539 Two Step Wye Delta Mode Wiring Diagrams 000 ce eee 541 Two Step Primary Resistor Mode Wiring Diagrams 0 5 543 Two Step Autotransformer Mode Wiring Diagrams 0 545 Two Speed Mode Wiring Diagrams Single Winding Consequent Pole 547 T
165. Note In Overload operating mode logic input 1 4 is not used and can be user defined A Fault Reset command is recognized when this input receives the rising edge of a signal Note this input must first become inactive and then receive the rising edge of a subsequent signal for another reset to occur Local Remote control of the LTM R controller s outputs e Active Remote control by the PLC over the network e Inactive Local control through either the terminal strip or the local HMI port as determined by the Control Local Channel Setting parameter 226 1639501 12 2006 Motor Control Functions Logic Output Behavior The behavior of logic outputs O 1 and O 2 is determined by the selected operating mode See the topics that follow for a description of the 5 pre defined operating mode types and the behavior of logic outputs O 1 and O 2 When the LTM R controller has lost communication with either the network or the local HMI the LTM R controller enters a fallback condition When it receives a stop command in a fallback condition logic outputs O 1 and O 2 behave as follows Control Circuit Type Response of logic outputs O 1 and 0 2 to a stop command 2 wire maintained A stop command overrides the fallback condition and turns off logic outputs O 1 and O 2 while the stop command is active After the stop command is no longer active logic outputs O 1 and O 2 return to their programmed
166. Note p 455 635 6 Reserved 637 UInt Auto reset attempts group 1 setting 638 UInt Auto reset group 1 timeout 639 UInt Auto reset attempts group 2 setting 640 UInt Auto reset group 2 timeout 641 UInt Auto reset attempts group 3 setting 642 UInt Auto reset group 3 timeout 643 UInt Motor step 1 to 2 timeout 644 UInt Motor step 1 to 2 threshold 645 UInt HMI port fallback setting 646 649 Reserved 650 Word HMI language setting bitO 1 English default bit1 2 Fran ais bit2 4 Espafol bit3 8 Deutsch bit4 16 Italiano bits 5 15 Not significant 1639501 12 2006 489 Use Register Variable type Read Write variables Note p 455 651 Word HMI display items register 1 bit 0 HMI display average current enable bit 1 HMI display thermal capacity level enable bit 2 HMI display L1 current enable bit 3 HMI display L2 current enable bit 4 HMI display L3 current enable bit 5 HMI display ground current enable bit 6 HMI display last fault enable bit 7 HMI display current phase imbalance enable bit 8 Not significant bit 9 HMI display I O status enable bit 10 HMI display reactive power enable bit 11 HMI display frequency enable bit 12 HMI display starts per hour enable bit 13 HMI display definite overcurrent ratio enable bit 14 HMI display max current phase enable bit 15 HMI motor temperature sensor enable 652 Ul
167. R controller uses these parameters in protection functions to detect fault and warning conditions The LTM R controller s response to fault and warning conditions is fixed for the predefined operating modes Logic output O 4 activates on a fault and logic output O 3 activates on a warning For more information about pre defined operating modes see p 222 You can configure these motor protection functions to detect the existence of undesirable operating conditions that if not resolved can cause motor and equipment damage All motor protection functions include fault detection and most protection functions also include warning detection In addition to using the protection functions and parameters included in a pre defined operating mode you can use the Custom Logic Editor in PowerSuite software to create a new customized operating mode To create a custom operating mode select any pre defined operating mode then edit its code to meet the needs of your application Using the Custom Logic Editor you can create a customized operating mode by e modifying the LTM R controller s responses to protection faults or warnings e creating new functions based on either pre defined or newly created parameters 1639501 12 2006 117 Motor Protection Functions Faults A fault is a serious undesirable operating condition Fault related parameters can be configured for most protection functions The response of the LTM R con
168. R controller increments either of the above internal fault counters it also increments the Faults Count parameter 1639501 12 2006 93 Metering and Monitoring Functions Fault History Fault History The LTM R controller stores a history of LTM R controller data that was recorded at the time of the last five detected faults Fault n 0 contains the most recent fault record and fault n 4 contains the oldest retained fault record Each fault record includes Fault Code Date and Time Value of Settings Motor Full Load Current Ratio of FLCmax Value of Measurements Thermal Capacity Level Average Current Ratio L1 L2 L3 Current Ratio Ground Current Ratio Full Load Current Max Current Phase Imbalance Voltage Phase Imbalance Power Factor Frequency Motor Temp Sensor Average Voltage L3 L1 Voltage L1 L2 Voltage L2 L3 Voltage Active Power 94 1639501 12 2006 Metering and Monitoring Functions 3 4 System and Device Monitoring Faults Overview Introduction Access What s in this Section The LTM R controller and the expansion module detect faults which affect the LTM R controller s ability to work properly internal controller check and check of communications wiring and configuration errors The system and device monitoring fault records may be accessed via e aPC with PowerSuite software e a Magelis XBTN410 HMI e aPLC via the remote communication link T
169. Remote Reset Performs remote fault reset for a selected LTM R controller Level 2 Remote Reset page see p 408 1639501 12 2006 425 Use 8 6 Using PowerSuite Software At a Glance Summary The following topics show you how to use the LTM R controller when it is connected to a PC running PowerSuite software What s in this This section contains the following topics Section Topic Page Software Installation 427 User Interface 428 File Management 430 Navigation 434 Configuring Parameters 436 Configuration Functions Using PowerSuite 438 Metering and Monitoring 439 Fault Management 442 Control Commands 444 426 1639501 12 2006 Use Software Installation Overview Software Installation Cable Connection PowerSuite software is a Microsoft Windows based program that can be installed on any PC running the Microsoft Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows NT V4 0 or Windows XP operating system To install PowerSuite software follow the instructions that come with your version of this software Your LTM R controller ships with its own configuration software application LTM CONF The LTM CONF configuration software is the same software incorporated within PowerSuite software version 2 5 Follow these steps to install PowerSuite software on your PC Step Action 1 Place the installation disk into your PC
170. Terminal Block spaced terminal positions The markings for the terminal positions from left to right are as listed below Terminal position Signal a D1 DO Shield V OVL a AJ OJN NC Connection Modbus cables and connectors are described in Terminal Wiring Characteristics p 288 Characteristics 306 1639501 12 2006 Installation Modbus Network Connection Connection to There are several ways in which you can connect an LTM R controller to the the RS 485 Bus RS 485 bus e Connection to the bus via a splitter box RJ45 wiring system e Connection to the bus via SCA type junction boxes The RS 485 standard allows variants of some characteristics e Polarization e Line terminator e Number of slaves e Length of the bus The Modbus specification published in 2002 on the Modbus org site defines all these characteristics precisely All new Telemecanique devices conform to this specification Standard The standard diagram corresponds to the Modbus specification published in 2002 Diagram on the Modbus org site Modbus_over_serial_line_V1 pdf Nov 2002 and in particular to the 2 wire multidrop serial bus diagram The LTM R Controller conforms to this specification The simplified diagram is as follows ect a Oo b v C4 Noe 1639501 12 2006 307 Installation The characteristics for direct connection to the bus
171. Two Step 2 wire Two Step 3 wire Two Speed 2 wire Two Speed 3 wire Custom Independent 3 wire Control direct transition On Off Off Motor transition timeout 999 9 s 0 1 s Motor step 1 to 2 timeout o OCO e eee et 0 amp 8 OO 999 9 s 5s Motor step 1 to 2 threshold 20 800 FLC in 1 increments 150 Motor nominal power 0 1 999 9 kW in increments of 0 1 kW 7 5kW Motor nominal voltage 110 690 V 400 V Motor phases 3 phase motor 1 phase motor 3 phase motor 48 1639501 12 2006 Introduction Parameter Setting Range Factory Default Motor phases sequence e A B C A B C e A C B Motor auxiliary fan cooled Yes No e No Motor temp sensor type e None None e PTC Binary e PTC Analog e NTC Analog Network Port The LTM R controller uses the network port to communicate with the Modbus Parameter master network controller This port s configurable parameters include Settings Parameter Setting Range Factory Default Network port address 247 1 Network port baud rate 19200 9600 4800 1200 19200 Network port parity setting Even None Even Config via network port enable Enable Disable Enable Network port fallback setting Hold Run LO1 LO2 off LO1 LO2 on LO1 off LO2 off ee2e eee e e e ES LO1 LO2 off Network port fau
172. Wh Refresh interval 100 ms Reactive Power Consumption Description The reactive power consumption function displays the accumulated total of the reactive electrical power delivered and used or consumed by the load Characteristics The reactive power consumption function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Unit kvarh Accuracy 5 Resolution 0 1 kvarh Refresh interval 100 ms 1639501 12 2006 87 Metering and Monitoring Functions 3 3 Fault and Warning Counters Overview Introduction The LTM R controller counts and records the number of faults and warnings that occur In addition it counts the number of auto reset attempts This information can be accessed to assist with system performance and maintenance Access Data Fault and warning counters may be accessed via e aPC with PowerSuite software e the Magelis XBTN410 HMI device e aPLC via the remote communication link What s in this This section contains the following topics Section Topic Page Introducing Fault and Warning Counters 89 All Faults Counter 90 All Warnings Counter 90 Auto Reset Counter 90 Protection Faults and Warnings Counters 91 Control Command Errors Counter 92 Wiring Faults Counter 92 Communication Loss Counters 93 Internal Fault Counters 93 Fault History 94 88 1639501 12 2006 Metering and Monitoring Fun
173. X X No Time to reset X X No X the functionality is available with the units indicated the functionality is not available with the units indicated System Operating Status Characteristics The system operating status has the following characteristics System operating status LTM R LTM R controller with Value saved on controller expansion module power loss Motor Running Xx X No On X X No Ready X X No Fault X X No Warning xX X No X the functionality is available with the units indicated the functionality is not available with the units indicated 1639501 12 2006 67 Metering and Monitoring Functions 3 2 Measurements Overview Introduction Data Access What s in this Section The LTM R controller and the expansion module record real time measurements or calculated values from current voltage or temperature analog inputs The LTM R controller uses these measurements to perform protection control monitoring and logic functions Each measurement is described in detail in this section The measurements may be accessed via e aPC with PowerSuite software e the Magelis XBTN410 HMI device e aPLC via the remote communication link This section contains the following topics Topic Page Line Currents 69 Ground Current 71 Average Current 74 Current Phas
174. a 542 1639501 12 2006 NEMA Format Wiring Diagrams Two Step Primary Resistor Mode Wiring Diagrams Application The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse local control wiring Diagram with diagram 3 Wire Impulse Local Control 3a i L1 L2 L3 RES RES RES E t i Start Stop CE Oo o Q10 NEA A 1639501 12 2006 543 NEMA Format Wiring Diagrams Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Local Control Application Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Local Control with Network Control Selectable Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Local Control with Network Control Selectable The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained local control wiring diagram The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse local control with network control selectable wiring diagram H Hand Local Control O Off A Automatic Network Control The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained local control with network control selectable wiring diagram H Hand Local Control O Off A Automatic Network Control Rs Al A2 544 1639501 12 2006 NEMA Format Wiring Diagrams
175. a motor in run state A V A AOS REEE See Nera hs lo eek oe are Bn Gael Vane ees See yo ie 7 Fault timeout 1 Fault timeout AV Percentage difference between voltage in any phase and the 3 phase average voltage 1639501 12 2006 183 Motor Protection Functions Voltage Phase Reversal Description Functional Characteristics Parameter Settings Function Characteristics The voltage phase reversal function signals a fault when it detects that the voltage phases of a 3 phase motor are out of sequence usually indicating a wiring error Use the Motor Phases Sequence parameter to configure the direction ABC or ACB in which the motor will turn This function This function can be enabled or disabled is active when the LTM R controller is connected to an expansion module is available when the motor is in ready state start state and run state applies only to 3 phase motors has no warning and no timer The voltage phase reversal function adds one counting statistic Wiring Faults Count The voltage phase reversal function has the following configurable parameters Parameters Setting range Factory setting Fault enable Enable Disable Enable Motor phases sequence e A B C A B C e A C B The voltage phase reversal function has the following characteristics Characteristics Value Trip time within 0 2 s Trip time accuracy 0 1 s
176. a configurable timer which begins its count when the LTM R controller detects On Level Current defined as 10 of FLC At the same time the Rapid Cycle Lockout bit is set If the LTM R controller detects a Run command before the rapid cycle lockout has elapsed the Rapid Cycle Lockout bit remains set LTM R controller ignores the Run command HMI if attached displays WAIT LTM R controller Alarm LED flashes red 5 times per second indicating the LTM R controller has disabled motor outputs thereby preventing an undesirable condition caused by starting the motor e LTM R controller monitors the wait time if more than 1 timer is active the LTM R controller reports the minimum wait time before the longest timer elapses On power loss the LTM R controller saves the state of the lockout timer in non volatile memory When the LTM R controller next powers up the timer restarts its count and again ignores Run commands until the timer completes the timeout Setting the Rapid Cycle Lockout Timeout parameter to 0 disables this function The Rapid Cycle Lockout Timeout setting can be edited when the LTM R controller is in its normal operating state If an edit is made while the timer is counting the edit is effective when the timer finishes counting This function has no warning and no fault The rapid cycle lockout function includes the following parameters e 1 time delay e Rapid Cycle Lockout Timeout e 1 status bit e Rapid Cy
177. a from pre defined parameters e add pre defined parameters to the custom operating mode e create new calculated parameters derived from pre defined parameters e create new monitoring functions based on pre defined or calculated parameters 62 1639501 12 2006 Metering and Monitoring Functions Measurements Characteristics The measurement functions have the following characteristics consumption Measurements Accuracy LTM R LTM R controller with Value saved on controller expansion module power loss Line currents e 1 for8 Aand 27A units X X No 2 for 100 A units Ground current internal 5 15 for ground current X X No greater than e 0 1 Aon 8A units e 0 2 Aon 27 A units e 0 3 A on 100A units Ground current external greater of 5 or 0 01 A X X No Average current e 1 for8 Aand 27A units X X No 2 for 100 A units Current phase imbalance e 1 5 for 8 A and 27 A units X X No 3 for 100 A units Thermal capacity level 1 X X No Motor temperature sensor 2 X X No Frequency 2 X No Line to line voltage 1 X No Line voltage imbalance 1 5 X No Average voltage 1 S X No Active power 5 X No Reactive power 5 X No Power factor 3 for cos 0 6 X No Active power consumption 5 X Yes Reactive power 5 X Yes N A Not applicable X the functionality is available with the units indicated the functionali
178. acy 1 Resolution 1s Refresh interval 1s 110 1639501 12 2006 Metering and Monitoring Functions Motor Operating Time Description Characteristics The LTM R controller tracks motor operating time and records the value in the Operating Time parameter Use this information to help schedule motor maintenance such as lubrication inspection and replacement The motor operating time function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Unit HHHHHHH MM SS Accuracy 30 minutes over 1 year of operation Resolution 1s Refresh interval 1s Where e H Hours e M Minutes S Seconds Maximum Internal Controller Temperature Description Characteristics The Controller Internal Temperature Max parameter contains the highest internal temperature expressed in C detected by the LTM R controller s internal temperature sensor The LTM R controller updates this value whenever it detects an internal temperature greater than the current value For information about internal temperature measurement including the detection of internal temperature faults and warnings see p 97 The Controller Internal Temperature Max parameter has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Unit C Accuracy 4 C 7 2 F Resolution 1 C 1 8 F Refresh interval 100 ms 1639501 12 2006 111 Met
179. after the motor has reached run state The jam function is triggered when the motor is jammed during run state and stops or is suddenly overloaded and draws excessive current Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled The function applies to both single phase and 3 phase motors The jam function includes the following features e 2 thresholds e Warning Threshold e Fault Threshold e 1 fault time delay e Fault Timeout e 2 function outputs e Jam Warning e Jam Fault e 1 counting statistic e Jam Faults Count Jam warning and fault Run state gt amp we Jam warning c MH i Imax gt Is 12 Imax AND 13 __ Imax gt Is2 amp T 0 Jam fault Run state AND 11 Phase 1 current I2 Phase 2 current I3 Phase 3 current Is1 Warning threshold Is2 Fault threshold T Fault timeout 152 1639501 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Parameter Settings Function Characteristics Example The jam function has the following parameters Parameters Setting range Factory setting Fault enable Enable Disable Enable Fault timeout 1 30 s in 1 s increments 5s Fault threshold 100 800 of FLC in 1 increments 200 of FLC Warning enable Enable Disable Disable Warning threshold 100 800 of FLC in 1 increments 200 of FLC The jam function has the
180. age Faults Count OverVoltFIt Overvoltage Faults Count UnderPowFlit Underpower Faults Count OverPowFIt Overpower Faults Count Under PF Fit Under Power Factor Faults Count Over PF Fit Over Power Factor Faults Count Diagnostic Diag Flts Diag Faults Count Wiring WiringFlt Wiring Faults Count LoadShedding Load Sheds Load Sheddings Count Comm HMI Loss FIt HMI Port Faults Count Ntwk Int Fit Network Port Internal Faults Count NtwkCnfg Fit Network Port Config Faults Count NtwkPort FIt Network Port Faults Count Internal Cnitrir IntFit Controller Internal Faults Count InterPortFlt Internal Port Faults Count 372 1639501 12 2006 Use Fault Statistics The LTM R controller retains a statistical snapshot taken the instant each of the last 5 faults occurred The most recent fault is n 0 The oldest fault record is n 4 Fault n 0 records information in the following parameters Level 3 Level 4 Parameter name reference Fault n 0 Fault Code Fault Code n 0 Date Date And Time n 0 Time FLC Ratio Motor Full Load Current Ratio n 0 FLC Max Motor Full Load Current Max n 0 Avg Current Average Current n 0 L1 Current L1 Current n 0 L2 Current L2 Current n 0 L3 Current L3 Current n 0 Gr Current Ground Current n 0 AvgCurrRatio Average Current Ratio n 0 L1CurrRatio L1 Current Ratio n 0 L2CurrRatio L2 Current Ratio n 0 L3CurrRatio L3 Current Ratio n 0
181. age the strips away from the unit 2 Push the alternative strips into place making sure you position them correctly ag 280 1639501 12 2006 Installation Note There are two 4 pin terminal strips These strips are not interchangeable It is important therefore that you read the markings on the terminal strips and follow the diagram below when positioning them 281 1639501 12 2006 Installation Connecting the The LTM R controller connects to the expansion module using an RJ45 network LTM R Controller connection cable as shown in the diagram below and the Expansion Module 1 m max 39 37 in max gt O HE a z a S19 Su 195 Ss N COOS LV1 Lv3 A1 13 C 14 I5 C 97098 95u26 E Alarm a s iE Power HMI Comm BHHel Power 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 10 LTMRO8MBD MODBUS _ Fallback PLC Comm _ Oo Test Reset 7 C7 18 C8 19 C9 110C10 13844 234 33M4 z1 Z2 T1 T2 D1 DO S V NC VQVOVOOYVOGG JOOS SSS QVVLOCYOVVYO Three lengths of cable are available to connect the controller and the expansion module depending on their relative positions These cables which are terminated at each end with an RJ45 connector are described in the table b
182. age warning threshold 90 of Vnom Enter Parameter Use the PowerSuite software to Settings e open a configuration file with factory default settings e edit the settings of the required parameters listed above e save a copy of the completed configuration settings to a new configuration file Saving a copy of your configuration settings provides you with a record of your configuration and helps you identify your configuration settings in case you ever need to re download them to the LTM R controller To create a configuration file follow these steps Step Description 1 Start up the PowerSuite software 2 In the Load Configuration screen select Default and click Ok This loads the default factory settings into your configuration software Open the Settings branch of the tree control In the Motor sub branch locate and set the Operating parameter settings In the Current sub branch locate and set the Protection parameter settings In the File menu select Save as The Save As window opens N QO oO BR o In the Save As window e type in a new file name e accept the default file location Configurations or navigate to a new location e click Save Your configuration settings have been made and saved with a new filename on your PC Next you must transfer this configuration file to the LTM R controller 56 1639501 12 2006 Application Example
183. ains the following topics Topic Page Motor State 114 Minimum Wait Time 114 1639501 12 2006 113 Metering and Monitoring Functions Motor State Description The LTM R controller tracks the motor state and reports the following states by setting the corresponding Boolean parameters State Parameter Motor running Motor Running On System On Ready System Ready Fault System Fault Warning System Warning Minimum Wait Time Description Characteristics The LTM R controller tracks the time remaining to restart the motor according to one of the following events e auto reset e thermal overload e rapid cycle e load shedding Faults can be assigned to auto reset groups which have characteristics that control the time to reset the motor For more details on the automatic fault reset mode see p 260 Faults associated with thermal capacity are controlled by the motor characteristics that affect the time to reset the motor For more details see p 77 Rapid cycle protects against harm caused by repetitive successive inrush currents resulting from too little time between starts See p 174 for more details Voltage load shedding controls the time to restart the motor following return of voltage after a load shed event For more details see p 191 The Minimum Wait Time function has the following characteristics Characteristic V
184. ait 30 s A D out of range error 2 If the fault persists replace the LTM R controller 1639501 12 2006 499 Maintenance Type Error Action Diagnostic Start command check Check the following errors Stop command check e relay outputs e all wiring including e control wiring circuit including all electromechanical devices Run check back e power wiring circuit including all components e load CT wiring Stop check back After all checks are complete 1 Reset the fault 2 If the fault persists cycle power and wait 30 s 3 If the fault persists replace the LTM R controller 500 1639501 12 2006 Maintenance Type Error Action Wiring CT reversal error Correct the polarity of the CTs Be sure that config all external CTs face the same direction errors e all load CT wiring passes through windows in the same direction After the check is complete 1 Perform a fault reset 2 If the fault persists cycle power and wait 30 s 3 If the fault still persists replace the LTM R controller Current Voltage phase reversal error Phase configuration error Check e L1 L2 and L3 wiring connection to be sure wires are not crossed e Motor Phases Sequence parameter setting ABC versus ACB After all checks are complete 1 Perform a fault reset 2 If the fault persists cycle power and wait 30 s 3 If the fault persists replace the LTM R controller
185. al temperature max 111 371 467 internal temperature warning enable 97 port ID 481 power 477 serial number 465 system config required 320 328 351 382 485 counters communication loss 93 internal faults 93 introduction 89 558 1639501 12 2006 Index current average 74 481 ground 481 L1 481 L2 481 L3 481 phase imbalance 411 range max 465 scale ratio 465 sensor max 465 current highest imbalance L1 482 L2 482 L3 482 current motor protection functions parameter setting ranges 119 current phase imbalance 76 94 141 481 fault enable 120 144 366 414 fault threshold 120 144 366 414 486 fault timeout running 120 144 366 414 486 fault timeout starting 120 144 366 414 486 faults count 91 371 n 0 373 420 469 n 1 374 421 470 n 2 375 471 n 3 376 472 n 4 377 473 warning enable 120 144 366 414 warning threshold 120 144 366 414 486 current phase loss 145 fault enable 120 146 367 414 fault timeout 367 faults count 91 371 timeout 120 146 414 483 warning enable 120 146 367 414 current phase reversal 148 fault 102 fault enable 102 120 148 367 414 faults count 91 phase sequence 120 148 current ratio average 74 480 ground 481 L1 69 481 L2 69 481 L3 69 481 custom logic auxiliary 1 LED 495 auxiliary 2 LED 495 external fault 495 FLC selection 495 LO1 495 LO2 495 LO3 49
186. alue Unit s Accuracy 1 Resolution 1s Refresh interval 1s 114 1639501 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions At a Glance Overview What s in this Chapter This chapter describes the motor protection functions provided by the LTM R controller This chapter contains the following sections Section Topic Page 4 1 Motor Protection Functions Introduction 116 4 2 Thermal and Current Motor Protection Functions 129 4 3 Voltage Motor Protection Functions 176 4 4 Power Motor Protection Functions 194 1639501 12 2006 115 Motor Protection Functions 4 1 Motor Protection Functions Introduction At a Glance Summary This section introduces you to the motor protection functions provided by the LTM R controller including protection parameters and characteristics What s in this This section contains the following topics Section Topic Page Motor Protection Functions 117 Setting Ranges of the Motor Protection Functions 119 Motor Protection Characteristics 125 116 1639501 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Motor Protection Functions Predefined Functions and Data Customized Functions and Data The LTM R controller monitors current ground current and motor temperature sensor parameters When the LTM R controller is connected to an expansion module the it also monitors voltage and power parameters The LTM
187. ase loss faults count 1 135 Ulnt Wiring faults count 1 136 Ulnt Undervoltage faults count 1 137 Ulnt Overvoltage faults count 1 138 Ulnt Underpower faults count 1 139 Ulnt Overpower faults count 1 140 Ulnt Under power factor faults count 1 141 Ulnt Over power factor faults count 1 142 Ulnt Load sheddings count 1 143 144 UDint Active power consumption kWh 1 145 146 UDint Reactive power consumption kVARh 1 147 149 Ulnt Not significant 468 1639501 12 2006 Use Last Fault n 0 The last fault statistics are completed by variables at addresses 300 to 319 Statistics Register Variable type Read only variables Note p 455 150 Ulnt Fault code n 0 151 Ulnt Motor full load current ratio n 0 FLC max 152 Ulnt Thermal capacity level n 0 trip level 153 Ulnt Average current ratio n 0 FLC 154 Ulnt L1 current ratio n 0 FLC 155 Ulnt L2 current ratio n 0 FLC 156 Ulnt L3 current ratio n 0 FLC 157 Ulnt Ground current ratio n 0 FLC min 158 Ulnt Full load current max n 0 x 0 1 A 159 Ulnt Current phase imbalance n 0 160 Ulnt Frequency n 0 x 0 1 Hz 161 Ulnt Motor temperature sensor n 0 162 165 Word 4 Date and time n O See DT_DateTime p 460 166 Ulnt Average voltage n 0 V 1 167 Ulnt L3 L1 voltage n 0 V 1 168 Ulnt L1 L2 voltage n 0 V 1 169 Ulnt L2 L3 voltage n 0 V 1 170 Ulnt Voltage phase imbalance n 0 1
188. ase motors Parameter The motor temperature sensor function has the following configurable parameter Settings settings which apply to the selected motor temp sensor type Parameters Setting range Factory setting Sensor type e None None e PTC Binary e PTC Analog e NTC Analog Fault enable Enable Disable Disable Warning enable Enable Disable Disable 166 1639501 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Motor Temperature Sensor PTC Binary Description The PTC Binary motor temperature sensing function is enabled when the Motor Temp Sensor Type parameter is set to PTC Binary and the LTM R controller is connected to a binary positive temperature coefficient thermistor embedded in the motor The LTM R controller monitors the state of the temperature sensing element and signals e a motor temperature sensor warning when the measured resistance exceeds a fixed threshold e amotor temperature sensor fault when the measured resistance exceeds the same fixed threshold The fault and warning conditions continue until measured resistance falls below a separate fixed motor temperature sensor re closing threshold Motor temperature sensing fault thresholds are factory pre set and are not configurable There is no fault time delay Fault monitoring can be enabled or disabled The function is available for all operating states It applies to both single phase and 3 phase motors Functional The PTC Binar
189. atae tetas Aha katie etn he oat ke bal Wadena tal ecb tee ve 152 Undercurrent osc atieccich ae ae 6 oe a ee a NOG 154 OVENCUITOM E EE tae OE 4 dol Sob oc E E E EE 156 Ground C rrenti si aee r eel aha E E EE A A a S 159 Internal Ground Current n a 00 0 eee eens 160 External Ground Current 00 000 163 Motor Temperature Sensor 1 0 0 cect eee 166 Motor Temperature Sensor PTC Binary 000 eee eee eee 167 Motor Temperature Sensor PTC Analog 00 cece eee eee 169 Motor Temperature Sensor NTC Analog 0 0c cece eee eee ee 172 Rapid Cycle Lockout 00sec eee eee teen eee 174 Voltage Motor Protection Functions 20000 ccc eee eee eee 176 Voltage Phase Imbalance nuana eee eee 177 Voltage Phase LOSS cece ttt teens 181 Voltage Phase Reversal 0 cee ete ett 184 Undervoltage ii i 8 3 tee awe iw eae pita Pha ioe feb aes 185 Overvoltage e stad i avk oie eae A DA we eed 188 Voltage Load Shedding 00 cece ects 191 Power Motor Protection Functions 0 0 0 0 eee eee eee eee 194 UNGEIDOWE erectile sca E Beate bbe baw ears ae be eek 195 OVerpOWC fis sneak waned E E EE E a bah sae hee de 198 Under Power Factor 0 0 cece eee ee eee eee ee 201 Over Power Factor anasi eraan n Meee eb is aes Sa OE oe bed 204 Motor Control Functions 0000cc eee eens 207 Control Modes and Operating States 0 0c eee eee ee
190. ater ships air e hospitals gas e cultural facilities e electricity airports e steam Industry e metal mineral and mining cement e control and monitor pump motors glass steel ore extraction e control ventilation e microelectronic e control load traction and movements petrochemical view status and communicate with machines e ethanol process and communicate the data captured e chemical pulp and paper industry e remotely manage data for one or several sites via e pharmaceutical Internet e food and beverage Energy and e water treatment and transportation e control and monitor pump motors Infrastructure e transportation infrastructure for people control ventilation and freight airports road tunnels e remotely control wind turbine subways and tramways remotely manage data for one or several sites via power generation and transport the internet TeSys T Motor The two main hardware components of the system are the LTM R controller and the Management LTM E expansion module The system can be configured and controlled using a System Magelis HMI device a PC with PowerSuite software or remotely over the network using a PLC Components such as external motor load current transformers and ground current transformers add additional range to the system 18 1639501 12 2006 Introduction LTM R Controller The range includes six LTM R controller models using Modbus communication pr
191. ating depending upon the severity and duration of the fault condition which in turn depends upon the protection function configuration You can add a cooling time delay if appropriate by setting the Auto Reset Group 2 Timeout parameter to a value greater than 0 You may also want to limit the number of reset attempts to prevent premature wear or failure of the equipment Auto reset group 2 has the following configurable parameters Parameters Setting range Factory setting Auto Reset Attempts Group 2 Setting O manual 1 2 3 4 A unlimited 0 number of reset attempts Auto Reset Group 2 Timeout 0 65535 s 1200 s Auto Reset Group 3 faults often apply to equipment monitoring and generally do not require a motor Group 3 cooling period These faults can be used to detect equipment conditions for example an undercurrent fault that detects the loss of a belt or an overpower fault that detects an increased loading condition in a mixer You may want to configure group 3 faults in a way that differs significantly from gorups 1 or 2 for example by setting the number of resets to 0 thereby requiring a manual reset after the equipment failure has been discovered and corrected Auto reset group 3 has the following configurable parameters Parameters Setting range Factory setting Auto Reset Attempts Group 3 Setting O0 manual 1 2 3 4 A unlimited 0 number of reset attempts Auto Reset Group 3 Time
192. ating mode 245 logic outputs characteristics controller 40 long start 149 fault enable 121 150 367 414 fault threshold 121 150 218 367 414 486 fault timeout 120 121 140 150 218 366 367 414 486 faults count 91 371 LTM R controller physical description 31 technical specifications 38 Magelis XBT L1000 programming software file transfer 347 software application files 346 Magelis XBTN410 programming 343 Magelis XBTN410 1 to 1 348 editing values 358 fault and warning display 356 386 HMI display 379 keypad control 389 LCD 351 main menu 363 menu structure 362 navigating the menu structure 357 physical description 349 scrolling variable list 354 services 378 382 settings 364 statistics 371 SysConfig menu 327 564 1639501 12 2006 Index Magelis XBTN410 1 to many 391 command lines 397 editing values 400 fault management 424 home page 406 keypad 394 LCD 395 menu structure level 2 407 menu structure overview 405 monitoring 423 motor starter page 410 navigating the menu structure 398 physical description 393 product ID page 422 remote reset page 408 reset to defaults page 409 service commands 425 settings page 412 starters currents page 407 starters status page 407 statistics page 419 value write command 403 XBTN reference page 409 Magelis XBT L1000 programming software install 344 maintenance 497 detecting problems 498 troubleshooti
193. ault and Warning control possibilities Signal nothing Activate a warning Activate a fault Activate a fault and warning Local RJ45 Fault and Warning control possibilities Signal nothing Activate a warning Activate a fault Activate a fault and warning Remote Fault and Warning control possibilities Signal nothing Activate a warning Activate a fault Activate a fault and warning The behavior of the LO1 and LO2 relays depends on the motor controller mode and on the fallback strategy chosen Note For information about a communication loss and the fallback strategy to follow see p 105 508 1639501 12 2006 Appendices Wiring Diagrams Overview The LTM R operating mode wiring diagrams can be drawn according to 2 standards e IEC e NEMA What s in this The appendix contains the following chapters ix Appendix Chapter Chapter Name Page A IEC Format Wiring Diagrams 511 B NEMA Format Wiring Diagrams 531 1639501 12 2006 509 Appendices 510 1639501 12 2006 IEC Format Wiring Diagrams A IEC Wiring Diagrams Overview This section contains the wiring diagrams corresponding to the 5 pre configured operating modes Overload Monitoring of the motor load where control start stop of the motor load is achieved by a mechanism other than the controller Independent Direct
194. ault reset settings Level 4 Level 5 Parameter name Settings Addr 1 8 Reset Manual Fault Reset Mode Remote Automatic AUTO GROUP 1 Number Resets Auto Reset Attempts Group 1 Setting Reset Time Auto Reset Group 1 Timeout AUTO GROUP 2 Number Resets Auto Reset Attempts Group 2 Setting Reset Time Auto Reset Group 2 Timeout AUTO GROUP 3 Number Resets Auto Reset Attempts Group 3 Setting Reset Time Auto Reset Group 3 Timeout 1639501 12 2006 413 Use Current Settings From the settings page you can navigate to and edit the following current settings Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Parameter name Settings Addr 1 8 Current Th Overload Fault Thermal Overload Fault Enable FLC1 OC1 Motor Full Load Current Ratio FLC2 OC2 Motor High Speed Full Load Current Ratio Reset Level Thermal Overload Fault Reset Threshold Warn Thermal Overload Warning Enable Warn Level Thermal Overload Warning Threshold Curr Ph Imbal Loss CURR PH IMBALANCE Fault Current Phase Imbalance Fault Enable Fault Level Current Phase Imbalance Fault Threshold FitTimeStart Current Phase Imbalance Fault Timeout Starting FitTimeRun Current Phase Imbalance Fault Timeout Running Warn Current Phase Imbalance Warning Enable Warn Level Current Phase Imbalance Warning Threshold CURR PH
195. cle Lockout In addition the Rapid Cycle Lockout function e disables motor outputs e causes the LTM R Alarm LED to flash 5 times per second 174 1639501 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Parameter Settings Function Characteristics Example The rapid cycle lockout function has the following parameters Parameters Setting range Factory setting Rapid cycle lockout timeout 0 999 9 s in increments of 0 1 s Os The rapid cycle lockout function has the following characteristics Characteristics Value Trip time accuracy 0 1 s or 5 A i Rapid cycle lockout timeout a al gt 4 gt i Run commands Run commands 1 ignored acknowledged 10 FLC i i 1639501 12 2006 175 Motor Protection Functions 4 3 Voltage Motor Protection Functions At a Glance Summary This section describes the voltage motor protection functions provided by the LTM R controller What s in this This section contains the following topics ion Section Topic Page Voltage Phase Imbalance 177 Voltage Phase Loss 181 Voltage Phase Reversal 184 Undervoltage 185 Overvoltage 188 Voltage Load Shedding 191 176 1639501 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Voltage Phase Imbalance Description The voltage phase imbalance function signals e a warning when the
196. communication parameters via PowerSuite software or the HMI To select the communication parameters see p 447 You can then check whether your system can communicate properly The Modbus communication checking sequence is Step 1 Check the communication LEDs ok on the LTM R front face Step 2 Check the cabling and correct if necessary Step 3 Check the configuration via PowerSuite or the HMI and correct if necessary 330 1639501 12 2006 Commissioning Step 1 On the LTM R front face check the following 2 LEDs 1 Fallback 2 PLC Comm The figure shows the LTM R front face with both Modbus communication LEDs VYOOCOOV OP A1 A2 11 C 12 13 C LTMRO8MBJ 2705334 W MODBUS a Test Reset NO44 23 4 33 34 Z2 T1 T2 D1 DO S V NC SSO ISSSSSSSSS The communication Fallback is indicated by a red LED 1 Power Alarm HMI Comm _ Fallback i PLC Comm _ If the red Fallback LED is Then OFF the LTM R is not in communication fallback mode ON the LTM R is in communication fallback mode The Modbus communication status marked as PLC Comm is indicated by a yellow LED 2 If the yellow PLC Comm LED is Then OFF the LTM R is not communicating Blinking the LTM R is exchanging frames receiving or sending Step 2 If
197. configured for single phase operation It has no configurable parameters 102 1639501 12 2006 Metering and Monitoring Functions Motor Temperature Sensor Error When the LTM R controller is configured for motor temperature sensor protection the LTM R controller provides short circuit and open circuit detection for the temperature sensing element The LTM R controller signals an error when e calculated resistance at the T1 and T2 terminals falls below the fixed short circuit tripping threshold or e calculated resistance at the T1 and T2 terminals exceeds the fixed open circuit tripping threshold The LTM R controller clears the fault condition when the calculated resistance either falls below open circuit fault or exceeds short circuit fault a fixed re closing threshold After the fault condition has been cleared the fault must be reset according to the configured Reset Mode manual automatic or remote Short circuit and open circuit fault thresholds are factory pre set are not configurable and have no fault time delay There are no warnings associated with the short circuit and the open circuit faults Short circuit and open circuit protection of the motor temperature sensing element is available for all operating states for both single phase and 3 phase motors This protection is enabled when a temperature sensor is employed and configured and cannot be disabled The motor temperature sensor protection fu
198. controller 3 Without modifying the state of the contacts in the least favorable direction 4 NOTICE This product has been designed for use in environment A Use of this product in environment B may cause unwanted electromagnetic disturbance which may require the implementation of adequate mitigation measures 1639501 12 2006 43 Introduction Logic Inputs Characteristics The expansion module logic inputs 7 to 1 10 are externally powered They are isolated from the LTM R controller s six inputs and are not powered by the control voltage of the LTM R controller The expansion module logic inputs have the following characteristics Control voltage 24 Vdc 115 230 Vac Nominal input values Voltage 24 Vdc 100 240 Vac Current 7 mA e 3 1 mA at 100Vac e 7 5 mA at 240 Vac Input limit values At state 1 Voltage 15 V maximum 79 V lt V lt 264 V Current 2 mA min to 15 mA max 2 mA min at 110 Vac to 3 mA min at 220 Vac At state 0 Voltage 5 V maximum OV lt V lt 40V Current 15 mA maximum 15 mA maximum Response time Change to state 1 15 ms input only 25 ms input only Change to state 0 5 ms input only 25 ms input only IEC 1131 1 conformity Type 1 Type 1 Type of Input Resistive Capacitive Altitude Derating The following table provides the deratings to apply for dielectric strengths and maximum operating temperature ac
199. controller 1 2 3 4 5 6 The number 1 6 of each active logic output outputs state or x on the LTM R controller An x indicates an inactive output LTM E inputs LTM E Indicates the inputs displayed in Line C are expansion module inputs 354 1639501 12 2006 Use Line Displays Values Description B1 Control wiring 2W 2 wire maintained configuration 3W 3 wire impulse configuration Unit of measure Parameter Displays the unit of the displayed parameter specific value in the HMI display Outputs Out LTM R controller output state is displayed in Line A B2 Motor operating IND Independent mode type REV Reverser 2ST 2 step 2SP 2 speed OVL Overload Unit of measure Parameter Further describes the unit in Line B1 for specific displayed parameter values Inputs In LTM R controller or expansion module input state is displayed in Line C left Temp sensor type NTC NTC binary PTA PTC analog PTC PTC binary C left LTM R controller Ready Non fault condition state Rdy Warning condition RunStart Start state Run Run state Wait Load shed with active Run command Run1 Step 1 2 step operating mode Run2 Step 2 2 step operating mode Fwd Forward reverser operating mode Rev Reverse reverser operating mode Stop Stop command issued motor still running above On current level Slow Low speed 2 speed operating mode Fast High speed 2 sp
200. controller powers up The SysConfig menu contains parameters that are essential to the operation of the LTM R controller and must be configured during commissioning After the SysConfig menu parameters are configured and saved the HMI closes the SysConfig menu and displays the Main menu The Main menu contains additional parameters with factory default settings that also must be configured as part of the commissioning process 320 1639501 12 2006 Commissioning First Power up in the Magelis XBTN410 First Power up in PowerSuite Software The first time the LTM R controller powers up after leaving the factory the Magelis XBTN410 LCD automatically displays the Sys Config menu Sys Config ENTER lt Press this key to enter the Sys Config menu w Sys Config line 1 Language line 2 When the settings of the Sys Config menu are saved the Sys Config menu closes and the LCD displays the Main menu Sys Config End Config ENTER No Saves configuration settings Yes ENTER lt closes the Sys Config menu and opens the Main menu Main menu Settings The Sys Config menu parameters are configured as part of the commissioning process For more information on the Sys Config menu see p 327 The first time the LTM R controller power up after leaving the factory PowerSuite software displays the following message Unco
201. cording to altitude Corrective factors for altitude 2000 m 3000 m 3500 m 4000 m 4500 m 6561 68 ft 9842 52 ft 11482 94 ft 13123 36 ft 14763 78 ft Dielectric Strength Ui 1 0 93 0 87 0 8 0 7 Max Operating Temperature 1 0 93 0 92 0 9 0 88 44 1639501 12 2006 Introduction Configurable Parameters General Parameter Settings General configurable parameters for the LTM R controller and the expansion module are described below Note The order of parameter configuration depends on the parameter configuration tool utilized For information on the sequence of parameter configuration refer to instructions on using the following parameter configuration tools a Magelis XBT HMI in a 1 to 1 configuration see p 362 a Magelis XBT HMI in a 1 to many configuration see p 397 PowerSuite software see p 436 the PLC Configuration Variables p 483 General configurable parameters for the LTM R controller and the expansion module include Parameter Setting Range Factory Default Date and time Year 2006 2006 2099 Month January January February March April May June July August September October November December Day 1 e 1 31 Hour 00 e 00 23 Minute 00 e 00 59 Second 00 e 00 59 Contactor rating 1 10000 A 810 A 1639501 12 2006 45 Introduction Parameter Sett
202. crements 10s Fault threshold 30 100 of FLC in 1 increments 50 of FLC Warning enable Enable Disable Disable Warning threshold 30 100 of FLC in 1 increments 50 of FLC Overcurrent Fault enable Enable Disable Disable Fault timeout 1 250 s in 1 s increments 10s Fault threshold 20 800 of FLC in 1 increments 80 of FLC Warning enable Enable Disable Disable Warning threshold 20 800 of FLC in 1 increments 80 of FLC Ground current Ground Current Mode e Internal Internal e External Fault enable Enable Disable Enable Warning enable Enable Disable Enable Internal ground current Fault timeout 0 5 25 s in 0 1 s increments 1s Fault threshold 20 500 of FLCmin in 1 increments 30 of FLCmin Warning threshold 20 500 of FLCmin in 1 increments 30 of FLCmin External ground current Fault timeout 0 1 25 s in 0 01 s increments 0 5s Fault threshold 0 01 20 A in 0 01 A increments 1A Warning threshold 0 01 20 A in 0 01 A increments 1A 1 Thermal Overload Inverse Thermal Fault Reset Timeout is set by the Auto Reset Group 1 Timeout parameter 2 OC1 and OC2 are set via the Motor Full Load Current and the Motor High Speed Full Load Current parameters respectively OC1 and OC2 settings can be set directly in Amperes in the Settings menu of an HMI or in the Settings branch of PowerSuite software 3 Thermal Overload Definite Time D Time is set by the Long Start Fault Timeout pa
203. ction from a PC running PowerSuite software to up to 8 controllers with or without the expansion module PC running PowerSuite software Power cable VW3 A8 106 T junction boxes VW3 A8 306 TFee Communication cable VW3 A83 06Ree line terminators VW3 A8 306 R LTM R controller Expansion module NOoohRwWD The following table lists connection accessories for the Magelis XBT and other HMI devices Designation Description Reference With 0 3 m 1 ft integrated cable VW3 A8 306 TFO3 T junction boxes With 1 m 3 2 ft integrated cable VW3 A8 306 TF10 Line terminators for R 1500 VW3 A8 306 R RJ45 connector Magelis connecting cable Length 2 5 m 8 2 ft XBTZ938 Magelis XBTN410 only 25 pts SUB D connector to connect to Magelis XBT Power cable Length 1 m 3 2 ft VW3A8106 PC only RS 232 to RS 485 converter Length 0 3 m 1 ft VW3 A8 306 R03 Communication cables Length 1 m 3 2 ft VW3 A8 306 R10 286 1639501 12 2006 Installation Wiring General Principles At a Glance Inputs Wiring There are six stages in wiring the LTM R controller Wiring the current transformers See p 291 Wiring the ground fault current transformers See p 296 Wiring the temperature sensors See p 298 Wiring the power supply and I O See Inputs Wiring below and p 38 Wiring the
204. ctions Introducing Fault and Warning Counters Overview The LTM R controller records the number of faults and warnings that it detects It also records the number of times an attempted fault auto reset was unsuccessful Detecting Faults Before the LTM R controller will detect a fault certain preconditions must exist These conditions can include e the fault detecting function must be enabled e amonitored value for example current voltage or thermal resistance must rise above or fall below a threshold setting e the monitored value must remain above or below the threshold setting for a specified time duration If all preconditions are satisfied the LTM R controller detects a fault or warning Detecting If a warning detection function is enabled the LTM R controller detects a warning Warnings immediately when the monitored value rises above or falls below a threshold setting Counters When the LTM R controller detects a fault or warning or when a fault is automatically reset the LTM R controller records that fact by incrementing one or more counters A counter contains a value from 0 to 65535 and increments by a value of 1 whena fault warning or reset event occurs A counter stops incrementing when it reaches a value of 65535 When a fault occurs the LTM R controller increments at least 2 counters e a counter for the specific fault detecting function and e a counter for all faults When a warning occurs
205. d Fault Load Shedding Enable Fault Level Load Shedding Threshold Fault Time Load Shedding Timeout RestartLv Load Shedding Restart Threshold RestartTimel Load Shedding Restart Timeout LockOuts RpdCycle Time Rapid Cycle Lockout Timeout Starts PerHr Starts Per Hour Lockout Threshold Comm Loss NET PORT COMM LOSS Fault Network Port Fault Enable Fault Time Network Port Comm Loss Timeout HMI PORT COMM LOSS Fault HMI Port Fault Enable 418 1639501 12 2006 Use Statistics 1 to many Overview The Magelis XBTN410 HMI provides read only statistics pages nested in levels 4 and 5 of the menu structure for a selected LTM R controller To navigate to the statistics page use one of the following paths Level From this page Select 1 Home page Starters currents or Starters status 2 Starters Currents page or Starters Status page LTM R controller number 3 Motor Starter page Statistics For information on navigating the 1 to many menu structure see p 398 Statistics From the settings page you can navigate to and read the following statistics Level 4 Level 5 Parameter name Statistics Addr 1 8 MaxTemp LTMR OperTime Voltage Phase Imbalance Fault Enable AllStarts Voltage Phase Imbalance Fault Threshold LastStartDur Voltage Phase Imbalance Fault Timeout Starting LastStartAmp Vol
206. d Resets e Logic output O 4 closes in response to a reset command 228 1639501 12 2006 Motor Control Functions Control Logic and Control Wiring Together Managing Faults The control circuits shown in the wiring diagrams in this chapter and in the Appendix indicate how the LTM R controller s control logic and the control circuit combine to stop a motor in response to a fault For 3 wire impulse control circuits the control strategy links the state of logic output O 4 to the state of the current at logic input 1 4 e Control logic opens logic output O 4 in response to a fault e Logic output O 4 opening interrupts current at logic input 1 4 disabling the control logic latch command on logic output O 1 e Logic output O 1 opens due to control logic described above and stops the flow of current to the contactor coil In order to restart the motor the fault must be reset and a new start command must be issued For 2 wire maintained control circuits the control strategy links the state of logic output O 4 directly with the logic inputs 1 1 or 1 2 e Control logic opens logic output O 4 in response to a fault e Logic output O 4 opening interrupts current to the logic inputs 1 1 or 1 2 e Control logic disables the start commands opening logic outputs O 1 or O 2 In order to restart the motor the fault must be reset and the state of Start Stop operators determines the state of logic inputs 1 1 or 1 2 The c
207. d ignored transition timer active Forward run command ignored stop command active Parameters Reverser operating mode has the following parameters Parameters Setting range Factory setting Motor transition timeout 0 999 9 s 0 1s Control direct transition On Off Off 240 1639501 12 2006 Motor Control Functions Two Step Operating Mode Description Use Two Step operating mode in reduced voltage starting motor applications such as e Wye Delta e Open Transition Primary Resistor e Open Transition Autotransformer Note For Wye Delta applications calculate the Motor Full Load Current setting as follows Motor Full Load Current MotorRatedCurrent 3 Functional This function includes the following features Characteristics Accessible in 3 control modes Local Terminal Strip Local HMI and Network e Two Step operation settings include e A Motor Step 1 To 2 Timeout that starts when current reaches 10 of FLC min e A Motor Step 1 To 2 Threshold setting e A Motor Transition Timeout setting that starts upon the earlier of the following events expiration of the Motor Step 1 To 2 Timeout or current falling below the Motor Step 1 To 2 Threshold e Firmware interlocking prevents simultaneous activation of O 1 step 1 and O 2 step 2 logic outputs e In local terminal strip control mode logic input I 1 controls logic outputs O 1 and O 2 e In net
208. d step pi gt Is Phen o esie E eve egal Re Ep i Start time i 10 FLC i ft Long start fault timeout i pni gt lt gt q4 gt Ready Start state i Run state state 1639501 12 2006 219 Motor Control Functions 1 Threshold Cross In this start cycle scenario the start cycle fails e Current rises above but fails to drop below the Long Start Fault Threshold e f Long Start protection is enabled the LTM R controller signals a fault when the Long Start Fault Timeout is reached e f Long Start protection is disabled the LTM R controller does not signal a fault and the run cycle begins after the Long Start Fault Timeout has expired e Other motor protection functions begin their respective duration times after the Long Start Fault Timeout e The LTM R controller reports start cycle time as 9999 indicating that current exceeded and remained above the fault threshold e The LTM R controller reports the maximum current detected during the start cycle Start cycle with 1 threshold cross 10 FLC Start time Long start fault timeout t t gt a Ready state Start state q gt Fault condition 220 1639501 12 2006 Motor Control Functions 0 Threshold Cross In this start cycle scenario the start cycle fails e Current never rises above the fault threshold e If Long Start protection is enabled the LTM R controller signals a fa
209. dbus Register Map Organization of Communication Variables Introduction Communication Variable Groups Table Structure Communication variables are listed in tables according to the group such as identifi cation statistics or monitoring to which they belong They are associated with an LTM R controller which may or may not have an LTM E Expansion Module attached Communication variables are grouped according to the following criteria Variable groups Registers Identification variables 00 to 99 Statistics variables 100 to 449 Monitoring variables 450 to 539 Configuration variables 540 to 699 Command variables 700 to 799 User Map variables 800 to 999 Custom Logic variables 1200 to 1399 Communication variables are listed in 4 column tables Column 1 Register in decimal format Column 2 Variable type see p 456 Column 3 Variable name and access via Read only or Read Write Modbus requests Column 4 Note code for additional information 454 1639501 12 2006 Use Note Unused Addresses The Note column gives a code for additional information Variables without a code are available for all hardware configurations and without functional restrictions The code can be e numerical 1 to 9 for specific hardware combinations e alphabetical A to Z for specific system behaviors If the note
210. dels use the maximum measured phase current and the Motor trip class parameter value to generate a non scaled thermal image The reported thermal capacity level is calculated by scaling the thermal image to FLC 1639501 12 2006 77 Metering and Monitoring Functions Formulas Characteristics The thermal capacity level calculated measurement is based on the following formulas Calculated measurement Model Formula Thermal capacity model copper thermal Image ecu Imax x 1 e UTC x 17 79 non scaled iron thermal Image ofe Imax x 1 e MTC x 58 71 non scaled Reported Thermal capacity level copper thermal Image scaled cu cu FLC x 1 414 iron thermal Image scaled Bfe fe FLC x 1 125 Where t Time ecu Non scaled copper thermal image Imax Maximum phase current e Euler s constant 2 71828 TC Motor trip class value 17 79 Copper trip class constant ofe Non scaled iron thermal image 58 71 Iron trip class constant cu Scaled copper thermal image FLC Full load current parameter value FLC1 or FLC2 Ofe Scaled iron thermal image The thermal capacity function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Unit Accuracy 1 Resolution 1 Refresh interval 100 ms 78 1639501 12 2006 Metering and Monitoring Functions Motor Temperature Sensor De
211. detected using e Power and Alarm LEDs on the LTM R controller e Power and Input LEDs on the expansion module e LCD Display ona Magelis XBTN410 HMI device connected to the LTM R controllers Local HMI port e PowerSuite software running on a PC connected to the LTM R controller s Local HMI port Device LEDs The LEDs on the LTM R controller and expansion module will indicate the following problems LTM R LED LTM E LED Problem Power Alarm PLC Alarm Power Off Solid red Internal fault On Solid red Protection fault On Flashing red 2x per second Protection warning On Flashing red 5x per second Load shed or rapid cycle On Solid red Internal fault HMI LCD The Magelis XBTN410 HMI automatically displays information about a fault or warning including LTM R controller self diagnostic faults and warnings when it occurs For information about the display of faults and warnings when the HMI is used in a 1 to 1 configuration see p 386 For information about the display of faults and warnings when the HMI is used in a 1 to many configuration see p 424 PowerSuite PowerSuite software displays a visual array of active faults and warnings including LTM R controller self diagnostic faults and warnings when these faults occur For information about this display of active faults and warnings see p 442 498 1639501 12 2006 Maintenance Trouble
212. device communication cable 2 5m 8 20 ft length 1639501 12 2006 23 Introduction System Selection Guide Overview This section describes the LTM R controller with and without the optional expansion module for metering and monitoring protection and control functions e Metering and Monitoring functions e measurements statistics system and device monitoring motor states e fault and warning monitoring e Protection functions e thermal motor protection e current motor protection e voltage and power motor protection e Control functions e control modes local remote control source selection e operating modes e fault management 24 1639501 12 2006 Introduction Metering The following table lists the equipment required to support the metering functions of Functions the motor management system Function LTM R controller LTM R controller with expansion module Measurement Line currents Ground current Average current Current phase imbalance Thermal capacity level Motor temperature sensor x x X KX X Xx Frequency Line to line voltage Line voltage imbalance Active power Reactive power Power factor Active power consumption Reactive power consumption XIX X X X X X X XxX X X X x Xx Statistics Protection fault counts Protection warning counts Diagnostic fault counts Motor co
213. diagnostic functions Start Command Check Run Check Back Stop Command Check Stop Check Back Parameter Settings All four diagnostic functions are enabled as a group For each function a fault and warning can be enabled The configurable parameter settings are Parameters Setting range Factory settings Diagnostic Fault Enable Yes No No Diagnostic Warning Enable Yes No No Start Command The Start Command Check begins after a Run command and causes the LTM R Check controller to monitor the main circuit to ensure that current is flowing The Start Command Check e reports a Start Command fault or warning if current is not detected after a delay of 1 second or e ends if the motor is in Run state and the LTM R controller detects current gt 10 of FLCmin Run Check Back The Run Check Back begins when the Start Command Check ends The Run Check Back causes the LTM R controller to continuously monitor the main circuit to ensure current is flowing The Run Check Back e reports a Run Check Back fault or warning if average phase current is not detected for longer than 0 5 seconds without a Stop command or e ends when a Stop command executes 1639501 12 2006 99 Metering and Monitoring Functions Stop Command Check Stop Check Back Timing Sequence The Stop Command Check begins after a Stop command and causes the LTM R controller to monitor the main circuit and ensure that no current is fl
214. display of the scrolling parameter list is suspended until e the fault or warning is resolved or e the ESC key is pressed Note At any time you can use the e ENTER key to suspend the scrolling parameter list and open the Main menu e ESC key to close the Main menu and return to the scrolling parameter list When the HMI displays a fault or warning it includes both the name and numeric code for the fault or warning For a description of fault and warning codes see p 267 386 1639501 12 2006 Use Warning Example The following is an example of the sequence of screens displayed in response to a Jam warning Step Description LCD Displays 1 LCD display is scrolling the configurable C parameter list Note that the LTM R Ohm controller is in local control mode 6230 Run Temp Sensor NTC Occurrence of a Jam warning Jam warning warning code 6 is L displayed The warning screen persists 6 until the underlying Jam condition is WARN cleared Ready Jam Rev 4 In this case the measured current value falls below the Jam Warning Threshold setting 5 The LCD display resumes scrolling the L configurable parameter list 111 Run Thermal Cap 1639501 12 2006 387 Use Fault Example The following is an example of the sequence of screens displayed in response to a
215. e Date Time Motor Local Control Transfer Mode Fault Reset Current Voltage Power Load Shed Diagnostics Lock Outs Network Port HMI Port HMI Display All of the settings sub menus are described below except for the HMI Display For information on the use and contents of the HMI Display sub menu see p 379 The Language and Date Time sub menus contain the following editable Date Time parameters Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Parameter name reference Language HMI Language Setting Date Time Year Date And Time Setting Month Day Hour Minutes Seconds 364 1639501 12 2006 Use Motor The Motor sub menu contains the following editable parameters Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Parameter name reference Motor Nom Voltage Motor Nominal Voltage Nom Power kWatts Motor Nominal Power Horsepower Phase Seq Motor Phases Sequence Dir Transit Control Direct Transition Transit Time Motor Transition Timeout 2 Step Level Motor Step 1 To 2 Threshold 2 Step Time Motor Step 1 To 2 Timeout Aux Fan Motor Aux Fan Cooled Temp Sensor Fault Enable Motor Temp Sensor Fault Enable Sensor Type Motor Temp Sensor Type Fault Level Motor Temp Sensor Fault Threshold Warn Enable Motor Temp Sensor Warning Enable Warn Level Motor Temp Sensor Warning Threshold Local Control Transfer Mode The Local Control Transfer Mode and Fault Reset sub menu
216. e Imbalance 76 Thermal Capacity Level 77 Motor Temperature Sensor 79 Frequency 79 Line to Line Voltages 80 Line Voltage Imbalance 81 Average Voltage 82 Active Power 83 Reactive Power 84 Power Factor 85 Active Power Consumption 87 Reactive Power Consumption 87 68 1639501 12 2006 Metering and Monitoring Functions Line Currents Description Line Currents Line Current Characteristics Line Current Ratio Line Current Ratio Formulas The LTM R controller measures line currents and provides the value of each phase in amperes and as a percentage of FLC The line currents function returns the rms value in amperes of the phase currents from the 3 CT inputs e L1 phase 1 current e L2 phase 2 current e L3 phase 3 current The LTM R controller performs true rms calculations for line currents up to the 7th harmonic Single phase current is measured from L1 and L3 The line currents function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Unit A Accuracy e 1 for 8 A and 27 A units 2 for 100 A units Resolution 0 01A Refresh interval 100 ms The L1 L2 and L3 Current Ratio parameter provides the phase current as a percentage of FLC The line current value for the phase is compared to the FLC parameter setting where FLC is FLC1 or FLC2 whichever is active at that time Calculated measurement Formula Line current ratio FLC 100 x
217. e LTM R controller clears the warning whenever the measured value no longer exceeds the warning threshold plus or minus a 5 hysteresis band 118 1639501 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Setting Ranges of the Motor Protection Functions A WARNING RISK OF UNINTENDED CONFIGURATION AND OPERATION When modifying parameter settings of the LTM R controller e Be especially careful if you change parameter settings when the motor is running e Disable network control of the LTM R controller to prevent unintended parameter configuration and operation Failure to follow this instruction can result in death serious injury or equipment damage Thermal and The LTM R controller provides the thermal and current protection functions listed Current Protection below All the following functions can be enabled or disabled Functions Protection functions Parameters Setting range Factory setting Thermal overload Mode e Inverse thermal Inverse thermal e Definite time Fault reset mode e Manual Manual e Remote e Automatic Motor auxiliary fan Enable Disable Disable cooled Fault enable Enable Disable Enable Warning enable Enable Disable Enable 1 Thermal Overload Inverse Thermal Fault Reset Timeout is set by the Auto Reset Group 1 Timeout parameter 2 OC1 and OC2 are set via the Motor Full Load Current and the Motor High Speed Full Load Current parameters respectively OC1 and OC2 setting
218. e Stop motor 1 5 Reset Reset 1 6 Local 0 or network 1 Local 0 or network 1 Reverser operating mode provides the following logic outputs Logic outputs Assignment 0 1 13 and 14 KM1 contactor control Forward 0 2 23 and 24 KM2 contactor control Reverse 0 3 33 and 34 Warning signal 0 4 95 96 97 and 98 Fault signal Reverser operating mode uses the following HMI keys HMI keys 2 wire maintained assignment 3 wire impulse assignment Aux 1 Forward run Start motor forward Aux 2 Reverse run Start motor reverse Stop Stop while pressed Stop 1639501 12 2006 239 Motor Control Functions Timing The following diagram is an example of the timing sequence for the Reverser Sequence operating mode that shows the inputs and outputs for a 3 wire impulse configuration when the control direct transition bit is On 1 1 Start forward 1 2 Start reverse 1 4 Stop 0 1 KM1 forward 4 0 2 KM2 reverse Motor On bit Transition timer ies 3 Iw E D a ae tiy i Yr tow _ z SE ey eae koONnD Normal operation with stop command Normal operation without stop command Forward run comman
219. e Warning Threshold e Fault Threshold 1 fault time delay e Fault Timeout e 2 function outputs e External Ground Current Warning e External Ground Current Fault 1 counting statistic e Ground Current Faults Count e 1 measure of ground current in amperes The external ground current function includes the following features Block Diagram External ground current warning and fault O External ground current fault 10 gt 10s1 L External ground current warning I0 e P l0 gt l0s2 yt T a 10 Ground current from external ground CT 10s1 Warning threshold l0s2 Fault threshold T Fault timeout Parameter The external ground current function has the following parameters ttin Settings Parameters Setting range Factory setting External ground current fault timeout 0 1 25 S 0 5s in 0 01 s increments External ground current fault threshold 0 01 20 A 0 01 A in 0 01 A increments External ground current warning threshold 0 01 20A 0 01 A in 0 01 A increments 164 1639501 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Function The external ground current function has the following characteristics Characteristics Characteristics Value Hysteresis 95 of Fault threshold or Warning threshold Trip time accuracy 0 1 s or 5 Example The following diagram describes the occurrence of a external ground current faul
220. e accuracy 0 1 s or 5 146 1639501 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Example The following diagram describes the occurrence of a current phase loss fault of a motor in run state Fault timeout Fault timeout a f 80 gt q p Start state Run state A l Percentage difference between current in any phase and the 3 phase current average 1639501 12 2006 147 Motor Protection Functions Current Phase Reversal Description Functional Characteristics Parameter Settings Function Characteristics The current phase reversal function signals a fault when it detects that the current phases of a 3 phase motor are out of sequence with the Motor Phases Sequence parameter ABC or ACB Note When the LTM R controller is connected to an expansion module phase reversal protection is based on voltage phase sequence before the motor starts and on current phase sequence after the motor starts This function e is active when the motor is in start state or run state e applies only to 3 phase motors e has no warning and no timer This function can be enabled or disabled The current phase reversal function adds to one counting statistic Wiring Faults Count The current phase reversal function has the following configurable parameters Parameters Setting range Factory setting Fault enable Enable Disable Disable Phase se
221. e essential requirements of the low voltage LV machinery and electromagnetic compatibility EMC directives Rated insulation voltage Ui According to IEC EN 60947 1 overvoltage category Ill degree of pollution 3 690 V UI on voltage inputs According to UL508 CSA C22 2 n o 14 690 V UI on voltage inputs Rated impulse withstand voltage According to IEC60947 1 8 3 3 4 1 Paragraph 2 220 V inputs circuits 4 8 kV 24 V inputs circuits 0 91 kV Uimp wana TE communication circuits 0 91 kV voltage input circuits 7 3 kV Degree of protection According to 60947 1 protection against direct contact IP20 Protective treatment IEC EN 60068 le IEC EN 60068 2 30 Cycle Humidity 12 Cycles IEC EN 60068 2 11 Salt spray 48 hr Ambient air temperature around the device Storage 40 80 C 40 176 F Operation gt 40 mm 1 57 inches spacing 20 60 C 4 140 F lt 40mm 1 57 inches but gt 9 mm 0 35 inches spacing 20 55 C 4 131 F lt 9 mm 0 35 inches spacing 20 45 C 4 113 F Maximum operating altitude derating are accepted 4500 m 14763 ft without derating 2000 m 6561 ft 1 Some certifications are in progress The maximum rated ambient temperature of the expansion module depends on the installation spacing with the LTM R controller 3 Without modifying the state of the con
222. e imbalance Fault enable Enable Disable Disable Fault timeout starting 0 2 20 s in 0 1 s increments 0 7s Fault timeout running 0 2 20 s in 0 1 s increments 2s Fault threshold 3 15 of the calculated imbalance 10 imbalance in 1 increments Warning enable Enable Disable Disable Warning threshold 3 15 calculated imbalance 10 imbalance in 1 increments Voltage phase loss Fault enable Enable Disable Enable Fault timeout 0 1 30 s in 0 1 s increments 3s Warning enable Enable Disable Enable Voltage phase reversal Fault enable Enable Disable Enable Motor phases sequence A B C A B C e A C B Undervoltage Fault enable Enable Disable Disable Fault timeout 0 2 25 s in 0 1 s increments 3s Fault threshold 70 99 of Motor nominal voltage 85 of Motor in 1 increments nominal voltage Warning enable Enable Disable Disable Warning threshold 70 99 of Motor nominal voltage 85 of Motor in 1 increments nominal voltage Overvoltage Fault enable Enable Disable Disable Fault timeout 0 2 25 s in 0 1 s increments 3s Fault threshold 101 115 of Motor nominal voltage 110 of Motor in 1 increments nominal voltage Warning enable Enable Disable Disable Warning threshold 101 115 of Motor nominal voltage 110 of Motor in 1 increments nominal voltage Load shedding Enable Enable Disable Enable Timeout 1 9999 s in increments of 0 1 s 10s Threshold 68 115 of Motor nominal voltage 70 Restart timeout 1 9999 s 10s in increments of 0
223. e load shedding restart threshold and remains above the threshold for the duration of a configurable load shedding restart timer When the LTM R controller clears the load shedding condition e in 2 wire maintained configuration it issues a Run command to re start the motor e in 3 wire impulse configuration it does not automatically re start the motor If your application includes another device that externally provides voltage load shedding the LTM R controller s load shedding function should not be enabled All load shedding thresholds and timers can be adjusted when the LTM R controller is in its normal operating state When a load shedding timer is counting at the time it is adjusted the new duration time does not become effective until the timer expires This function is available only when your application includes an LTM E expansion module 1639501 12 2006 191 Motor Protection Functions Functional The voltage load shedding function includes the following features Characteristics e 2 thresholds e Load Shedding Threshold e Load Shedding Restart Threshold e 2 time delays e Load Shedding Timeout e Load Shedding Restart Timeout e 1 status flag e Load Shedding e 1 counting statistic e Load Sheddings Count In addition the voltage load shedding function e disables logic outputs O 1 and O 2 e causes the alarm LED to flash 5 times per second Parameter The voltage load sheddi
224. e number or numbers with greatest deviation from Vavg Vs1 Warning threshold Vs2 Fault threshold Vavg 3 phase voltage average T1 Fault timeout starting T2 Fault timeout running 1639501 12 2006 179 Motor Protection Functions Parameter The voltage phase imbalance function has the following parameters Settings Parameters Setting range Factory setting Fault enable Enable Disable Disable Fault timeout starting 0 2 20 s in 0 1 s increments 0 7s Fault timeout running 0 2 20 s in 0 1 s increments 2s Fault threshold 3 15 of the calculated 10 imbalance in 1 increments Warning enable Enable Disable Disable Warning threshold 3 15 of the calculated 10 imbalance in 1 increments Function The voltage phase imbalance function has the following characteristics Characteristics Characteristics Value Hysteresis 95 of Fault threshold or Warning threshold Trip time accuracy 0 1 s or 5 Example ved Vs2 Fault timeout starting The following diagram describes the occurrence of a voltage phase imbalance Fault timeout running lt Start state p lt Run state p V A Percentage difference between voltage in any phase and the 3 phase average voltage Vs2 Fault threshold 180 1639501 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Voltage Phase Loss Description Functional Charact
225. e register 2 bit 0 Reserved bit 1 Diagnostic fault enable bit 2 Wiring fault enable bit 3 Overcurrent fault enable bit 4 Current phase loss fault enable bit 5 Current phase reversal fault enable bit 6 Motor temperature sensor fault enable bit 7 Voltage phase imbalance fault enable bit 8 Voltage phase loss fault enable bit 9 Voltage phase reversal fault enable bit 10 Undervoltage fault enable bit 11 Overvoltage fault enable bit 12 Underpower fault enable bit 13 Overpower fault enable bit 14 Under power factor fault enable bit 15 Over power factor fault enable 634 Word Warning enable register 2 bit 0 Reserved bit 1 Diagnostic warning enable bit 2 Reserved bit 3 Overcurrent warning enable bit 4 Current phase loss warning enable bit 5 Reserved bit 6 Motor temperature sensor warning enable bit 7 Voltage phase imbalance warning enable bit 8 Voltage phase loss warning enable bit 9 Reserved bit 10 Undervoltage warning enable bit 11 Overvoltage warning enable bit 12 Underpower warning enable bit 13 Overpower warning enable bit 14 Under power factor warning enable bit 15 Over power factor warning enable 488 1639501 12 2006 Use Register Variable type Read Write variables
226. ead only variables Note p 455 210 Ulnt Fault code n 2 211 Ulnt Motor full load current ratio n 2 FLC max 212 Ulnt Thermal capacity level n 2 trip level 213 Ulnt Average current ratio n 2 FLC 214 Ulnt L1 current ratio n 2 FLC 215 Ulnt L2 current ratio n 2 FLC 216 Ulnt L3 current ratio n 2 FLC 217 Ulnt Ground current ratio n 2 FLC min 218 Ulnt Full load current max n 2 x 0 1 A 219 Ulnt Current phase imbalance n 2 220 Ulnt Frequency n 2 x 0 1 Hz 221 Ulnt Motor temperature sensor n 2 222 225 Word 4 Date and time n 2 See DT_DateTime p 460 226 Ulnt Average voltage n 2 V 1 227 Ulnt L3 L1 voltage n 2 V 1 228 Ulnt L1 L2 voltage n 2 V 1 229 Ulnt L2 L3 voltage n 2 V 1 230 Ulnt Voltage phase imbalance n 2 1 231 Ulnt Active power n 2 1 232 Ulnt Power factor n 2 x 0 01 1 233 239 Not significant 1639501 12 2006 471 Use N 3 Fault The n 3 fault statistics are completed by variables at addresses 390 to 399 Statistics Register Variable type Read only variables Note p 455 240 Ulnt Fault code n 3 241 Ulnt Motor full load current ratio n 3 FLC max 242 Ulnt Thermal capacity level n 3 trip level 243 Ulnt Average current ratio n 3 FLC 244 Ulnt L1 current ratio n 3 FLC 245 Ulnt L2 current ratio n 3 FLC 246 Ulnt L3 current ratio n 3 FLC 247 Ulnt Ground current ratio n 3 FLC m
227. ece tt tees 439 Fault Management 0 0 eee eee 442 Control Commands 0000 cece teen eee 444 Using the Modbus Communication Network 000 cece eee 445 Introduction to the Modbus Communication Network 5 445 Modbus Protocol Principle 00 0 e cette 446 Configuration of the LTM R Modbus Network Port 2 005 447 Communication Parameter Clear Commands 0 000 eee eee 448 Simplified Control and Monitoring 00 0 eee eee eee 450 Modbus Request and Programming Examples 0000e0 00s 451 User Map User Defined Indirect Registers 0c cece ee aes 453 Modbus Register Map Organization of Communication Variables 454 Data Formats ccnen cute eee POE Ye eek eT BRE AR Ae 456 Data Types 3 oes ete E E ale a ae es 458 Identification Variables 1 0 0 ete 465 Statistics Variables i eea a a aE eee 466 Monitoring Variables 00 eet 476 Configuration Variables 0 0 0 c cette 483 Command Variables 00 ccc ect eee 493 User Map Variables 0 2 2 0 02 e eee ee 494 Custom Logic Variables 0 uasan ananena 495 Maintenances 6s cesar ci ai eats ae Soe ee eee 497 Detecting Problems 002 c eee eens 498 Troubleshooting ss sti ierant aran ad ap A E dace poate alae ates wees 499 Preventive Maintenance 0 00 eee ete 502 Replacing an LTM R Controller and LTM E Expansion
228. ect to change without notice and should not be construed as a commitment by Schneider Electric 1639501 12 2006 About the Book Related Documents Product Related Warnings User Comments Title of Documentation Reference Number TeSys T LTM R CANopen Motor Management Controller User s 1639503 Manual TeSys T LTM R DeviceNet Motor Management Controller User s 1639504 Manual TeSys T LTM R Profibus Motor Management Controller User s 1639502 Manual You can download these technical publications and other technical information from our website at www telemecanique com Schneider Electric assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document If you have any suggestions for improvements or amendments or have found errors in this publication please notify us All pertinent state regional and local safety regulations must be observed when installing and using this product For reasons of safety and to ensure compliance with documented system data only the manufacturer should perform repairs to components When controllers are used for applications with technical safety requirements please follow the relevant instructions Failure to use Schneider Electric software or approved software with our hardware products may result in improper operating results Failure to observe this product related warning can result in injury or equipment damage We welcome y
229. ed by a mechanism other than the controller Independent Direct on line across the line full voltage non reversing motor starting applications Reverser Direct on line across the line full voltage reversing motor starting applications Two Step Reduced voltage starting motor applications including e Wye Delta e Open Transition Primary Resistor e Open Transition Autotransformer Two Speed Two speed motor applications for motor types including e Single winding consequent pole e Separate winding Each application is described individually with 1 complete application diagram including power and control 3 wire impulse local control 3 partial diagrams control logic input wiring variants 2 wire maintained local control 3 wire impulse local control with network control selectable 2 wire maintained local control with network control selectable 1639501 12 2006 531 NEMA Format Wiring Diagrams What s in this This chapter contains the following topics Chapter Topic Page Overload Mode Wiring Diagrams 533 Independent Mode Wiring Diagrams 537 Reverser Mode Wiring Diagrams 539 Two Step Wye Delta Mode Wiring Diagrams 541 Two Step Primary Resistor Mode Wiring Diagrams 543 Two Step Autotransformer Mode Wiring Diagrams 545 Two Speed Mode Wiring Diagrams Single Winding Consequent Pole 547 Two Speed Mode Wiring Diagrams Separate Windi
230. eed operating mode Inputs state 1 2 3 4 5 6 The number of each active logic input on the 7 8 9 10 or x LTM R controller 1 6 or the expansion module 7 10 An x indicates an inactive input 1639501 12 2006 355 Use Line Displays Values Description C right blank Applies to scrolling parameter list Transition event Load Shed Load shed event occurring RapidCycle Rapid cycle event occurring Bump Bump transition occurring Bumpless Bumpless transition occurring Fault and When the LTM R controller detects a fault or warning condition the LCD uses the Warning Display presentation mode LCD to immediately display a message describing e the most recently occurring fault or e the most recently occurring warning if no fault is active To close the fault or warning message display click ESC to return to the scrolling HMI display The fault and warning display contains the following information Line Displays Value s A System state WARN FAULT B1 Fault or Warning Code See p 267for a list of fault and warning codes and their descriptions B2 Operating mode IND REV 2ST 2SP OVL C left LTM R controller state Ready Rdy Run Start C right Fault or warning description Protection name 356 1639501 12 2006 Navigating the Menu
231. efined as a percentage of the Motor Nominal Voltage Vnom parameter setting The overvoltage function is available in ready state and run state when the LTM R controller is connected to an expansion module Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled The function applies to both single phase and 3 phase motors The overvoltage function includes the following features e 2 thresholds e Warning Threshold e Fault Threshold e 1 fault time delay e Fault Timeout e 2 function outputs e Overvoltage Warning e Overvoltage Fault e 1 counting statistic e Overvoltage Faults Count 188 1639501 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Block Diagram Overvoltage warning and fault Ready state p Run state amp Overvoltage warning OR V1 m Vmax gt Vst ___ V2 gt Vmax AND V3 Vmax gt Vs2 A gt amp y 0 1 Overvoltage fault Ready state b gt Run state _ AND OR V1 L1 L2 voltage V2 L2 L3 voltage V3 L3 L1 voltage Vs1 Warning threshold Vs2 Fault threshold T Fault timeout Parameter The overvoltage function has the following parameters Settings Parameters Setting range Factory setting Fault enable Enable Disable Disable Fault timeout 0 2 25 s in 0 1 s increments 3s Fault threshold 101 115 of Motor nominal voltage 110 in 1 increments Warning enable Enab
232. either the icon bar or in the Link menu Be sure the file to be transferred is in the Main window To open a file e select the Open Configuration command in either the icon bar or the File menu The Open dialog opens then e inthe Open dialog navigate to the desired location and click Open Transfer the configuration from your PC to the LTM R controller Select PC to Device in either the icon bar or the Link to File gt Transfer sub menu 432 1639501 12 2006 Use Export Settings The configuration software can also export a list of all configured parameters This list can be exported in the following electronic file formats spreadsheet csv HTML text XML The exported list indicates each parameter s read or write status memory address name unit of measure value as edited in the configuration software local value default value value as stored in the LTM R controller device value minimum value maximum value status 1639501 12 2006 433 Use Navigation Overview To navigate the configuration software interface use the features of the tree control and main window identified below PowerSuite Default File Edit Services Link Settings Tools View Help SHAS S eee ene i 5 gt Tesys T Current Settings F3 Device Information Current Phase Imbalance Current Phase Loss t Current Phase Reverse B Ground Current Mam E Under Current a gt l
233. elect a tab or e if necessary use the scroll bars at the top or bottom of the page to view the desired information 1639501 12 2006 435 Use Configuring Parameters Overview Selecting a File Use PowerSuite software to configure parameter settings remotely in your PC then transfer the edited parameter settings to the LTM R controller The configuration software uses the edited parameter settings to overwrite the parameter settings in the LTM R controller only when the following conditions are met e atleast one transferred parameter setting is different from the same setting in the LTM R controller and e measured current is less than 10 of FLC Configurable parameters can be found in the e Settings branch of the tree control e Settings menu s Languages sub menu e Communication page of the Preferences dialog After you have completed making your edits be sure to save your work See p 431 for information on saving files Note You can also use the Custom Logic Editor to edit parameter settings before transferring them to the LTM R controller To configure parameters first select a configuration file to edits Either e transfer parameter settings from the LTM R controller to the configuration software in your PC using the Device to PC command in the Link gt File Transfer sub menu See p 431 for information on uploading parameter settings e open a previously saved configurat
234. elow Cable Reference Length 1 LTMCC004 40 mm 1 57 in LU9RO3 0 3 m 11 81 in 3 LU9R10 1 m 39 37 in 282 1639501 12 2006 Installation Connecting to an HMI Device Overview This section describes how to connect the LTM R controller to an HMI device such as a Magelis XBT or a PC running PowerSuite software The HMI must be connected to the RJ45 port on the LTM R controller or to the HMI interface port RJ45 on the expansion module You can connect an HMI to a controller in 1 to 1 or 1 to many mode Connecting to a The diagrams below show the Magelis XBTN410 HMI connected to the controller Magelis XBT with and without the expansion module HMI Device in 1 to 1 Mode Magelis XBTN410 HMI device Magelis connecting cable XBTZ938 LTM R controller Expansion module koOND 1639501 12 2006 283 Installation Connecting toa The diagram below shows a 1 to many connection from the Magelis XBTN410 Magelis XBT HMI to up to 8 controllers with or without the expansion module HMI Device in 1 to Many Mode Magelis XBTN410 HMI device Magelis connecting cable XBTZ938 T junction boxes VW3 A8 306 TFee Communication cable VW3 A83 06Ree Line terminators VW3 A8 306 R LTM R controller Expansion module ul NOoaohwhd Note Fo
235. ening and transferring pre programmed software applications to the Magelis XBTN410 HMI For more information about the Magelis XBT L1000 programming software consult its help file and printed documentation For instructions on how to download 1 to 1 and 1 to many software applications see p 346 For instructions on how to transfer 1 to 1 and 1 to many software applications from your PC to the Magelis XBTN410 HM see p 347 344 1639501 12 2006 Use Installation Steps To install the Magelis XBT L1000 programming software on your PC Step Action 1 Place the installation disk into your PC s disk drive The installation program should begin 2 If the installation program does not begin use Microsoft Windows Explorer to navigate to and click on the file Setup exe If any screens appear that do not require action click Next In the language screen select a language and click OK In the name and company screen type in your name and your company name or accept the defaults and click Next 6 If a screen appears warning you that protocols will be uninstalled click Yes to continue In the Protocols Choices screen be sure that Modbus is selected then click Next In the Select Components screen make no selections then click Next In the Choose Destination Location screen either accept the default path or use the Browse button to navigate to a new one then click Next 10 I
236. ents 150 FLC 246 1639501 12 2006 Motor Control Functions Two Speed Operating Mode Description Use Two Speed operating mode in two speed motor applications for motor types such as Dahlander consequent pole Pole Changer Functional This function includes the following features Characteristics Accessible in 3 control modes Local Terminal Strip Local HMI and Network Firmware interlocking prevents simultaneous activation of O 1 low speed and 0 2 high speed logic outputs Two measures of FLC e FLC1 Motor Full Load Current Ratio at low speed e FLC2 Motor High Speed Full Load Current Ratio at high speed The LTM R controller can change speed in two scenarios e The Control Direct Transition bit is Off requires a Stop command followed by expiration of the Motor Transition Timeout e The Control Direct Transition bit is On automatically transitions from high speed to low speed after a time out of the adjustable Motor Transition Timeout In local terminal strip control mode logic input 1 1 controls logic output O 1 and logic input 1 2 controls logic output O 2 In network or local HMI control modes when the Motor Run Forward Command parameter is set to 1 and e Motor Low Speed Command is set to 1 logic output O 1 is enabled e Motor Low Speed Command is set to 0 logic output O 2 is enabled Logic input 1 3 is not used in the control circuit but can be configured to set a bi
237. ents isee Lode eien e Soe Geo a Geen eek Oe 63 Fault and Warning Counters a nus aasa aaea a ae 64 System and Device Monitoring Faults 00 000 c eee eee eee 65 Motor HIStory io enap ae eho ay a Pe eae esha ach Paved Ala oe 66 Thermal Overload Statistics 0 eee 67 System Operating Status 0 0 cette 67 Measurements ui segs a etal sot a baia ai tees de le 68 OVOIVIOW 50 2 eee eA ee se acl eae ee rhein ei nara eee eee 68 Line Currents lt succes mae gyeeoet eats Saunas Sada ee areca eee Sarena ats 69 Ground Current s8 eiaa eea e beer eels ee ead ee nee YR 71 Average Current amaa aei aia aa tte teens 74 Current Phase Imbalance 0 0 c eee eens 76 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 Thermal Capacity Level 0 0 0 cece eee ae 77 Motor Temperature Sensor 0 0 0 cece eet tees 79 Frequency sit evi eel ee be ed wc eet EA ee 79 Line to Line Voltages 0 0 cee eee 80 Line Voltage Imbalance 0 0 0 cece tte 81 Average Voltages piia eg fade Rod aE a a ea Re oo ee a ee eee 82 Active Power Terasa decd ee deed oh eek eee Pe ee ee 83 Reactive Powel sey seer See aa tees Sa sa hy ee hE ahaa Sea 84 Power Factors nalean titan inert fer ttent eth ee did ote ai an he de oh a tee teh weg 85 Active Power Consumption sssaaa eects 87 Reactive Power Consumption 000 cece eee eens 87 Fault and Warning Counters sssaaa ananunua 88 OVENVIOW knit sin ck ROA S
238. equency required Hz LC1F265 10 AC 24 42 48 110 115 AC 277 380 415 480 127 220 230 240 500 600 660 1000 5 DC 24 DC 48 110 125 220 230 250 440 460 LC1F330 10 AC 24 42 48 110 115 AC 277 380 415 480 127 220 230 240 500 600 660 1000 5 DC 24 DC 48 110 125 220 230 250 440 460 LC1F400 15 AC 48 110 120 125 127 AC 265 277 380 400 200 208 220 230 230 240 415 480 500 550 600 1000 8 DC 48 110 125 220 250 40 400 140 LC1F500 18 AC 48 110 120 127 200 208 220 230 230 240 265 277 380 400 415 480 500 550 600 1000 8 DC 48 110 125 220 250 440 LC1F630 22 AC 48 110 120 125 127 AC 265 277 380 400 200 208 220 240 415 480 500 550 600 1000 73 DC 48 110 125 220 250 440 LC1F780 50 AC 110 120 127 200 AC 265 277 380 415 480 208 220 240 500 52 DC 110 125 220 250 440 LC1F800 15 AC 110 127 220 240 AC 380 440 25 DC 110 127 220 240 380 440 Dual parallel contactors of this size require an interposing relay Control circuit frequency may be 40 400Hz but power to contactors monitored by CTs must be 50Hz or 60Hz in frequency 302 1639501 12 2006 Installation NEMA Type S Catalog references and characteristics for NEMA Type S contactors are listed in the Contactors table below Coil voltages are grouped according to whether an interposing relay is requi
239. erated by a thermal model of the motor and varies in response to changes in the value of the measured quantity e g current Contrast with definite time M Modbus Modbus is the name of the master slave client server serial communications protocol developed by Modicon now Schneider Automation Inc in 1979 which has since become a standard network protocol for industrial automation N nominal power nominal voltage NTC NTC analog Motor Nominal Power Parameter for the power a motor will produce at rated voltage and rated current Setting range 0 1 999 9 kW in increments of 0 1 kW Default setting 7 5 kW Motor Nominal Voltage Parameter for rated voltage Setting range 200 690 V Default setting 480 V negative temperature coefficient Characteristic of a thermistor a thermally sensitive resistor whose resistance increases as its temperature falls and whose resistance decreases as its temperature rises Type of RTD 554 1639501 12 2006 Glossary P PLC programmable logic controller power factor Also called cosine phi or power factor represents the absolute value of the ratio of active power to apparent power in AC power systems as follows Power Factor Active Power _ Apparent Power Profibus An open bus system that uses an electrical network based on a shielded 2 wire line or an optical network based on a fiber optic cable PTC positive temperature coefficient Cha
240. erature f 10 Port Status gt Active Faults Parameters Logic Functions ercran 11 12 13 IGF Current phase imbalance PowerSuite W Connected Menu bar Icon bar Tree control Main window Expand the tree control then select an item to display configuration monitoring and control data in the main window Use the menu bar and icon bar to perform configuration monitoring and control functions koOND For information on how to use each screen in the configuration software refer to the Help menu s help file commands 1639501 12 2006 429 Use File Management Overview The LTM R controller s configuration settings are contained in an electronic configuration file Use PowerSuite software to manage the LTM R controller s configuration files by e creating a new configuration file for editing e transfer configuration settings from the LTM R controller to the configuration software running on your PC e opening configuration settings for editing saving edited configuration settings to a file on your PC s hard disk or to other media e transferring saved or edited configuration files from your PC to the LTM R controller Power up Every time you open the configuration software it presents the Load Configuration dialog Use this dialog to select the configuration settings that will be displayed when the configuration software opens You can select e the
241. ering and Monitoring Functions 3 6 Thermal Overload Statistics Time to Trip Description When a thermal overload condition exists the LTM R controller reports the time to trip before the fault occurs in the Time To Trip parameter When the LTM R controller is not in a thermal overload condition to avoid the appearance of being in a fault state the LTM R controller reports the time to trip as 9999 If the motor has an auxiliary fan and the Motor Aux Fan Cooled parameter has been set the time to reset is decreased by a factor of 4 Characteristics The time to trip function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Unit s Accuracy 10 Resolution 1s Refresh interval 100 ms 112 1639501 12 2006 Metering and Monitoring Functions 3 7 System Operating Status Overview Introduction Access What s in this Section The LTM R controller monitors the motor operating state and the minimum time required to wait for a reset of a thermal fault auto reset delay timeout load shed reconnect delay or rapid cycle timer timeout If more than one timer is active the parameter displays the maximum timer which is the minimum wait for the fault response or the control function to reset The Motor states can be accessed via e aPC with PowerSuite software e a Magelis XBTN410 HMI e aPLC via the remote communication link This section cont
242. eristics The voltage phase loss function is based on the Voltage Phase Imbalance function and signals e a warning when the voltage in any phase differs by more than a 40 from the average voltage in all 3 phases e a fault when the voltage in any phase differs by more than 40 from the average voltage in all 3 phases for a set period of time This function has a single adjustable fault time delay Note Use this function to detect and guard against large voltage phase imbalances in excess of 40 of the average voltage in all 3 phases For smaller voltage imbalances use the voltage phase imbalance motor protection function This function is available in ready state when the LTM R controller is connected to an expansion module The curent phase loss function is available during start state and run state The function identifies the phase experiencing a voltage loss If the maximum deviation from the 3 phase voltage average is the same for two phases the function identifies both phases Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled The function applies only to 3 phase motors The voltage phase loss function includes the following features e A fixed fault and warning threshold equal to 80 of the 3 phase average voltage e Asingle adjustable fault time delay e Voltage Phase Loss Timeout e 2 function outputs e Voltage Phase Loss Warning e Voltage Phase Loss Fault e 1 counting statistic
243. ers 55 1639501 12 2006 51 Application Example Purpose Overview Basic LTM R Controller Configuration Operating conditions The following application example uses the LTM R controller to protect and control a motor and its driven load in this example a pump This application example is intended to show you how to configure the LTM R controller in a few steps provide an example you can modify to develop your own configuration serve as a starting point for the development of more complex configurations incorporating such additional features as HMI or network control Configuring the LTM R controller includes 2 important steps proper external wiring to support the monitoring protection and control of the motor and LTM R controller configuring parameters that set the LTM R controllers monitoring protection and control functions using a configuration tool in this example PowerSuite software motor power 4 kW line to line voltage 400Vac current 9 A control circuit voltage 230 Vac 3 wire control motor trip class 10 start button stop button reset button on enclosure door customer provided fault light customer provided warning light customer provided full voltage non reversing starter direct over the line starter 24 Vdc power supply in the motor control center or control station for future use with expansion module inputs 52 1639501 12 2006 Application
244. eshold 100 of thermal capacity 1639501 12 2006 137 Motor Protection Functions Thermal Overload Definite Time Description When you set the Thermal Overload Mode parameter to Definite Time the LTM R controller signals e a warning when measured maximum phase current exceeds a configurable threshold OC1 or OC2 e a fault when the maximum phase current continuously exceeds the same threshold OC1 or OC2 for a set time delay The thermal overload definite time fault includes a time delay of constant magnitude following a start command before the protection is active and a fault timeout duration as described below At A Fault no operation T2 ee ee ee Delay T1 Is Is Fault and warning threshold OC1 or OC2 T1 Start command T2 Elapsed time delay There is no time delay for the thermal overload definite time warning Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled When the LTM R controller is connected to a 2 speed motor two thresholds are used 1 for low speed OC1 and 1 for high speed OC 2 138 1639501 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Functional Characteristics Block Diagram Thermal overload warning and fault The definite time protection function is disabled following a start by a delay defined by the Long Start Fault Timeout setting The LTM R controller when configured for overload predefined operating mode use
245. esistance application Application Diagram 3a mt Start Stop For additional examples of two step primary resistor IEC diagrams see p 523 For examples of two step primary resistor NEMA diagrams see p 543 1639501 12 2006 243 Motor Control Functions Two Step The following wiring diagram represents a simplified example of the LTM R Autotransformer controller in a two step local control 3 wire impulse autotransformer application Application Diagram 3a Na Ae eee ees ee KM1 KM3 fen 4 KM2 KM1 KM3 1 The N C interlock contacts KM1 and KM3 are not mandatory because the LTM R controller electronically interlocks O 1 and O 2 244 1639501 12 2006 Motor Control Functions I O assignment For additional examples of two step autotransformer IEC diagrams see p 525 For examples of two step autotransformer NEMA diagrams see p 545 Two step operating mode provides the following logic inputs Logic inputs 2 wire maintained assignment 3 wire impulse assignment 1 1 Control motor Start motor 1 2 Free Free 1 3 Free Free 1 4 Free Stop motor 1 5 Reset Reset 1 6 Local 0 or network 1 Local 0 or network 1 Two step operating mode provides the following logic outputs Logic outputs Assignment 0 1 13 and
246. est and Programming Examples 451 User Map User Defined Indirect Registers 453 Modbus Register Map Organization of Communication Variables 454 Data Formats 456 Data Types 458 Identification Variables 465 Statistics Variables 466 Monitoring Variables 476 Configuration Variables 483 Command Variables 493 User Map Variables 494 Custom Logic Variables 495 1639501 12 2006 445 Use Modbus Protocol Principle Overview The Modbus protocol is a master slave protocol Master Slaves PS ee oa Basssa d H Only 1 device can transmit on the line at any time The master manages and initiates the exchange It interrogates each of the slaves in succession No slave can send a message unless it is invited to do so The master repeats the question when there is an incorrect exchange and declares the interrogated slave absent if no response is received within a given time period If a slave does not understand a message it sends an exception response to the master The master may or
247. et commands from the local HMI A manual reset provides on site personnel the opportunity to inspect the equipment and wiring before performing the reset Note A manual reset blocks all reset commands from the LTM R controllers network port even when the Control Mode is set to Network 1639501 12 2006 257 Motor Control Functions Manual Reset The LTM R controller provides the following manual reset methods Methods Protection Category Monitored fault Control mode Local terminal strip Local HMI Network Diagnostic Run Command Check RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 Stop Command Check RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 Run Check Back RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 Stop Check Back RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 Wiring configuration PTC connection RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 etters CT Reversal RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 Voltage Phase Reversal RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 Current Phase Reversal RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 Voltage Phase Loss RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 Phase Configuration RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 Internal Stack Overflow PC PC PC Watchdog PC PC PC ROM Checksum PC PC PC EEROM PC PC PC CPU PC PC PC Internal Temperature PC PC PC Thermal resistance motor PTC Binary RB 1 5 RB I 5 RB 1 5 temp sensor PTC Analog RB 1 5 RB 1 5 RB 1 5 NTC Analog RB 1 5 RB 1 5 RB
248. fault 2 1 phase bit 15 Motor auxiliary fan cooled default 0 602 Word General configuration register 2 bits 0 2 Fault reset mode 1 Manual default 2 Remote or control unit keypad 4 Automatic bit 3 HMI port parity setting 0 none default 1 even bits 4 8 Reserved bit 9 HMI port endian setting bit 10 Network port endian setting bits 11 15 Reserved 603 Ulnt HMI port address setting 604 Ulnt HMI port baud rate setting 1639501 12 2006 485 Use Register Variable type Read Write variables Note p 455 605 Reserved 606 Ulnt Motor trip class 607 Reserved 608 Ulnt Thermal overload fault reset threshold 609 Ulnt Thermal overload warning threshold 610 Ulnt Internal ground current fault timeout 611 Ulnt Internal ground current fault threshold 612 Ulnt Internal ground current warning threshold 613 Ulnt Current phase imbalance fault timeout starting 614 Ulnt Current phase imbalance fault timeout running 615 Ulnt Current phase imbalance fault threshold 616 Ulnt Current phase imbalance warning threshold 617 Ulnt Jam fault timeout 618 Ulnt Jam fault threshold 619 Ulnt Jam warning threshold 620 Ulnt Undercurrent fault timeout 621 Ulnt Undercurrent fault threshold 622 Ulnt Undercurrent warning threshold 623 Ulnt Long star
249. fault e internal communication communication brick test If this test fails the LTM R controller experiences a minor internal fault e LED test turns all LEDs off then turns each LED on in sequence then turns all LEDs on then returns LEDs to their initial state e output relay test opens all relays and restores them to their original state only after e areset command executes or e power is cycled During a self test the LTM R controller sets the Self Test Command parameter to 1 When the self test finishes this parameter is reset to 0 1639501 12 2006 503 Maintenance Internal Clock To ensure an accurate record of faults be sure to maintain the LTM R controllers internal clock The LTM R controller time stamps all faults using the value stored in the Date And Time Setting parameter Internal clock accuracy is 1 second per hour If power is continuously applied for 1 year the internal clock accuracy is 30 minutes per year If power is turned Off for 30 minutes or less the LTM R controller retains its internal clock settings with accuracy of 2 minutes If power is turned Off for more than 30 minutes the LTM R controller resets its internal clock to the time when power was turned Off 504 1639501 12 2006 Maintenance Replacing an LTM R Controller and LTM E Expansion Module Overview Questions to consider in advance of replacing either an LTM R controller or an LTM E expansion m
250. fe Iron temperature fe Scaled iron temperature 0s1 Thermal overload warning threshold 136 1639501 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Parameter The thermal overload inverse thermal functions have the following configurable parameter settings Settings Parameters Setting range Factory setting FLC1 FLC2 fault threshold e 0 4 8 0 A in increments of 0 4 A for LTMRO8 0 08 A for LTMRO8 e 1 35 A for LTMR27 e 1 35 27 0 A in increments 5A for LTMR100 of 0 27 A for LTMR27 e 5 100 A in increments of 1 A for LTMR100 Warning threshold 10 100 of thermal capacity 85 of thermal capacity Motor trip class 5 30 in increments of 5 5 Fault reset timeout 50 999 in 1 s increments 120s Fault reset threshold 35 95 of thermal capacity 75 of thermal capacity The thermal overload inverse thermal functions have the following non configurable parameter settings Parameter Fixed setting Thermal overload fault threshold 100 of thermal capacity Function The thermal overload inverse thermal functions have the following characteristics Characteristics Characteristics Value Hysteresis 95 of thermal overload warning threshold Trip time accuracy 0 1 s Example o Start state The following diagram describes a thermal overload inverse thermal fault Fault condition gt a s2 a 6 Thermal capacity s2 Fault thr
251. fer the previously saved configuration file with all parameter settings from your PC to the LTM R controller Because this application example accepts the default factory settings of most parameters only a few parameters need to be configured The following operating and protection parameters must be configured Operating parameters Parameter Setting Motor nominal voltage 400 Vac Motor full load current 9A Motor phases 3 phase motor Motor operating mode Independent 3 wire impulse Motor temp sensor type PTC Binary Control local channel setting Terminal strip Load CT primary Load CT secondary Load CT multiple passes Ground CT primary Ground CT secondary Protection parameters Parameter Parameter setting Thermal overload mode Inverse thermal Thermal overload fault enable Enable Thermal overload warning enable Enable Motor Trip Class 10 Ground current mode External Ground current fault enable Enable Ground current fault timeout 0 5s Ground current fault threshold 2A 1639501 12 2006 55 Application Example Parameter Parameter setting Ground current warning enable Enable Ground current warning threshold 1A Undervoltage fault enable Enable Undervoltage fault threshold 85 of Vnom Undervoltage fault timeout 3s Undervoltage warning enable Enable Undervolt
252. figuration tab type in the folder name and path for saving configuration files 4 Click OK to close the Preferences dialog and save your changes 1639501 12 2006 431 Use File Transfer After you have edited a configuration file you can transfer the file to the LTM R PC to Device controller Before the configuration software can make this transfer the following conditions must exist e atleast one setting in the configuration file must be different than the same setting in the LTM R controller i e the software only overwrites settings with different values e current must be less than 10 of FLC i e online current must not be detected Note When you transfer a configuration file from the PC to the LTM R controller the software checks to confirm that the LTM R controller and the configuration file both use the same e current range and e network protocol If there is a mismatch the software asks if you wish to proceed If you elect to proceed the software transfers all matching parameters excluding parameters that fail a range check When the transfer is complete the software displays the names and addresses of parameters that failed the range check and were not transferred To transfer a configuration file from the PC to the LTM R controller Step Action 1 Be sure the configuration software is communicating with the LTM R controller If the task bar indicates Disconnected select Connect in
253. following wiring diagram represents a simplified example of the LTM R Application controller in a 3 wire impulse local control overload application Diagram 3a mae TTA CETER KM1 4 Stop Ef Start KM KM1 e For additional examples of overload operating mode IEC diagrams see p 513 For examples of overload operating mode NEMA diagrams see p 533 1639501 12 2006 231 Motor Control Functions I O Assignment Overload operating mode provides the following logic inputs Logic inputs Assignment 1 1 Free 1 2 Free 1 3 Free 1 4 Free 1 5 Reset 1 6 Local 0 or network 1 Overload operating mode provides the following logic outputs Logic outputs Assignment 0 1 13 and 14 Responds to network control commands 23 and 24 Responds to network control commands Warning signal 0 2 0 3 33 and 34 0 4 95 96 97 and 98 Fault signal Overload operating mode uses the following HMI keys HMI keys Assignment Aux 1 Free Aux 2 Free Stop Free Parameters Overload operating mode requires no associated parameter settings 232 1639501 12 2006 Motor Control Functions Independent Operating Mode Description Use Independent operating mode in single direct on line across the line full voltage non reversing motor starting applications Functional This func
254. for a Page faulted LTM R controller for controllers with Fault Reset Mode set to Remote and to navigate to other pages Level 2 Description REMOTE RESET 4 01FLT023 067FLT50 gt Executes a Fault Reset Command for 4 02FLT034 078FLT60 gt the selected LTM R controller 1 8 if remote fault reset is enabled for that 4 03FLT045 O89FLT70 gt controller lt 04FLT056 o90FLT80 gt Starters currents Opens the Starters Currents page Starters status Opens the Starters Status page Home gt Returns to the Home page Each of the first 4 lines of this page provide the following fault reset information at the indicated locations left right lt 01FLTO 067 FLT 50 gt bee d fault reset bit not significant LTM R controller number 1 8 fault status ON OFF FLT time to reset seconds kOoONnD 408 1639501 12 2006 Use Reset to Defaults The Reset to Defaults page provides the Clear Statistics Command and the Clear Page Controller Settings Command for each LTM R controller as displayed below Level 2 Description RESET TO DEFAULTS 4 STATS 1 SETTINGS Clears statistics left arrows or settings 4 STATS 2 SETTINGS gt right arrows for the selected LTM R controller 1 8 and restores factory 4 STATS 3 SETTINGS defaults 4 STATS 4 SETTINGS gt STATS 5 SETTINGS gt 4 STATS 6 SETTINGS gt 4 STATS 7 SETTINGS gt STATS 8 SETTINGS gt
255. form a Run command for a 2 step control sequence on the communication loss 0 1 0 2 Off Directs the LTM R controller to turn off both logic outputs O 1 and 0 2 following a communication loss 0 1 0 2 On Directs the LTM R controller to turn on both logic outputs O 1 and O 2 following a communication loss 0 1 On Directs the LTM R controller to turn on only logic output O 1 following a communication loss 0 2 On Directs the LTM R controller to turn on only logic output O 2 following a communication loss The following table indicates which fallback options are available for each operating mode Port Fallback Setting Operating Mode Overload Independent Reverser 2 step 2 speed Custom Hold 0 1 0 2 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Run No No No Yes No No 0 1 0 2 Off Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 1 0 2 On Yes Yes No No No Yes 0 1 On Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes 0 2 On Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Note When you select a network or HMI fallback setting your selection must identify an active control source 1639501 12 2006 107 Metering and Monitoring Functions 3 5 Motor History Overview Introduction Access What s in this Section The LTM R controller tracks and saves motor operating statistics Motor statistics can be accessed using e aPC with PowerSuite software e aMagelis XBTN410 HMI e aPLC via the remote communication li
256. g 463 464 Not significant 465 Ulnt Thermal capacity level trip level 466 Ulnt Average current ratio FLC 480 1639501 12 2006 Use Register Variable type Read only variables Note p 455 467 UInt L1 current ratio FLC 468 Ulnt L2 current ratio FLC 469 Ulnt L3 current ratio FLC 470 Ulnt Ground current ratio x 0 1 FLC min 471 Ulnt Current phase imbalance 472 Int Controller internal temperature C 473 Ulnt Controller config checksum 474 Ulnt Frequency x 0 01 Hz 475 Ulnt Motor temperature sensor 476 Ulnt Average voltage V 1 477 Ulnt L3 L1 voltage V 1 478 Ulnt L1 L2 voltage V 1 479 Ulnt L2 L3 voltage V 1 480 Ulnt Voltage phase imbalance 1 481 Ulnt Power factor x 0 01 1 482 Ulnt Active power consumption 1 483 Ulnt Reactive power consumption kVAR 1 484 489 Word Not significant 490 Word Network port status bit O Network port communicating bit 1 Network port connected bit 2 Network port self testing bit 3 Network port self detecting bit 4 Network port bad config bits 5 15 Not significant 491 499 Word Not significant 500 501 UDiInt Average current x 0 01 A 502 503 UDiInt L1 current x 0 01 A 504 505 UDiInt L2 current x 0 01 A 506 507 UDiInt L3 current x 0 01 A 508 509 UDInt Ground current x 0 01 A 510
257. g Threshold e Under Power Factor Fault Threshold e 1 fault time delay e Under Power Factor Fault Timeout e 2 function outputs e Under Power Factor Warning e Under Power Factor Fault e 1 counting statistic e Under Power Factor Faults Count 1639501 12 2006 201 Motor Protection Functions Block Diagram Under power factor warning Run state Power Factor amp Under power factor warning PF lt PFs1 gt gt Under power factor faul t Power Factor PF lt PFs2 Under power mH factor fault Run state gt AND PFs1 Under power factor warning threshold PFs2 Under power factor fault threshold T Under power factor fault timeout Parameter The under power factor function has the following parameters Settings Parameters Setting range Factory setting Fault enable Enable Disable Disable Fault timeout 1 25 s in 0 1 s increments 10s Fault threshold 0 1 x Power factor in 0 01 increments 0 60 Warning enable Enable Disable Disable Warning threshold 0 1 x Power factor in 0 01 increments 0 60 Function The under power factor function has the following characteristics Characteristics Characteristics Value Hysteresis 105 of Fault threshold or Warning threshold Accuracy 2 or 3 for Power Factors gt 0 6 Trip time accuracy 0 1 s or 5
258. ge e page header that is twice the height of by navigating through the HMI menu ordinary LCD text structure to the specific page links to other pages read only parameter values editable parameter settings function commands Fault message page a flashing fault message e automatically when a fault occurs the number of active faults e by selecting Faults in the Home page Pages often contain more than 4 lines of text See p 398 for instructions on how to navigate within and between pages Page examples The Home page The top 4 lines of the Home page TeSys T Vx x Starters currents Starters status Use the P button to scroll down Starters status and reveal more of this page Remote reset gt Note click on a flashing FJ to Fault s navigate to that page Resetto defaults 1639501 12 2006 395 Fault message pages The opening fault message page Note the fault name THERMAL OVERLOAD and the LTM R controller address Motor Starter 1 both flash when displayed 1 2 THERMAL OVERLOAD Motor Starter 1 Click the button to display additional fault message pages 2 2 INTERNAL COMM LOSS Motor Starter 2 Click the P button to scroll down and reveal more of the Internal Comm Loss fault message Motor Starter 2 Communication loss between Control Unit and Comm Module
259. grams Application The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse local control wiring Diagram with diagram 3 Wire Impulse Local Control 3a Startp KM1 1639501 12 2006 513 IEC Format Wiring Diagrams Application The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained local control wiring Diagram with diagram 2 Wire Maintained Local Control 3a EA TEER KM1 7E Stop Start 514 1639501 12 2006 IEC Format Wiring Diagrams Application The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse local control with Diagram with network control selectable wiring diagram 3 Wire Impulse Local Control with Network Control Selectable 3a certs eeeee KM1 JE l StopE f Network Local TEAR Ales SN Start 3 KM1 qe KM1 1639501 12 2006 515 IEC Format Wiring Diagrams Application The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained local control with Diagram with network control selectable wiring diagram 2 Wire Maintained Local Control with Network Control Selectable 30 Network Local Stop Start Pf FAS 516 1639501 12 2006 IEC Format Wiring Diagrams Independent Mode Wiring Diagrams
260. guration settings are transferred use the configuration software to change configuration settings 4 After your configuration setting edits are complete save your work to a file e Select the Save command in either the icon bar or the File menu The Save As dialog opens then e Inthe Save As dialog navigate to the desired location and click Save Save a copy of any configuration file you intend to transfer to the LTM R controller A saved copy provides both a record of these settings and a backup that can be used to re transfer configuration settings if the initial transfer fails Use the e Save command to save your configuration changes to the open configuration file e Save As command to save a copy of the displayed configuration to a separate file Note If you opened the file containing the factory default configuration settings you cannot make and save changes to this file Instead you must use the Save As command to save your changes under another file name By default the configuration software stores saved files in a folder named Configurations This folder is located on your hard drive in the same place the configuration software was installed To designate a different default file storage folder Step Action 1 In the Settings menu select Preferences The Preferences dialog opens In the Preferences dialog open the Configuration tab 3 In the Con
261. hase imbalance function includes the following features e 2 thresholds e Warning Threshold e Fault Threshold e 2 fault time delays e Fault Timeout Starting e Fault Timeout Running e 2 function outputs e Voltage Phase Imbalance Warning e Voltage Phase Imbalance Fault e 1 counting statistic e Voltage Phase Imbalance Faults Count e 3 indicators identifying the phase with the highest voltage imbalance e L1 L2 Highest Imbalance e L2 L3 Highest Imbalance e L3 L1 Highest Imbalance 178 1639501 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Block Diagram Voltage phase imbalance warning vi gt V1 Vavg lx 100 Vavg gt Vs1 v2 l V2 Vavg x 100 Vavg gt Vs1 V3 V3 Vavg x 100 Vavg gt Vs1 Start state Sa oe Run state p Voltage phase imbalance fault vi el amp AND V1 Vavg x 100 Vavg gt Vs2 v2 V2 Vavg x100 Vavg gt Vs2 v3 V3 Vavg x 100 Vavg gt Vs2 ec pH AVmax Voltage phase imbalance warning L Ln voltage imbalance Start state N amp T1 0 Voltage phase l imbalance fault motor starting V1 L1 L2 voltage V2 L2 L3 voltage V3 L3 L1 voltage OR em amp T2 0 Voltage phase imbalance fault motor running c Run state J AND HM AVmax y Ln voltage imbalance Ln Lin
262. he command lines as follows Level 3 Parameter name Description Motor Starter 1 8 Page header indicating LTM R controller address 1 8 Avg Current XXXX FLC_ Average Current Ratio L1 Current XXXX FLC L1 Current Ratio L2 Current XXXX FLC L2 Current Ratio L3 Current XXXX FLC L3 Current Ratio GR Current XXXX x FLCmin Ground Current Ratio Curr Imbalance xxx Current Phase Imbalance Th Capacity XXXXX Thermal Capacity Level Time To Trip xxxxSec Time To Trip Avg Voltage XXxx FLCmin Average Voltage L1 L2 Voltage xxxxxV L1 L2 Voltage L2 L3 Voltage XXXXXV 1 90 13 Voltage L3 L1 Voltage XXxxxV__ L3 L1 Voltage Volt Imbalance xxx _ Voltage Phase Imbalance Power Factor xx xx Power Factor Active Pwr XXxxx xkW Active Power React Pwr XXxx xkVAR_ Reactive Power Temp Sensor XXXX xQ _ Motor Temp Sensor Settings gt Links to editable settings for the LTM R controller Statistics gt Links to read only statistics for the LTM R controller Self Testv gt Executes the Self Test command See p 503 Product ID gt Links to product reference numbers and firmware versions for the LTM R controller and expansion module Home gt Returns to the Home page 411 Use Settings 1 to many Overview The Magelis XBTN410 HMI provides several pages of editable parameter settings nested in levels 4
263. he connection diagram for connection to the bus via SCA junction boxes is as the Bus via SCA follows Junction Boxes i 1 Master PLC PC or communication module Modbus cable depending on the type of master with polarization integrated on the master side or on another part of the bus See the List of connection accessories Modbus cable TSX CSA 00 TSX SCA 50 junction box without line polarization Modbus drop cable VW3 A8 306 D30 Line terminator 150 Q 0 5 W N ou f WO For Interference Protection Use the Telemecanique cable with 2 pairs of shielded twisted conductors references TSX CSA100 TSX CSA200 TSX CSA500 VW3A8306T Fee Keep the Modbus cable away from the power cables at least 30 cm 11 8 in Create crossovers of the Modbus cable and the power cables at right angles if necessary Note For more information consult guide TSX DG KBL F Electromagnetic Compatibility of Industrial Networks and Fieldbuses 312 1639501 12 2006 Installation Line terminator cabling is as follows List of c
264. his instruction can result in death serious injury or equipment damage 1639501 12 2006 383 Use HMI Password Use HMI password protection to prevent unauthorized configuration of LTM R controller parameters from the HMI The password must be an integer from 0000 to 9999 A password value of 0000 disables password protection Password protection is disabled by default The process of entering a password is similar to editing a numerical setting Editing any value requires familiarity with the Magelis XBTN410 menu structure and general navigation principles For information on menu navigation see p 357 For information on the menu structure see p 362 The following example changes the password from an initial value of 0000 to a password value of 1001 Step Description Screen display 1 Navigate to the HMI Password parameter in the Services menu HMI Password Change Pswd 2 Press the button to step into the Password Change Pswd setting The value 0000 appears by default and is not necessarily the active password 0000 3 g Press the button again to select the first left Change Pswd most digit for editing 0 kK 4 Press the CS button once to increment the first Change Pswd digit to the value 1 The sign changes to indicating the value is being edited Q4 5 Press the button to move to the second digit Change Pswd
265. his section contains the following topics Topic Page Controller Internal Fault 96 Controller Internal Temperature 97 Control Command Diagnostic Errors 99 Wiring Faults 102 Controller Configuration Checksum 105 Communication Loss 105 1639501 12 2006 95 Metering and Monitoring Functions Controller Internal Fault Description Major Internal Faults Minor Internal Faults The LTM R controller detects and records faults that are internal to the device itself Internal faults can be either major or minor Major and minor faults can change the state of output relays Cycling power to the LTM R controller may clear an internal fault When an internal fault occurs the Controller Internal Fault parameter is set During a major fault the LTM R controller is unable to reliably execute its own programming and can only attempt to shut itself down During a major fault communication with the LTM R controller is not possible Major internal faults include stack overflow fault stack underflow fault watchdog time out ROM checksum failure CPU failure internal temperature fault at 100 C 212 F RAM test error Minor internal faults indicate that the data being provided to the LTM R controller is unreliable and protection could be compromised During a minor fault the LTM R controller continues to attempt to monitor status and communications but does not accept any start c
266. hreshold for a set period of time The internal ground current function has a single fault time delay The internal ground current function can be enabled when the motor is in ready state start state or run state When the LTM R controller is operating in custom mode this function can be configured so that it is disabled during start state and enabled only during ready state and run state Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled The function applies to both single phase and 3 phase motors 160 1639501 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Functional Characteristics Block Diagram The internal ground current function includes the following features e 1 measure of ground current in amperes e Ground Current e 1 measure of ground current as a of FLC min e Ground Current Ratio e 2 thresholds e Warning Threshold e Fault Threshold e 1 fault time delay e Fault Timeout e 2 function outputs e Internal Ground Current Warning e Internal Ground Current Fault e 1 counting statistic e Ground Current Faults Count Internal ground current warning and fault 11 12 gt x 13 gt I gt l s1 gt internal ground current warning IZ IZ gt I s2 e T o gt Internal ground current fault Fe 11 Phase 1 current I2 Phase 2 current I3 Phase 3 current I Summed current Ixs1 Warning threshold IXs2 Fault thresh
267. ides the value in volts The average voltage function returns the rms value of the average voltage The LTM R controller calculates average voltage using the measured line to line voltages The measured values are internally summed using the following formula Calculated measurement Formula Average voltage 3 phase motor Vavg L1 L2 voltage L2 L3 voltage L3 L1 voltage 3 Average voltage single phase motor Vavg L3 L1 voltage The average voltage function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Unit Vac Accuracy 1 Resolution 1 Vac Refresh interval 100 ms 82 1639501 12 2006 Metering and Monitoring Functions Active Power Description The active power function measures the active power based on the power factor number of phases average rms phase voltage of L1 L2 L3 average rms phase current of L1 L2 L3 Formulas Active Power also known as true power measures Average rms Power It is expressed in watts and is the product of Calculated measurement Formula Active power P for 3 phase motor P V3 x lavg x Vavg x PF Active power P for single phase motor P lavg x Vavg x PF where lavg Average rms current e Vavg Average rms voltage e P Active power e PF Power factor Characteristics The active power function has the following characteristics
268. iginal Module Retiring Devices Both the LTM R controller and the LTM E expansion module contain electronic boards that require particular treatment at the end of their useful life When retiring a device be sure to observe all applicable laws regulations and practices 1639501 12 2006 505 Maintenance Communication Warnings and Faults Introduction Communication warnings and faults are managed in a standard way like any other types of warnings and faults The presence of a fault is signalled by various indicators e State of the LEDs 1 LED is dedicated to communication PLC Comm see p 330 State of the output relays Warning Message s displayed on HMI screen e e e e Presence of an exception code such as a report from the PLC PLC A communication loss is managed like any other fault Communication L The LTM R controller monitors the communication with the PLC Using an Oss adjustable network idle time timeout the LTM R controller watchdog function can report a network loss firmware watchdog In the event of a network loss the LTM R controller can be configured to take certain actions These depend on the control mode that the LTM R controller was operating in prior to the network loss lf PLC LTM R controller communication is lost while the LTM R controller is in network control mode the LTM R controller enters the fallback state If PLC LTM R controller communication is lost while the LTM R c
269. igirex Type Maximum Inside diameter Transformation Reference ground current transformers current mm in ratio number TA30 65A 30 1 18 1000 1 50437 PA50 85A 50 1 97 50438 1A80 160 A 80 3 15 50439 MA120 250 A 120 4 72 50440 SA200 400 A 200 7 87 50441 PA300 630 A 300 11 81 50442 1639501 12 2006 21 Introduction Lug lug kit provides bus bars and lug terminals that adapt the pass through wiring windows and provide line and load terminations for the power circuit Square D Lug lug Kit Description Reference number Square D Lug lug Kit MLPL9999 22 1639501 12 2006 Introduction Cables System components require cables to connect to other components and communicate with the network Cable Description Reference number LTM RtoLTM E connector cable 40mm 1 57 in length closely LTMCC004 couples the expansion module to the left side of the LTM R D controller LTM R to LTM E RJ45 connector cable 0 3m 11 81 in length LU9RO3 S LTM R to LTM E RJ45 connector cable 1 0m 3 28 ft length LU9R10 Cif PowerSuite cable kit includes LTM E LTM R to PC VW3A8106 communication cable 1 0m 3 28 ft length Modbus network communication cable 0 3m 11 81 in length VW38A8306R03 Modbus network communication cable 1 0m 3 28 ft length VW3A8306R10 Modbus network communication cable 3 0m 9 84 ft length VW3A8306R30 XBTZ938 LTM R LTM Eto Magelis HMI
270. in 248 Ulnt Full load current max n 3 0 1 A 249 Ulnt Current phase imbalance n 3 250 Ulnt Frequency n 3 x 0 1 Hz 251 Ulnt Motor temperature sensor n 3 252 255 Word 4 Date and time n 3 See DT_DateTime p 460 256 Ulnt Average voltage n 3 V 1 257 Ulnt L3 L1 voltage n 3 V 1 258 Ulnt L1 L2 voltage n 3 V 1 259 Ulnt L2 L3 voltage n 3 V 1 260 Ulnt Voltage phase imbalance n 3 1 261 Ulnt Active power n 3 1 262 Ulnt Power factor n 3 x 0 01 1 263 269 Not significant 472 1639501 12 2006 Use N 4 Fault The n 4 fault statistics are completed by variables at addresses 420 to 429 Statistics Register Variable type Read only variables Note p 455 270 Ulnt Fault code n 4 271 Ulnt Motor full load current ratio n 4 FLC max 272 Ulnt Thermal capacity level n 4 trip level 273 Ulnt Average current ratio n 4 FLC 274 Ulnt L1 current ratio n 4 FLC 275 Ulnt L2 current ratio n 4 FLC 276 Ulnt L3 current ratio n 4 FLC 277 Ulnt Ground current ratio n 4 FLC 278 Ulnt Full load current max n 4 x 0 1 A 279 Ulnt Current phase imbalance n 4 280 Ulnt Frequency n 4 x 0 1 Hz 281 Ulnt Motor temperature sensor n 4 282 285 Word 4 Date and time n 4 See DT_DateTime p 460 286 Ulnt Average voltage n 4 V 1 287 Ulnt L3 L1 voltage n 4 V 1 288 Ulnt L1 L2 voltage n 4 V 1 289 Ulnt L2 L3 voltage n 4 V 1 29
271. indicated menu in the Magelis XBTN410 HMI 1 to 1 Ground CT Required parameters include the following ground current settings Parameters Parameter Setting Range Factory Default Sys Config Main Ground CT Ratio e None No Default xX e 100 1 e 200 1 5 e 1000 1 e 2000 1 e Other Ratio Ground CT Primary 1 65535 1 X Ground CT Secondary 1 65535 1 X X The parameter is located in the indicated menu in the Magelis XBTN410 HMI 1 to 1 The parameter is not located in the indicated menu in the Magelis XBTN410 HMI 1 to 1 1639501 12 2006 325 Commissioning Contactor Compulsory parameters that apply to the specific contactor used in the application Parameters have the following configurable settings Parameter Setting Range Factory Default Sys Config Main Contactor Rating 1 1000 A 810A X X The parameter is located in the indicated menu in the Magelis XBTN410 HMI 1 to 1 The parameter is not located in the indicated menu in the Magelis XBTN410 HMI 1 to 1 326 1639501 12 2006 Commissioning Commissioning Using Magelis XBTN410 1 to 1 Sys Config Menu When the LTM R controller first powers up the Magelis XBTN410 HMI in 1 to 1 configuration displays its Sys Config menu The Sys Config menu is displayed when the LTM R controller is in its initialized state and must be configured before the it can be operated Configuration of the
272. ine mechanical According to CEI 60068 2 27 15 gn shock pulse 11 ms Resistance to vibration according to CEI 60068 2 62 Panel mounted 4gn DIN rail mounted 1 gn Immunity to According to EN61000 4 2 Through air 8 kV level 3 electrostatic discharge Over surface 6 kV level 3 Immunity to radiated According toEN61000 4 3 10 V m level 3 fields Immunity to fast According to EN61000 4 4 On power lines and relay 4 kV level 4 transient bursts outputs all other circuits 2 kV level 3 Immunity to radioelectric fields According to EN61000 4 62 10 V rms level 3 Surge immunity According to IEC EN 61000 4 5 Common mode Differential mode Power lines and relay outputs 4 kV 12 9 9 F 2 kV 2 9 18 F 24 Vdc inputs and power 1 kV 12 0 9 F 0 5 kV 2 9 18 F 100 240 Vac inputs and power 2 kV 12 9 9 F 1 kV 2 9 18 F Communication Temperature sensor IT1 IT2 2 kV 12 9 18 F 1 kV 42 9 0 5 F 0 5 kV 42 9 0 5 F 1 Some certifications are in progress 2 Without modifying the state of the contacts in the least favorable direction 3 NOTICE This product has been designed for use in environment A Use of this product in environment B may cause unwanted electromagnetic disturbance which may require the implementation of adequate mitigation measures Control Voltage Characteristics The LTM R controller has the following control voltage characteristics
273. ing e is counting down the rapid cycle timer Start e The motor begins to receive current e The LTM R controller e detects that current has reached the On Level Current threshold e detects that current has not both crossed and re crossed the long start fault threshold e continues to count down the long start fault timer Run e The motor continues to receive current e The LTM R controller detects that current has both crossed and re crossed the long start fault threshold before the LTM R controller fully counted down the long start fault timer 214 1639501 12 2006 Motor Control Functions Operating State Chart Config needed The operating states of the LTM R controller firmware as the motor progresses from Off to Run state are described below The LTM R controller verifies current in each operating state The LTM R controller can transition to an internal fault condition from any operating state Config complete aa System Config initial state No fault no load shed rapid cycle timer expired Not Ready Config needed lavg lt 5 FLCmin Ready Fault or load shed lavg gt 10 FLCmin Yes Start Start complete 1639501 12 2006 215 Motor Control Functions Protection Monitoring by Operating States The mot
274. ing Motor transition timeout high 0 999 9 s 100 ms speed to low speed Control direct transition On Off Off Note The low speed to high speed timer is fixed at 100 ms 1639501 12 2006 251 Motor Control Functions Custom Operating Mode Overview Program files Transferring files Custom operating mode can be implemented only by using the custom logic editor in PowerSuite software To select Custom operating mode start in the configuration software s tree control Navigate to the Settings Motor gt Motor Operating Mode page and select Custom as the Operating Mode This sets the Motor Custom Operating Mode parameter Every LTM R controller program consists of two files e aconfiguration file that contains parameter configuration settings e a logic file that contains a series of logic commands that manage LTM R controller behavior including motor start and stop commands motor transitions between steps speeds and directions the valid control source and transitions between control sources fault and warning logic for relay outputs 1 and 2 and the HMI terminal strip reset functions PLC and HMI communication loss and fallback load shed rapid cycle starting and stopping LTM R controller diagnostics When a predefined operating mode is selected the LTM R controller applies a predefined logic file that permanently resides in the LTM R controller When custom operating mode is selected the LTM R c
275. ing and e parameters have been selected in the HMI Display sub menu The scrolling parameter list e presents parameters in the same order they appear in the HMI Display sub menu e displays each parameter for 2 seconds then moves to the next parameter e returns to the first selected parameter in the list after reaching the end of the list When a fault or warning occurs the LCD display presents fault or warning information and suspends the scrolling parameter list The scrolling parameter list resumes e after the warning condition ceases to exist or the fault is cleared or e by pressing the ESC button For information on the content of each section of the LCD when displaying the scrolling list of parameters see p 354 For information on the presentation of faults and warnings see p 386 HMI Display The HMI LCD indicates that the LTM R controller is in local control and Ready state Examples and displays the day month and year L 25 12 Ready 2006 YF The HMI LCD indicates that the LTM R controller is in local control and displays logic inputs and logic outputs status showing that logic outputs O 1 and O 4 and logic inputs 1 1 1 3 1 4 and I 6 are active L 1xx4 out 1x34x6 In The HMI LCD indicates that the LTM R controller is in remote control and the LTM E expansion module logic inputs 1 7 1 9 and 1 10 are active R LTME 7x910 163
276. ing Range Factory Default Control local channel setting e Terminal strip Terminal strip e HMI Enable Enable Disable Config via HMI keypad enable Enable Enable Disable Config via HMI engineering tool enable Enable Enable Disable Config via HMI network port enable Language English Fran ais Espa ol Deutsch Italiano English Yes No No Motor auxiliary fan cooled Manual Manual Remote Automatic Fault reset mode Bumpless transfer mode Bump Bump Bumpless Diagnostic Parameter Settings Diagnostic configurable parameters for the LTM R controller and the expansion module include checks of start and stop commands and wiring Parameter Setting Range Factory Default Diagnostic fault enable see p 99 e Yes No e No Diagnostic warning enable e Yes No e No Wiring fault enable see p 102 e Yes No e No 46 1639501 12 2006 Introduction Fault Auto Reset Fault auto reset configurable parameters for the LTM R controller and the Parameter expansion module include Settings Parameter Setting Range Factory Default Auto reset attempts group 1 setting O manual 1 2 3 4 5 unlimited number of reset attempts 5 Auto reset group 1 timeout 0 65535 s 480s Auto reset attempts group 2 setting 0 manual 1 2 3 4 5 unlimited number of reset attempts 0 Auto reset group 2 timeout
277. ion 338 LTM R controller alone 339 HMI display contract setting 486 keypad password 382 language setting 328 364 379 motor temp sensor enable 380 HMI display active power enable 380 491 average current enable 380 490 average current ratio enable 380 491 average voltage enable 380 491 contrast setting 379 current phase imbalance enable 380 490 date enable 379 491 definite overcurrent enable 379 definite overcurrent ratio enable 490 frequency enable 379 490 ground current enable 380 490 I O status enable 379 490 items register 1 490 items register 2 491 L1 current enable 380 490 L1 current ratio enable 380 491 L1 L2 current enable 380 L1 L2 voltage enable 491 L2 current enable 380 490 L2 current ratio enable 380 491 L2 L3 voltage enable 380 491 L3 current enable 380 490 L3 current ratio enable 380 491 L3 L1 voltage enable 380 491 last fault enable 379 490 max current phase enable 380 490 motor temperature sensor enable 490 power consumption enable 491 power factor enable 380 491 reactive power enable 380 490 starts per hour enable 379 490 thermal capacity level enable 379 490 thermal capacity remaining enable 491 time enable 379 491 time to trip enable 379 491 voltage phase imbalance enable 380 491 HMI keypad password 438 485 HMI keys independent operating mode 235 overload operating mode 232 reverser operating mode 239 two speed operating mode 25
278. ion Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Local Control with Network Control Selectable The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained local control wiring diagram Start Stop The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse local control with network control selectable wiring diagram L Local control O Off N Network control LON Stop renee err 12 13 96 The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained local control with network control selectable wiring diagram L Local control T O Off LON N Network control a 526 1639501 12 2006 IEC Format Wiring Diagrams Two Speed Dahlander Mode Wiring Diagrams Application The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse local control wiring Diagram with diagram 3 Wire Impulse Local Control KM3 Low High Speed Speed Stop EA E E 1 A Dahlander application requires 2 sets of wires passing through the CT windows The controller can also be placed upstream of the contactors If this is the case and if the Dahlander motor is used in variable torque mode all the wires downstream of the contactors must be the same size 2 The N C interlock contacts KM1 and KM2 are not mandatory because the controller electronically interlocks O 1 and O 2 163
279. ion file 436 1639501 12 2006 Use Settings Branch After opening a configuration file expand the tree control Settings branch and select each sub branch The main window displays the configurable parameters associated with the selected sub branch PowerSuite Default File Edit Services Link Settings Tools View Help PHAxSe SS es Telemecanique gt Tesys T Current Settings Device Information E Current Phase Imbalance Current Phase Loss fa Current Phase Reverse Ground Current Ruam E Under Current 4 gt Settings General Motor Voltage E Current Power Load Shedding Diagnostics f5 Lock Outs f Communication HMI Display Fault Enable Statistics Monitoring Fault Time start Seconds f Parameters Logic Functions Fault Time Run Seconds Fault Level Warn Enable Warning level i PowerSuite S Connected You can select Settings sub branches in any order Make your edits in the main window Languages Sub You can select an HMI display language in the Settings gt Languages sub menu menu You can also make this selection by navigating to the Settings General sub branch of the tree control Preferences The Communications page of the Preferences dialog also contains configurable Dialog parameter settings To access these settings select Preferences in the Settings menu
280. ion outputs e Current Phase Loss Warning e Current Phase Loss Fault e 1 counting statistic e Current Phase Loss Faults Count e 3 indicators identifying the phase or phases experiencing the current loss e L1 Current loss e L2 Current loss e L3 Current loss 1639501 12 2006 145 Motor Protection Functions Block Diagram Current phase loss fault and warning 11 gt 11 lavg x 100 lavg gt 80 12 pe 12 lavg x 100 lavg gt 80 Start state 13 gt 13 lavg x 100 lavg gt 80 Parameter Settings Function Characteristics I1 Phase 1 current 12 Phase 2 current I3 Phase 3 current gt Run state gt OR amp 21 ___ AND a OR a H p gt Almax al Current phase loss fault Current phase loss warning p gt Ln current phase loss Ln Line current number or numbers with the greatest deviation from lavg lavg 3 phase current average T Fault timeout The current phase loss function has the following configurable parameters Parameters Setting range Factory setting Fault enable Enable Disable Enable Timeout 0 1 30 s in 0 1 s increments 3s Warning enable Enable Disable Enable The current phase loss function has the following characteristics Characteristics Value Hysteresis 75 of the 3 phase average current Trip tim
281. is Then the variable is available for 1 the LTM R LTM EV40 combination 2 9 future combinations If the note is Then A the variable can be written only when the motor is off B the variable can be written only in configuration mode Cc the variable can be written only with no fault D Z the variable is available for future exceptions Unused addresses fall into 3 categories e Not significant in Read only tables means that you should ignore the value read whether equal to 0 or not e Reserved in Read Write tables means that you must write 0 in these variables e Forbidden means that read or write requests are rejected that these addresses are not accessible at all 1639501 12 2006 455 Use Data Formats Overview Integer Int Ulnt Dint IDInt Word The data format of a communication variable can be integer Word or Word n as described below For more information about a variable size and format see p 458 Integers fall into the following categories Int signed integer using one register 16 bits e Ulnt unsigned integer using one register 16 bits e DInt signed double integer using two registers 32 bits e UDInt unsigned double integer using two registers 32 bits For all integer type variables the variable name is completed with its unit or format if necessary Example Address 474 Ulnt Frequency x 0 01 Hz Word Set of 16 bits where each bit
282. l 4 Level 5 Parameter name reference HMI Display Current Display All Selects all Current items continued Avg Current HMI Display Average Current Enable L1 Current HMI Display L1 Current Enable L2 Current HMI Display L2 Current Enable L3 Current HMI Display L3 Current Enable AvgCurrRatio HMI Display Average Current Ratio Enable L1CurrRatio HMI Display L1 Current Ratio Enable L2CurrRatio HMI Display L2 Current Ratio Enable L3CurrRatio HMI Display L3 Current Ratio Enable Curr Ph Imb HMI Display Current Imbalance Enable Max Curr Phase HMI Display Max Current Phase Enable Ground Curr HMI Display Ground Current Enable HMI Display Voltage Display All Selects all Voltage items continued Avg Voltage HMI Display Average Voltage Enable L1 L2 Volts HMI Display L1 L2 Voltage Enable L2 L3 Volts HMI Display L2 L3 Voltage Enable L3 L1 Volts HMI Display L3 L1 Voltage Enable Volt Ph Imb HMI Display Voltage Phase Imbalance Enable Power Display All Selects all Power items Power Factor HMI Display Power Factor Enable Active Power HMI Display Active Power Enable React Power HMI Display Reactive Power Enable PowerConsump HMI Display Power Consumption Enable Temp Sensor HMI Motor Temp Sensor Enable 380 1639501 12 2006 Use Scrolling The LCD display automatically presents a scrolling list of parameters and their Parameter List dynamically changing values if e there is no fault or warn
283. le Disable Disable Warning threshold 101 115 of Motor nominal voltage 110 in 1 increments Function The overvoltage function has the following characteristics Characteristics Characteristics Value Hysteresis 95 of Fault threshold or Warning threshold Trip time accuracy 0 1 s or 5 1639501 12 2006 189 Motor Protection Functions Example The following diagram describes the occurrence of an overvoltage fault V A VSZ ideiala doce wheelies Beh Ee ee ee iS Fault timeout Tt Vs2 Overvoltage fault threshold 190 1639501 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Voltage Load Shedding Description The LTM R controller provides voltage load shedding which you can use to deactivate non critical loads if voltage level is substantially reduced For example use voltage load shedding when power is transferred from a main utility supply to a backup generator system where the backup generator system can supply power only to a limited number of critical loads With the voltage load shedding function enabled the LTM R controller monitors the average phase voltage and e reports a load shedding condition and stops the motor when voltage falls below a configurable load shedding threshold and stays below the threshold for the duration of a configurable load shedding timer e clears the load shedding condition when voltage rises above a configurabl
284. ler monitors HMI port communications and reports both a warning and a fault if no valid communication has been received by the HMI port for longer than 7 seconds Fault and warning monitoring can be enabled or disabled Both fault and warning monitoring are enabled by default The HMI port communication has the following fixed and configurable settings Parameter Setting Range Factory Default HMI port fault enable Enable Disable Enable HMI port warning enable Enable Disable Enable HMI port fallback setting 1 Hold Run 0 1 O 2 off 0 1 0 2 on 0 1 off O 2 off 0 1 O 2 off 1 The operating mode affects the configurable parameters for the HMI port fallback settings 106 1639501 12 2006 Metering and Monitoring Functions Fallback Condition When communication between the LTM R controller and either the network or the local HMI is lost the LTM R controller is in a fallback condition The behavior of logic outputs 0 1 and O 2 following a communication loss is determined by e the operating mode see p 222 and e the Network Port Fallback Setting and HMI Port Fallback Setting parameters Fallback setting selectings can include Port Fallback Setting Description Hold 0 1 0 2 Directs the LTM R controller to hold the state of logic outputs O 1 and O 2 as of the time of the communication loss Run Directs the LTM R controller to per
285. ler provides fault monitoring functions When connected to an expansion module the LTM R controller provides additional voltage fault monitoring Protection Category Monitored Fault LTMR controller LTM R controller with expansion module Diagnostic Run command check Stop command check Run check back Stop check back Wiring configuration errors PTC connection CT reversal XIX XxX X OK Xx Voltage phase reversal Current phase reversal x lt Voltage phase loss Phase configuration Internal Stack overflow Watchdog ROM checksum EEROM CPU Internal temperature Motor temp sensor PTC binary PTC analog NTC analog Thermal overload Definite Inverse thermal Current Long start Jam Current phase imbalance Current phase loss Overcurrent Undercurrent Internal ground current X XK X X X X OK X X X X X X X X X Xx x Xx External ground current X XI XI XK X X X X XK X X OK X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Xx X Xx X the functionality is available with the units indicated the functionality is not available with the units indicated 1639501 12 2006 27 Introduction loss Protection Monitored Fault LTM R LTM R controller with Category controller expa
286. ller mounting feet may extend beyond the controller dimensions see p 272 by 8 mm 0 3 in in both directions To mount the controller and the expansion module on a mounting plate Step Action 1 Locate the 4 mounting holes at each corner of the controller and the 2 mounting holes on the expansion module Position the controller and expansion module on the mounting plate making sure to leave enough space for the clearance zone See p 272 Insert each of the 6 tapping screws Use a screwdriver to tighten each screw and secure the controller and the expansion module in place Torque to 1 Nem 8 8 Ib in 6 x M4 x 20 8 x 32 1639501 12 2006 277 Installation Mounting ona You can mount the controller and the expansion module on a TE plate such as TE Plate Telequick using 6 mounting clips AF1 EA4 When mounted the controller mounting feet may extend beyond the controller dimensions see p 272 by 8 mm 0 3 in in both directions To mount the controller on Telequick Step Action 1 Attach the 6 mounting clips to Telequick as shown in the diagram below The rounded edge should face upwards for the top clips and downwards for the bottom clips Position the controller and expansion module on the clips so that the holes in the clips and the holes in the controller and expansion module align Insert the screws in the holes and turn them slightly
287. ller parameters are set to their factory default settings e PC running PowerSuite software is connected to the LTM R controller using a VW3A8106 PowerSuite cable 1639501 12 2006 53 Application Example LTM R Controller Wiring Wiring Diagram The following schematic depicts both the main power circuit and the 3 wire impulse control circuit KM1 Warning Fault Q 1 contactor 2 ground fault current transformer 3 PTC binary thermistor The wiring diagram above implements the control strategy inherent in the independent 3 wire predefined operating mode e Logic input I 1 activates a start command and latches logic output O 1 e Logic input 1 4 is the Stop command A fault response e trips logic output 0 4 and e interrupts logic input 1 4 thereby disabling the latch and e opens logic output I 1 This wiring diagram is intended for use with the example application For additional IEC format wiring diagrams see p 511 For NEMA format wiring diagrams see p 531 54 1639501 12 2006 Application Example Configuring Parameters Overview Required Parameters After the wiring connections are made the next step is to configure parameters There are two steps to successful parameter configuration 1 Enter the operating and protection parameter settings using PowerSuite software running in your PC 2 Trans
288. llowing types of information e real time voltage current power temperature I O and fault data e acount of the number of faults by fault type that occurred since last power up e atime stamped history of the state of the LTM R controller displaying measures of voltage current power and temperature at the moment that each of the previous 5 faults occurred Use either PowerSuite software or a Magelis XBTN410 HMI to access and review these statistics Analyze this information to determine whether the actual record of operations indicates a problem Configuration In the event of irrecoverable LTM R controller failure you can quickly restore Settings configuration settings if you saved these settings to a file When the LTM R controller is first configured and every subsequent time any configuration settings are changed use PowerSuite software to save the parameter settings to a file Using PowerSuite software e To save a configuration file 1 Select File Print To File e To restore the saved configuration file 1 Open the saved file Select File Open then navigate to and open the file 2 Download the configuration to the new controller Select Link Transfer Device to PC 502 1639501 12 2006 Maintenance Environment Self Test Like any other electronic device the LTM R controller is affected by its physical environment Provide a friendly environment by taking common sense preven
289. load this technical publication and other technical information from our website at http www telemecanique com Visit http www schneider electric com for your nearest Schneider Electric affiliate 2006 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 12 2006
290. lt enable Enable Disable Enable Network port comm loss timeout 0 9999 s 60s Network port warning enable Enable Disable Enable 1639501 12 2006 49 Introduction HMI Port HMI port configurable parameters for the LTM R controller and the expansion Parameter module Settings Parameter Setting Range Factory Default HMI port address setting 0 247 1 HMI port baud rate setting e 19200 19200 e 9600 e 4800 e 1200 HMI port parity setting e Even Even e None Config via HMI engineering tool enable e Enable Enable e Disable Config via HMI keypad enable e Enable Enable e Disable Network port fallback setting used as HMI e Hold LO1 LO2 off port fallback setting e Run e LO1 LO2 off e LO1 LO2 on e LO1 off e LO2 off HMI port fault enable Enable Disable Enable HMI port fault time 7 s fixed 7S HMI port warning enable Enable Disable Enable Protection For a list of configurable protection parameters for the LTM R controller and Parameter expansion module see p 179 Settings 50 1639501 12 2006 Application Example At a Glance Overview What s in this Chapter This chapter contains an example of how to configure the LTM R controller to start and protect a pump This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Purpose 52 LTM R Controller Wiring 54 Configuring Paramet
291. may not retransmit the request Modbus 2 types of dialogue are possible between master and slaves Dialogue e The master sends a request to a slave and waits for its response e The master broadcasts a request to all slaves without waiting for a response Direct slave to slave communications are not possible For slave to slave communication the master must therefore interrogate a slave and send back data received to the other slave 446 1639501 12 2006 Use Configuration of the LTM R Modbus Network Port Communication Parameters Network Port Address Setting Network Port Baud Rate Setting Network Port Parity Setting Network Port Comm Loss Timeout Before any communication can start use PowerSuite or the HMI to configure the Modbus communication parameters Network port address setting Network port baud rate setting Network port parity setting Network port comm loss timeout The device address can be set between 1 and 247 Default value is 65 535 which corresponds to an undefined value Possible transmission rates are 1 200 bps 2 400 bps 4 800 bps 9 600 bps 19 200 bps Autobaud Default value is Autobaud In Autobaud the controller is able to adapt its baud rate to the one of the master 19 200 bps is the first baud rate to be tested The parity can be selected from e Even e Odd e None e Autodetection Default value is Autodetection In Autodetection the contr
292. ments faults and Operation warnings acknowledgement Configuration at start up See Commissioning Compulsory circuit Control mmmmjjn Optional circuit According to Motor Mode Register 704 Bit 704 0 Run forward Bit 704 1 Run reverse Monitoring Warnings Register 460 Warning code or Monitoring System status Register 461 462 Warning type Register 455 Ifan error has been detected get more information with Bit 455 2 Fault detection Bit 455 3 Warning detection Monitoring Faults Bit 455 8 455 13 Motor current Register 451 Fault code or Register 452 453 Fault type Check if the current value is correct To be used if needed to unlock the system Monitoring Measurement Control Acknowledgment Register 466 Average motor current Bit 704 3 Fault acknowledgment 450 1639501 12 2006 Use Modbus Request and Programming Examples Modbus Request controller and specifies their limits The following table indicates which Modbus functions are managed by the LTM R Code value Function name Broadcasting Modbus standard name Hexadecimal Decimal 0x03 3 Read N output words multiple registers No Read Holding Register 0x06 6 Write 1 output word single register Yes Preset Single Register 0x10 16 Write N output wo
293. meter The definite time thermal overload function has the following configurable parameter settings Settings Parameters Setting range Factory setting Fault threshold 5 100 of FLCmax in 1 5 FLCmax e Motor full load current ratio OC1 increments or Note OC1 and OC2 settings can e Motor high speed full load current be set directly in Amperes in the ratio OC2 Settings menu of an HMI or in the Settings branch of PowerSuite software Thermal overload fault definite timeout 1 300 s in 1 s increments 10s O Time or over current time Thermal overload warning threshold 20 800 of FLC1 in 1s 80 of FLC1 increments Long start fault timeout 1 200 s in 1 s increments 10s 1 The definite time thermal overload function requires the contemporaneous use of the Long start motor protection function both of which employ the Long start fault timeout setting Function The definite time thermal overload function has the following characteristics Characteristics Characteristics Value Hysteresis 95 of warning and fault thresholds Trip time accuracy 0 1 s Example The following diagram describes a definite time thermal overload fault Start state Run state Fault condition gt lt gt lt gt OGpi f timeout D time Long start fault timeout OC Fault threshold OC1 or OC2 140 1639501 12 2006 Mo
294. munication with any approved HMI device Using a fixed network idle time timeout the LTM R controller watchdog function can report a network loss In the event of a communication loss the LTM R controller can be configured to take certain actions These depend on the control mode that the LTM R controller was operating in prior to the communication loss If HMl controller communication is lost while the LTM R controller is in Local RJ45 control mode the LTM R controller enters the fallback state If HMI LTM R controller communication is lost while the LTM R controller is not in Local RJ45 control mode and then the control mode is changed to Local RJ45 control the LTM R controller enters the fallback state If HMI controller communication is restored while the control mode is set to Local RJ45 control the IMPR exits from the fallback state If the control mode is changed to Local Terminal Strip or Network control the IMPR exits from the fallback state regardless of the state of HMI controller communications The table below defines the available actions that the LTM R controller may take during a communication loss Select one of these actions when configuring the LTM R controller 1639501 12 2006 507 Maintenance Local RJ45 Communication Loss Actions LTM R controller output control mode prior to network loss Available LTM R controller actions after HMI LTM R controller network loss Local Terminal Strip F
295. n Calculated measurement Formula Ground current ratio 100 x ground current FLCmin 72 1639501 12 2006 Metering and Monitoring Functions Ground Current The ground current ratio function has the following characteristics Ratio er Characteristic Value Characteristics Unit 0 2000 of FLCmin Accuracy See ground current characteristics above Resolution 0 1 FLCmin Refresh interval 100 ms 1639501 12 2006 73 Metering and Monitoring Functions Average Current Description Average Current Average Current Formulas Average Current Characteristics Average Current Ratio Average Current Ratio Formulas The LTM R controller calculates average current and provides the value for phase in amperes and as a percentage of FLC The average current function returns the rms value of the average current The LTM R controller calculates the average current using the measured line currents The measured values are internally summed using the following formula Calculated measurement Formula Average current three phase motor lavg L1 L2 L3 3 Average current single phase motor lavg L1 L3 2 The average current function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Unit A Accuracy e 1 for 8 A and 27 A units e 2 for 100 A units Resolution 0 01A Refresh interval 100 ms
296. n Over Current External Thermal Sensor Fault Ground Current amp Long Start Alarm Current Phase Loss Jam Reset Authorized Current Phase Reversal Local Comm Loss Tripped Current Imbalance MOP Internal Fault Motor Running Voltage Imbalance Cassette Id Fault In Local control Voltage Phase Loss Diagnostic motor Ramping Voltage Phase Reversal Diagnostic connection Fault Auto Reset Under Voltage Shunt Trip Fault Needs Power Cycle Over Voltage Test Trip Time to restart unknown a Under Power Fault Auto Reset Over Power Fault Needs Power Cycle Under Power Factor Time to restart unknown Over Power Factor PowerSuite E Connected 1639501 12 2006 443 Use Control Commands Overview Self Test Clear PowerSuite software provides the following control commands e Self Test e Clear Protection Settings Network Port Settings Statistics Thermal Capacity Level These commands take effect immediately upon execution They are available only when the configuration software is communicating with the LTM R controller Use the self test command to check the internal workings of both the LTM R controller and the expansion module The self test command is located in the Services menu under Services Maintenance gt Self Test For more information on the self test function see p 503 Use the clear commands for the purposes described below Command Descrip
297. n interposing relay is required TeSys F catalog Control VA or W Coil voltages references Circuit maintained max interposing relay not interposing relay required Frequency required Hz LC1F115 50 45 AC 24 42 48 110 115 AC 380 400 415 440 127 220 230 240 500 660 1000 60 45 AC 24 42 48 110 115 127 220 230 240 265 277 380 415 460 480 660 1000 5 DC 24 48 110 125 220 230 250 440 460 LC1F150 50 45 AC 24 42 48 110 115 AC 380 400 415 440 127 220 230 240 500 660 1000 60 45 AC 24 42 48 110 115 127 220 230 240 265 277 380 415 460 480 660 1000 5 DC 24 48 110 125 220 230 250 440 460 LC1F185 50 55 AC 24 42 48 110 115 AC 380 400 415 440 127 220 230 240 500 660 1000 60 55 AC 24 42 48 110 115 127 220 230 240 265 277 380 415 460 480 660 1000 5 DC 24 48 110 125 220 230 250 440 460 LC1F225 50 55 AC 24 42 48 110 115 AC 380 400 415 440 127 220 230 240 500 660 1000 60 55 AC 24 42 48 110 115 AC 265 277 380 415 127 220 230 240 460 480 660 1000 5 DC 24 48 110 125 220 230 250 440 460 1639501 12 2006 301 Installation TeSys F catalog Control VA or W Coil voltages references Circuit maintained max interposing relay not interposing relay required Fr
298. n the Start Copying Files screen review your selections then click e Back to return to earlier screens and make changes e Next to proceed to the final screen 11 In the Finish screen click Finish The Magelis XBT L1000 programming software is installed 1639501 12 2006 345 Use Download 1 to 1 and 1 to many Software Application Files Overview You must download the software application file required by your installation of the Magelis XBTN410 HMI from the www telemecanique com website From the Telemecanique website you can freely obtain the following software application files File name Description LTM_1T1_ language _ version dop 1 to 1 application file LTM_1T8_ language _ version dop 1 to many application file The HMI can save and use only one software application file at a time If you change your design from 1 to 1 to 1 to many or vice versa you will need to transfer the appropriate software application file to the HMI to support the new configuration For instructions on installing the Magelis XBT L1000 programming software see p 344 For instructions on transferring application files from the Magelis XBT L1000 programming software in your PC to the Magelis XBTN410 HMI see p 347 346 1639501 12 2006 Use Transferring Application Software Files to Magelis XBTN410 HMI Overview After you have installed the Magelis XBT L1000 programmi
299. n the motor Characteristics The motor starts per hour function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Accuracy 5 minutes 0 5 minutes Resolution 5 minutes Refresh interval 100 ms 1639501 12 2006 109 Metering and Monitoring Functions Load Sheddings Counter Description The Load Sheddings Count parameter contains the number of times the load sheddings protection function has been activated since the last Clear Statistics Command For information on the Load Sheddings protection function see p 191 Last Start Max Current Description The LTM R controller measures the maximum current level reached during the last start of the motor and reports the value in the Motor Last Start Current Ratio parameter for analysis of the system for maintenance purposes Characteristics The last start max current function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Unit of FLC Accuracy e 1 for 8 A and 27 A units e 2 for 100 A units Resolution 1 FLC Refresh interval 100 ms Last Start Time Description The LTM R controller tracks the duration of the last motor start and reports the value in the Motor Last Start Duration parameter for analysis of the system for maintenance purposes Characteristics The motor last start duration function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Unit s Accur
300. n value setting includes a 0 or a 1 next to the at the right end of the text line The following example shows you how to select then edit a Boolean value i navigate Settings Addr 1 edit Motor save Local Control Motor 2 Local Control HMI Transfer Mode Motor P Local Control Term Strip Transfer Mode The Settings page opens with focus at the top line Click the DOWN button to scroll down to the Local Control setting HMI The Boolean value 0 and command line arrow blink indicating focus 3 Click the RIGHT arrow to toggle the Local Control setting to Term Strip and the Boolean value to 1 N Note An edited Boolean value is saved when its value changes 400 1639501 12 2006 Use Numeric settings Numeric value settings are incremented or decremented and can be edited in 2 ways e by selecting the entire setting and then incrementing or decrementing its value e by selecting individual characters within the setting and then incrementing or decrementing the value of each digit Use the O button to select the value to be edited as follows Lock Outs Addr 1 RpdCycl Time 0002Sec Starts PerHr 002 Lock Outs Addr 1 RpdCycl Time Starts PerHr 002 Lock Outs Addr 1 RpdCycl Time 0002Sec Starts PerHr 002 1 The Lock Outs page opens with no setting selected for editing 2 Click the MOD button once to
301. nal optional parameters In the Magelis XBTN410 HMI optional parameters are found in the Main menu In PowerSuite software they are found in the Settings branch of the tree control along will the required parameters 322 1639501 12 2006 Commissioning General Parameters Required parameters include the following general settings Parameter name Setting range Factory default Sys Confg Main Language e English e Fran ais e Espa ol e Deutsch e Italiano English X Date And Time Setting Year e 2006 2099 2006 Month January February March April May June July August September October November December January Day e 1 31 Hour e 00 23 00 Minute e 00 59 00 Second e 00 59 00 X X The parameter is located in the indicated menu in the Magelis XBTN410 HMI 1 to 1 The parameter is not located in the indicated menu in the Magelis XBTN410 HMI 1 to 1 1639501 12 2006 323 Commissioning Motor Required parameters include the following motor settings Parameters Parameter name Setting range Factory default Sys Config Main Motor Nominal Voltage 110 690 V 400 V X X Motor Phases 3 phase motor 3 phase motor X e i phase motor Motor Phases Sequence e A B C A B C X X e A C B Motor Operating Mode e Overload 2 wire Independent 0 3 wire X e
302. nalog Temperature sensing element resistance 0s1 Motor temperature sensor warning threshold 0s2 Motor temperature sensor fault threshold 172 1639501 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Parameter Settings Function Characteristics Example The NTC analog motor temperature sensor function has the following configurable parameter settings Parameters Setting range Factory setting Fault threshold 20 6500 Q in 0 1 Q increments 200 Q Warning threshold 20 6500 Q in 0 1 Q increments 200 Q The NTC analog motor temperature sensor function has the following characteristics Characteristics Value Hysteresis 105 of Warning threshold and Fault thresholds Tripping time 0 5 0 6 s Trip time accuracy 0 1s The following diagram describes a Motor temperature sensor NTC analog fault with automatic reset 9 A Run state Fault condition Run state resume gt lt gt lt gt 0s3 Os2 ai 6r2 Fault threshold 6r3 Fault re closing threshold 105 of fault threshold Reset 1639501 12 2006 173 Motor Protection Functions Rapid Cycle Lockout Description Functional Characteristics The rapid cycle lockout function prevents potential harm to the motor caused by repetitive successive inrush currents resulting from too little time between starts The rapid cycle lockout function provides
303. nalog Description Functional Characteristics Block Diagram The NTC Analog motor temperature sensing function is enabled when the Motor Temp Sensor Type parameter is set to NTC Analog and the LTM R controller is connected to an analog NTC thermistor embedded in the motor The LTM R controller monitors the state of the temperature sensing element and signals e amotor temperature sensor warning when the measured resistance falls below a configurable warning threshold e amotor temperature sensor fault when the measured resistance falls below a separately set fault threshold The fault or warning condition continues until the measured resistance exceeds 105 of the fault or warning threshold There is no time delay to the motor temperature sensor fault or warning Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled The function is available for all operating states It applies to both single phase and 3 phase motors The NTC Analog motor temperature sensor function includes the following features e 2 configurable thresholds e Warning Threshold e Fault Threshold e 2 function outputs e Motor Temp Sensor Warning e Motor Temp Sensor Fault e 1 counting statistic e Motor Temp Sensor Faults Count Motor temperature sensor warning qa 0 lt 0s1 L Motor temperature sensor warning NTC Analog Motor temperature sensor fault o 0 lt 0s2 L Motor temperature sensor fault NTC A
304. national safety codes and standards Failure to follow this instruction can result in death serious injury or equipment damage What s in this This section contains the following topics Section Topic Page Control Modes 210 Operating States 214 Start Cycle 218 1639501 12 2006 209 Motor Control Functions Control Modes Overview The control mode determines which control sources command the LTM R controller outputs Control modes include Control Mode LTM R controller outputs are commanded by Local terminal strip Input devices wired to the input terminals on the front face of the LTM R controller Local HMI An HMI device connected to the LTM R controllers Local HMI port Network A network PLC connected to the controller network port Control Mode Control mode is determined by the combination of the Selection e state of logic input 6 and e Control Local Channel Setting parameter When logic input I 6 is And Control Local Channel Setting is Control Mode is inactive Local terminal strip Local terminal strip Local HMI Local HMI active Not applicable Network Note Regardless of the selected control mode the LTM R controller will respond to Stop commands from any local control source When logic input 1 6 is inactive the default control mode is Local Terminal Strip For a predefined operating mode only one control
305. nction STOP Stops the motor RESET Resets the LTM R controller after a fault 1639501 12 2006 389 Use Aux1 Aux2 The functions of the Aux1 and Aux2 buttons typically are configured as follows Operating mode Aux1 function Aux2 function 2 Speed Run Slow 0 1 Run Fast 0 2 2 Step Run motor 0 1 Set bits in memory Independent Control O 1 Control 0 2 Overload Set bits in memory Set bits in memory Reverser Run Forward 0 1 Run Reverse 0 2 Note The above key function assignments represent a typical configuration However the actual functionality of any function key depends on wiring choices The behavior of the Aux1 and Aux2 keypad buttons varies according to the operating mode and wiring configuration as follows Key Can be used to Aux1 e control the closing of the NO O 1 contacts 13 14 to energize the operating of a coil or motor e seta bit in LTM R controller memory but control no logic output Aux2 e control the closing of the NO O 2 contacts 23 24 to energize either e another operating coil on the same motor e an operating coil on another motor e seta bit in LTM R controller memory but control no logic output 390 1639501 12 2006 Use 8 5 Using the Magelis XBTN410 HMI 1 to many At a Glance Summary This section describes how to use the Magelis XBTN410 HMI to operate up to 8 LTM R controlle
306. nction has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Unit Q Normal operating range 15 6500 Q Accuracy at 15 Q 10 at 6500 Q 5 Resolution 0 10 Refresh interval 100 ms The fixed threshold settings for the open circuit and short circuit detection functions are Parameters Setting for PTC Binary or PTC NTC Analog Accuracy Short circuit fault threshold 15Q 10 Short circuit fault re closing 20 Q 10 Open circuit fault threshold 6500 Q 5 Open circuit fault re closing 6000 Q 5 1639501 12 2006 103 Metering and Monitoring Functions Voltage Current Both the voltage and current phase reversal function signals a fault when it detects Phase Reversal that either the voltage or the current phases of a 3 phase motor are out of sequence Error indicating a wiring error Use the Motor Phases Sequence parameter to set the phase sequence ABC or ACB and clear the error Note When the LTM R controller is connected to an expansion module phase reversal protection is based on voltage before the motor starts and on current after the motor starts This protection e is active for voltage when e the LTM R controller is connected to an expansion module and e the LTM R controller is in ready state e is active for current when the motor is in start state run state or fault state e applies only to 3 phase motors e has no
307. nd Current Warning Threshold ExtWarnLvl External Ground Current Warning Threshold 1639501 12 2006 415 Use Voltage Settings From the settings page you can navigate to and edit the following voltage settings Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Parameter name Settings Addr 1 8 Voltage Volt Ph Imbal Loss VOLT PH IMBALANCE Fault Voltage Phase Imbalance Fault Enable Fault Level Voltage Phase Imbalance Fault Threshold FitTimeStart Voltage Phase Imbalance Fault Timeout Starting FitTimeRun Voltage Phase Imbalance Fault Timeout Running Warn Voltage Phase Imbalance Warning Enable Warn Level Voltage Phase Imbalance Warning Threshold VOLT PH LOSS Fault Voltage Phase Loss Fault Enable Fault Time Voltage Phase Loss Fault Timeout Warn Voltage Phase Loss Warning Enable Volt Ph Reversal Fault Voltage Phase Reversal Fault Enable Voltage Over Under Voltage OVER VOLTAGE continued Fault Overvoltage Fault Enable Fault Level Overvoltage Fault Threshold Fault Time Overvoltage Fault Timeout Warn Overvoltage Warning Enable Warn Level Overvoltage Warning Threshold UNDER VOLTAGE Fault Undervoltage Fault Enable Fault Level Undervoltage Fault Threshold Fault Time Undervoltage Fault Timeout Warn Undervoltage Warning Enable Warn Level Undervoltage Warning Threshold 416 1639501 12 2006 Use Power Settings From the
308. nd KM3 are not mandatory because the controller electronically interlocks O 1 and O 2 1639501 12 2006 521 IEC Format Wiring Diagrams Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Local Control Application Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Local Control with Network Control Selectable Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Local Control with Network Control Selectable The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained local control wiring diagram Start Stop The following application diagram features 3 wire impulse local control with network control selectable wiring diagram L Local control O Off N Network control LON Stop Ee Oi zorz 12 13 96 The following application diagram features 2 wire maintained local control with network control selectable wiring diagram L Local control T O Off LON N Network control a 522 1639501 12 2006 IEC Format Wiring Diagrams Two Step Primary Resistor Mode Wiring Diagrams Application The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse local control wiring Diagram with diagram 3 Wire Impulse Local Control 3a Start Stop 1639501 12 2006 523 IEC Format Wiring Diagrams Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Local Control Applica
309. nd input signal Ready 2 The LTM R controller confirms that all startup preconditions Ready exist e g no faults load shedding or rapid cycle timer 3 The LTM R controller closes the appropriate output contacts Ready designated as terminals 13 14 or 23 24 thereby closing the control circuit of the motor starting contactors 4 The LTM R controller detects that maximum phase current Start exceeds the On Level Current threshold 5 The LTM R controller detects that current rises above and Run then falls below the Long Start Fault Threshold before the Long Start Fault Timeout timer expires 218 1639501 12 2006 Motor Control Functions 2 Threshold In this start cycle scenario the start cycle executes successfully Crosses e Current rises above then drops below the fault threshold e TheLTM R controller reports the actual start cycle time i e the time elapsed from detection of On Level Current until the maximum phase current drops below the fault threshold Start cycle with 2 threshold crosses single step l A 1St dy ee ee aa ae eens Se Neh ere E om ihe Bi Start time 10 FLC gt i Long start fault timeout i gt t gt a gt a gt Ready state Start state i Run state Is Long start fault threshold Start cycle with 2 threshold crosses 2 step Adjustable transition timer i A First step p4 Secon
310. nd standards Failure to follow this instruction can result in death serious injury or equipment damage 1639501 12 2006 269 Installation What s in this Chapter This chapter contains the following sections Section Topic Page 6 1 LTM R Controller and LTM E Expansion Module Installation 271 6 2 Wiring of the Modbus Communication Network 304 270 1639501 12 2006 Installation 6 1 LTM R Controller and LTM E Expansion Module Installation Installation Overview Installation This section describes the installation procedures and wiring principles of the LTM R controller and the LTM E expansion module What s in this This section contains the following topics Section Topic Page LTM R Controller and Expansion Module Dimensions 272 Mounting the LTM R Controller and the Expansion Module 275 Assembling the LTM R Controller and the Expansion Module 280 Connecting to an HMI Device 283 Wiring General Principles 287 Wiring Current Transformers CTs 291 Wiring Ground Fault Current Transformers 296 Wiring Temperature Sensors 298 Recommended Contactors 299 1639501 12 2006 271 Installation LTM R Controller and Expansion Module Dimensions Overview This section presents the dimensions of the LTM R controller and the LTM E expansion module as well as the dimensions of the clearance zone around the
311. nes as depicted below line 1 line 2 e the top line line 1 displays the parent or higher level menu sub menu or parameter e the bottom line line 2 displays a related child or lower level sub menu parameter or setting See p 357 for information about navigating the menu structure in configuration mode See p 358 for information about editing values In presentation mode the LCD display contains 4 sections as depicted below line A line B1 line B2 line C line A 5 characters maximum line B1 3 characters maximum plus up to 2 icons indicating the control source line B2 3 characters maximum line C 15 characters maximum contains 2 pieces of information 1 left justified 1 right justified In presentation mode there are 2 HMI displays e HMI display e fault and warning display All presentation mode displays are read only 352 1639501 12 2006 Use Control Source Icons When the HMI is in presentation mode it displays the current control source in 1 or 2 icons located in the upper right corner of the LCD
312. nfigured IMPR The connected IMPR is not configured or this is the first time the device has been in use You should download the configuration to the device before using with the Motor This message indicates that the LTM R controller is in its initialized state You must download a configuration file containing all the settings before the LTM R controller can be used in operations For information on how to transfer a configuration file from your PC to the LTM R controller see p 432 1639501 12 2006 321 Commissioning Required Parameters Introduction The parameters listed below must be configured before the LTM R controller can be commissioned into service The LTM R controller remains locked in its initialized state until all of these required parameters are configured In the Magelis XBTN410 HMI the required parameters are located in either or both the e Sys Config menu or e Main menu For more information about the Sys Config menu see p 327 For information on the Main menu see p 363 For information on navigating the Magelis XBTN410 HMI menu structure see p 357 In PowerSuite software all required parameters are located in the Settings branch of the tree control For information about the PowerSuite software interface see p 434 For information about editing parameters using PowerSuite software see p 436 In addition to the required parameters you may also need to configure additio
313. ng 499 measurement functions characteristics 63 metering and monitoring functions 59 metering functions customized 62 HMI tools 62 minimum wait time 476 motor 1 phase 485 3 phase 485 auxiliary fan cooled 46 49 119 130 135 328 365 366 485 average current ratio 477 custom operating mode 252 full load current ratio 94 120 135 140 247 366 414 490 full load power 195 198 high speed full load current ratio 120 135 140 247 366 414 490 last start current 481 last start current ratio 110 371 last start duration 110 371 482 LO1 starts count 109 371 LO2 starts count 109 371 nominal power 48 365 413 484 nominal voltage 48 185 188 328 365 484 operating mode 48 328 362 483 phases 48 102 328 phases sequence 49 122 184 328 365 485 predefined operating mode 225 restart time undefined 478 running 114 477 speed 478 starting 477 starts count 109 371 starts per hour count 109 482 step 1 to 2 threshold 48 241 328 365 step 1 to 2 timeout 48 241 328 365 temp sensor type 49 temperature sensor 79 411 temperature sensor fault threshold 483 temperature sensor type 483 temperature sensor warning threshold 483 transition lockout 478 transition timeout 48 240 241 247 328 365 483 trip class 120 135 366 486 motor control functions 207 motor full load current max n 0 373 420 n 1 374 421 n 2 375 n 3 376 n 4 377 motor full load current ratio
314. ng 549 532 1639501 12 2006 NEMA Format Wiring Diagrams Overload Mode Wiring Diagrams Application The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse local control wiring Diagram with diagram 3 Wire Impulse Local Control 3a l L1 L2 L3 1639501 12 2006 533 NEMA Format Wiring Diagrams Application The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained local control wiring Diagram with diagram 2 Wire Maintained Local Control gee Pos L1 L2 L3 M M M 534 1639501 12 2006 NEMA Format Wiring Diagrams Application The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse local control with Diagram with network control selectable wiring diagram 3 Wire Impulse Local Control with Network Control Selectable 3a ri L1 L2 L3 H Hand Local Control SEE O Off A T A Automatic Network Control a3 T Stop Start HOA Qo o Am CT ooi aE ga A2 1639501 12 2006 535 NEMA Format Wiring Diagrams Application The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained local control with Diagram with network control selectable wiring diagram 2 Wire Maintained Local Control with Network Control Selectable 3a 4 L1 L2 L3
315. ng function has the following parameters Settings Parameters Setting range Factory setting Load shedding enable Enable Disable Enable Load shedding timeout 1 9999 s in increments of 0 1 s 10s Load shedding threshold 68 115 of Motor nominal voltage 70 Load shedding restart timeout 1 9999 s in increments of 0 1 minutes 10 s Load shedding restart threshold 68 115 of Motor nominal voltage 90 Function The voltage load shedding function has the following characteristics Characteristics Characteristics Value Trip time accuracy 0 1 s or 5 192 1639501 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Timing The following diagram is an example of the timing sequence for the voltage load Sequence shedding function for a 2 wire configuration with automatic restart Vavg Load shedding restart threshold Load shedding threshold Load shedding timeout Load shedding restart timeout Load shedding bit Motor On 1 Motor running 2 Load shed motor stopped 3 Load shed cleared motor auto restart 2 wire operation 1639501 12 2006 193 Motor Protection Functions 4 4 Power Motor Protection Functions At a Glance Summary This section describes the power motor protection functions provided by the LTM R controller What s in this This section contains the following topics Section Topic Page Underpower
316. ng mode type which determines the relationship between logic inputs and logic outputs and e control circuit type which determines logic input behavior based on the control wiring design Operating Mode There are 5 types of operating modes Types Operating mode type Best used for Overload All motor starter applications in which the user defines assignment of logic inputs 1 1 1 2 1 3 and 1 4 logic outputs O 1 and O 2 Aux1 Aux2 and Stop commands from the HMI The I O can be defined using a control program managed by the master network controller in remote control by an HMI tool or by using custom logic Independent Direct on line across the line full voltage non reversing motor starting applications Reverser Direct on line across the line full voltage reversing motor starting applications Two Step Reduced voltage starting motor applications including e Wye Delta e Open Transition Primary Resistor Open Transition Autotransformer Two Speed Two speed motor applications for motor types including e Dahlander consequent pole e Pole Changer 1639501 12 2006 225 Motor Control Functions Logic Input When you select an operating mode you also specify that logic inputs are wired for Behavior either 2 wire maintained or 3 wire impulse control Your selection determines the valid start and stop commands from the various control sources
317. ng software on your PC and downloaded the required 1 to 1 or 1 to many application software file you are ready to transfer the application software file to the Magelis XBTN410 HMI The Magelis XBTN410 HMI can save and use only 1 software application at a time If you change your physical configuration from 1 to 1 to 1 to many or vice versa you will need to transfer to the HMI the appropriate software application file to support the new configuration For instructions on installing the Magelis XBT L1000 programming software see p 344 For instructions on downloading software application files see p 346 Transfer Steps To transfer a software application file from Magelis XBT L1000 programming software on your PC to the Magelis XBTN410 HMI Step Action 1 Supply power to the Magelis XBTN410 HMI 2 Connect the PC 9 PIN Com1 port to the 25 pin data port on the HMI using an XBT Z915 programming cable The HMI LCD reads FIRMWARE VX X WAITING FOR TRANSFER Start up the Magelis XBT_L1000 programming software Close all child windows in the programming software In the File menu select Open The Open dialog is displayed OJo AJ In the Open dialog navigate to the 1 to 1 or 1 to many software application file with a dop extension and click Open The programming software displays the selected file In the Transfers menu select Export When notified that the Export command will destroy the e
318. nge are Data entry format DT YYYY MM DD HH mm ss Minimum value DT 2006 01 01 00 00 00 January 1 2006 Maximum value DT 2099 12 31 23 59 59 December 31 2099 Note If you give values outside the limits the system will return an error Example Addresses 655 to 658 Word 4 Date and Time setting 460 1639501 12 2006 Use If date is September 4 2008 at 7 a m 50 minutes and 32 seconds Register 15 12 11 8 7 4 3 0 655 2 0 0 8 656 0 9 0 4 657 0 7 5 0 658 3 2 0 0 With data entry format DT 2008 09 04 07 50 32 DT_ExtOperating DT_ExtOperatingMode format is an enumeration of motor operating modes Mode Value Description 2 2 wire overload 3 3 wire overload 4 2 wire independent 5 3 wire independent 6 2 wire reverser 7 3 wire reverser 8 2 wire 2 step 9 3 wire 2 step 10 2 wire 2 speed 11 3 wire 2 speed 258 Custom 2 wire overload 259 Custom 3 wire overload 260 Custom 2 wire independent 261 Custom 3 wire independent 262 Custom 2 wire reverser 263 Custom 3 wire reverser 264 Custom 2 wire 2 step 265 Custom 3 wire 2 step 266 Custom 2 wire 2 speed 267 Custom 3 wire 2 speed 1639501 12 2006 461 Use DT_FaultCode DT_FaultCode format is an enumeration
319. ning o _ 0 gt 0s1 gt Motor temperature sensor warning PTC Analog Motor temperature sensor fault e 0 gt s2 t Motor temperature sensor fault PTC Analog Temperature sensing element resistance 0s1 Motor temperature sensor warning threshold 0s2 Motor temperature sensor fault threshold Parameter The PTC analog motor temperature sensor function has the following configurable Settings parameter settings Parameters Setting range Factory setting Fault threshold 20 6500 Q in 0 1 Q increments 200 Q Warning threshold 20 6500 Q in 0 1 Q increments 200 Q Function The PTC analog motor temperature sensor function has the following Characteristics characteristics Characteristic Value Hysteresis 95 of Warning threshold and Fault threshold Tripping time 0 5 0 6 s Trip time accuracy 0 1 s 170 1639501 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Example The following diagram describes a Motor temperature sensor PTC analog fault with automatic reset and an active Run command 0 A Run state Fault condition Run state resume gt 4 gt 4 gt QS2 gt fee RS SR Sestak OSS es a sae GAs berets Seka Sle Se See NS Se See Sy igh ei nee Seis 0s2 Fault threshold 0s3 Fault re closing threshold 95 of fault threshold 1639501 12 2006 171 Motor Protection Functions Motor Temperature Sensor NTC A
320. nism as depicted below o o a F FLA full load amperes Same as full load current FLC FLC full load current Also known as rated current The current the motor will draw at the rated voltage and rated load The LTM R controller has two FLC settings FLC1 Motor Full Load Current Ratio and FLC2 Motor High Speed Full Load Current Ratio each set as a percentage of FLC max FLC1 Motor Full Load Current Ratio FLC parameter setting for low or single speed motors Setting range 5 100 of FLC max Default setting 25 of FLC max FLC2 Motor High Speed Full Load Current Ratio FLC parameter setting for high speed motors Setting range 5 100 of FLC max Default setting 25 of FLC max FLCmax Full Load Current Max Peak current parameter Setting ranges from 1 8400 A in increments of 0 1 A FLCmin Minimum Full Load Current The smallest amount of motor current the LTM R controller will support This value is determined by the LTM R controller model as follows LTM R controller model FLCmin LTMR08 0 40 A LTMR27 1 35A LTMR100 5 00 A 1639501 12 2006 553 Glossary hysteresis A value added to lower limit threshold settings or subtracted from upper limit threshold settings that retards the response of the LTM R controller before it stops measuring the duration of faults and warnings inverse thermal A variety of TCC where the initial magnitude of the trip time delay is gen
321. nitor the state of the LTM R controller and e 5LTM R controller LEDs expansion module e 5 expansion module LEDs LTM R controller Test Reset button Manage faults e Programmed operating parameters Control the e Digital inputs e LTM controller e 6 LTM R controller inputs e 4 expansion module inputs expansion module motor power and control wiring any connected sensors including e motor temp sensors e external ground fault CTs e Programmed protection parameters Protect the e LTM R controller expansion module e motor equipment 1639501 12 2006 339 Use Configurations The stand alone physical configurations of the LTM R controller with and without a connected expansion module are depicted below The LTM R controller alone I Oot de GS d d een LTMR100MBD MODBUS pme ogogo ge 3 8 Z 9 O fo Test Reset ae o No P glis 14 23 24 33 34 gizi ze T1 T2 D1 Do s v nc HFOOOOOObFOOO COO OOO The LT
322. nk This section contains the following topics Topic Page Motor Starts 109 Motor Starts Per Hour 109 Load Sheddings Counter 110 Last Start Max Current 110 Last Start Time 110 Motor Operating Time 111 Maximum Internal Controller Temperature 111 108 1639501 12 2006 Metering and Monitoring Functions Motor Starts Description The LTM R controller tracks motor starts and records the data as a statistic that can be retrieved for operational analysis The following statistics are tracked e Motor Starts Count e Motor LO1 Starts Count logic output O 1 starts e Motor LO2 Starts Count logic output O 2 starts The Clear Statistics Command resets the Motor Starts Count parameter to 0 Note The Motor LO1 Starts Count and Motor LO2 Starts Count parameters cannot be reset to 0 because these parameters together indicate the usage of the relay outputs usage over time Motor Starts Per Hour Description The LTM R controller tracks the number of motor starts during the past hour and records this figure in the Motor Starts Per Hour Count parameter The LTM R controller sums starts in 5 minute intervals with an accuracy of 1 interval 0 5 minutes which means that the parameter will contain the total number of starts within either the previous 60 minutes or the previous 55 minutes This function is used as a maintenance function to avoid thermal strain o
323. nother fault when the LCD displays fault messages scroll down through a page decrement by 1 the value of the selected digit or setting scroll up through a page increment by 1 the value of the selected digit or setting ODS select a numeric setting for editing Note after a setting is selected you can increment or decrement either e the entire value or e a selected digit within the setting exits the present level in the HMI menu structure and moves up to the next level exits the selected setting without saving changes saves changes and exits the selected setting OO deletes the value of the selected setting Note after deleting a setting value you can either e use the arrow keys to input a new value then click to save it or e click to restore the deleted value 394 1639501 12 2006 Use 1 to Many LCD In a 1 to many configuration the Magelis XBTN410 HMI presents a flexible LCD that can display up to 4 rows of 20 characters as follows In some cases the LCD displays only 3 text lines because one line containing a fault message or page header is twice the height of normal text Pages The LCD displays pages of text There are two types of pages Page type Contains Displayed Menu structure pa
324. ns 1639501 12 2006 335 Commissioning Verify Configuration Overview The final step in the commissioning process is to verify that all configurable parameters used in your application are properly configured When performing this task you will need a master list of all the parameters you intended to configure and their desired settings You must compare the actual settings of configured parameters against this list Tools Only PowerSuite software can display all configured parameters including both required and optional parameters These are found in the Settings branch of the tree control The Magelis XBTN410 HMI can display all parameters in its Main menu but cannot display all parameters located only in its Sys Config menu Process Verifying parameter settings is a 3 part process 1 Transfer the configuration file from the LTM R controller to the PowerSuite software running in your PC This lets you view the LTM R controller s present parameter settings For information on transferring files from the LTM R controller to your PC see p 431 2 Compare the master list of intended parameters and settings against the same settings located in the Settings branch of PowerSuite software s tree control 3 Change the configuration settings as desired Do this using either e PowerSuite software then download the edited file from your PC to the LTM R controller For information on transferring files f
325. nsing functions Metering and monitoring can be categorized as follows Measurements real time or calculated measurements of current voltage or power provided by analog inputs Statistics protection diagnostic motor control and historical fault and warning counts stored by the LTM R controller for analysis of system performance and maintenance System and device faults faults affecting the LTM R controller s ability to operate properly internal check communications wiring and configuration errors Motor statistics historical data describing motor starts and operating time for analysis of device operation Thermal overload display data displaying estimates of the time until the next thermal overload fault and after a thermal overload fault has occurred the time to reset System operating status including the motor state on ready run fault warning and the time for auto reset of faults 1639501 12 2006 59 Metering and Monitoring Functions What s in this This chapter contains the following sections Chapter Section Topic Page 3 1 Summary of Characteristics 61 3 2 Measurements 68 3 3 Fault and Warning Counters 88 3 4 System and Device Monitoring Faults 95 3 5 Motor History 108 3 6 Thermal Overload Statistics 112 3 7 System Operating Status 113 60 1639501 12 2006 Metering and Monitoring Functions 3 1 Summary of Characteristics Overview Introduc
326. nsion module Voltage Overvoltage X Undervoltage Xx Voltage phase imbalance X Power Underpower X Overpower xX Under power factor X Over power factor X Communication PLC to LTM R Xx Xx X LTM E to LTM R X the functionality is available with the units indicated the functionality is not available with the units indicated 28 1639501 12 2006 Introduction Protection Functions The following table lists the equipment required to support the protection functions of the motor management system Functions LTM R controller LTM R controller with expansion module Thermal overload Current phase imbalance Current phase loss Current phase reversal Long start Jam locked rotor during run Undercurrent Overcurrent Ground current Motor temperature sensor Rapid cycle lockout X X X X KL KL KY KK x lt Voltage phase imbalance Voltage phase loss Voltage phase reversal Undervoltage Overvoltage Load shedding Underpower Overpower Under power factor Over power factor X X KL X X X X OK OK X OK OK OK OK OK X KL X KL KL Xx X the functionality is available with the units indicated the functionality is not available with the units indicated 1639501 12 2006 29 Introduction Control Functions The following
327. nstalled operated serviced and maintained only by qualified personnel No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising out of the use of this material 2007 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 12 1639501 12 2006 About the Book A At a Glance Document Scope Validity Note This manual describes the Modbus network protocol version of the TeSys T LTM R motor management controller and LTM E expansion module The purposes of this manual are twofold e to describe and explain the monitoring protection and control functions of the LTM R controller and expansion module e to give you the information you need to implement and support a solution that best meets your application requirements The manual describes the 4 key parts of a successful system implementation e installing the LTM R controller and expansion module e commissioning the LTM R controller by setting essential parameter values e using the LTM R controller and expansion module both with and without additional human machine interface devices e maintaining the LTM R controller and expansion module This manual is intended for design engineers system integrators system operators maintenance engineers The data and illustrations found in this book are not binding We reserve the right to modify our products in line with our policy of continuous product development The information in this document is subj
328. nt Motor full load current ratio 653 Ulnt Motor high speed full load current ratio 490 1639501 12 2006 Use Register Variable type Read Write variables Note p 455 654 Word HMI display items register 2 bit O HMI display L1 L2 voltage enable bit 1 HMI display L2 L3 voltage enable bit 2 HMI display L3 L1 voltage enable bit 3 HMI display average voltage enable bit 4 HMI display active power enable bit 5 HMI display power consumption enable bit 6 HMI display power factor enable bit 7 HMI display average current ratio enable bit 8 HMI display L1 current ratio enable bit 9 HMI display L2 current ratio enable bit 10 HMI display L3 current ratio enable bit 11 HMI display thermal capacity remaining enable bit 12 HMI display time to trip enable bit 13 HMI display voltage phase imbalance enable bit 14 HMI display date enable bit 15 HMI display time enable 655 658 Word 4 Date and time setting See DT_DateTime p 460 659 681 Reserved 682 Ulnt Network port fallback setting 683 Ulnt Control setting register bits 0 7 Reserved bit 8 Control local channel setting 0 local HMI 1 terminal strip bit 9 Control direct transition bit 10 Bumpless transfer mode 0 bump 1 bumpless bits 11 15 Not significant 684 692 Forbidden
329. nt 85 FLC Statistic y Self Testi Product ID gt Home Statistic Self Testi Product ID gt Home gt 404 1639501 12 2006 Use Menu Structure 1 to many Overview Menu Structure The Magelis XBTN410 HMI 1 to many menu structure is hierarchical in its design and consists of 6 levels of individual pages The upper menu structure levels provide information and commands for the HMI itself and for all LTM R controllers connected to the HMI The lower menu structure levels provide settings statistics and commands for a selected LTM R controller The Magelis XBTN410 HMI 1 to many menu structure presents the following outline Outline of levels and pages Level Pages Description 1 Home page The starting page navigation to all other pages begins here Opens by default on start up when no faults exist 2 Starters currents page e Displays average current as a percent of FLC for every LTM R controller e Provides a link to each LTM R controller s menu structure Starters status page e Displays operating status On Off Fault for every LTM R controller e Provides a link to each LTM R controller s menu structure Fault display pages Displays a series of pages each page describing an active fault Opens automatically when a fault exists Remote reset page Executable commands for the remote reset of each LTM R controller Reset to defaults page Executable commands to re
330. nt Fault e 1 counting statistic e Undercurrent Faults Count Undercurrent warning and fault 11 r 12 p gt 13 lavg Run state p amp we Undercurrent warning m lavg lt Is1 L AND P lavg lt Is2 a T 0 Undercurrent fault Run state p AND lavg Average current Is1 Warning threshold Is2 Fault threshold T Fault timer delay 154 1639501 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Parameter Settings Function Characteristics Example The undercurrent function has the following parameters Parameters Setting range Factory setting Fault enable Enable Disable Disable Fault timeout 1 200 s in 1 s increments 1s Fault threshold 30 100 of FLC in 1 increments 50 of FLC Warning enable Enable Disable Disable Warning threshold 30 100 of FLC in 1 increments 50 of FLC The undercurrent function has the following characteristics Characteristics Value Hysteresis 105 of Fault threshold or Warning threshold Trip time accuracy 0 1 s or 5 The following diagram describes the occurrence of an undercurrent fault i Start state Run state Fault condition q ls2t f a i Undercurrent fault timeout Is2 Undercurrent fault threshold 1639501 12 2006 155 Motor P
331. nt mode For more application diagrams see p 509 290 1639501 12 2006 Installation Wiring Current Transformers CTs Overview The LTM R controller has 3 CT windows through which you can route motor leads to contactor load connections The CT windows enable you to wire the controller in four different ways depending on the voltage and controller model used e Internal CT wiring through the windows e Internal CT wiring using multiple passes e Internal CT wiring using the lug kit ref Class 9999 MLPL e External Load CT wiring This section describes each of these options Internal CT Typical wiring using the CT windows for either three phase or single phase motors Wiring through the Windows L gt gt JE pl _ mea STS SISIS1S I t IF 115 J Fd ed Fei I Si I I i I 1 dHH H il jJODOCCCCOCEG eyerere IDCCCCCCCCOS QO fe che D d
332. ntrol function counts Fault history lt K XK Xx Kx Ki xX KL Xx System and Device Monitoring Faults Internal watchdog faults Controller internal temperature Temperature sensor connections Current connections Xx Xx x Xx Voltage connections Control command diagnostics start check stop check run check back and stop check back xX Xx Xx x x Xx X the functionality is available with the units indicated the functionality is not available with the units indicated 1639501 12 2006 25 Introduction Function LTM R controller LTM R controller with expansion module Control configuration checksum x X Communication loss x lt X Motor Statistics Motor starts O1 starts O2 starts Operating time Motor starts per hour Last start max current Last start time XIX Xx X Xx XIX X X Xx Thermal Overload Time to trip x lt x lt Time to reset x lt x lt System Operating Statistics Motor running On Ready Fault Warning Minimum wait time XIXI X X X Xx XxX X X X OK Xx X the functionality is available with the units indicated the functionality is not available with the units indicated 26 1639501 12 2006 Introduction Fault and Warning Monitoring The LTM R control
333. nts a Trip Curve Characteristic The LTM R controller stores the selected setting in its Thermal Overload Mode parameter Only one setting can be activated at a time See the topics that immediately follow for information on the operation and configuration of each setting This function applies to both single phase and 3 phase motors The Thermal Overload function has the following configurable parameter settings which apply to every trip current characteristic Parameters Setting range Factory setting Mode e Inverse thermal Inverse thermal e Definite time Fault enable Enable Disable Enable Warning enable Enable Disable Enable Motor auxiliary fan cooled Enable Disable Disable 130 1639501 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Thermal Overload Inverse Thermal Description When you set the Thermal Overload Mode parameter to Inverse Thermal and select a motor trip class the LTM R controller monitors the motor s utilized thermal capacity and signals e a warning when utilized thermal capacity exceeds a configured warning threshold e a fault when utilized thermal capacity continuously exceeds a calculated fault threshold based on the Motor Trip Class setting A CAUTION RISK OF MOTOR OVERHEATING The Motor Trip Class parameter must be set to the thermal heating characteristics of the motor Refer to the motor manufacturer s instructions before setting this parameter
334. o the LTM R controller through the network communication port The following conditions apply to Network control mode e Any network start and stop commands control the outputs according to the motor operating mode e The HMI unit can read but not write the LTM R controller parameters e Allinputs when active place bits into the Logic Input number 1 to 6 parameter for monitoring by the PLC 1639501 12 2006 211 Motor Control Functions Bump and Set the Bumpless Transfer Mode parameter to enable bumpless transfer when Bumpless changing the control mode clear this parameter to enable bump transfer The Control configuration setting for this parameter determines the behavior of logic outputs O 1 Transfers and O 2 as follows Bumpless Transfer Mode setting LTM R controller behavior when changing control mode Bump Logic outputs O 1 and O 2 open if closed or remain open if already open until the next valid signal occurs The motor stops Note In overload predefined operating mode logic outputs O 1 and O 2 are user defined The control and power circuit combine to determine if bumping the outputs OFF will not stop the motor Bumpless Logic outputs O 1 and O 2 are not affected and remain in their original position until the next valid signal occurs If one or more outputs were active and controlling a motor prior to the transfer then the motor will not stop as a consequence of the transfer
335. odule are e is the replacement device the same model as the original e have the configuration settings of the LTM R controller been saved and are they available to be transferred to its replacement Be sure the motor is turned off before replacing either the LTM R controller or the LTM E expansion module Replacing the The time to plan for the replacement of an LTM R controller is LTM R Controller when the LTM R controller settings are initially configured and e any time that one or more of its settings are subsequently re configured Because setting values may not be accessible when the LTM R controller is replaced for example in case of device failure you should create a record of setting values whenever they are made Using PowerSuite software all of the LTM R controller s configured settings except for date and time can be saved to a file Once saved you can use PowerSuite software to transfer these settings either to the original LTM R controller or to its replacement Note Only configured settings are saved Historical statistical data is not saved and therefore cannot be applied to a replacement LTM R controller For information on how to use PowerSuite software to create save and transfer configuration setting files see p 430 Replacing the The primary consideration in replacing an LTM E expansion module is to replace it Expansion with the same model 24Vdc or 110 240Vac as the or
336. of fault codes Fault code Description 0 No error 3 Ground current 4 Thermal overload 5 Long start 6 Jam 7 Current phase imbalance 8 Undercurrent 10 Test 11 HMI port error 12 HMI port communication loss 13 Network port internal error 18 Diagnostic 19 Wiring 20 Overcurrent 21 Current phase loss 22 Current phase reversal 23 Motor temp sensor 24 Voltage phase imbalance 25 Voltage phase loss 26 Voltage phase reversal 27 Undervoltage 28 Overvoltage 29 Underpower 30 Overpower 31 Under power factor 32 Over power factor 33 Load shedding 51 Controller internal temperature error 55 Controller internal error Stack overflow 56 Controller internal error RAM error 57 Controller internal error RAM checksum error 58 Controller internal error Hardware watchdog fault 59 Controller internal error 462 1639501 12 2006 Use Fault code Description 60 L2 current detected in 1 phase mode 64 EEPROM error 65 Expansion module communication error 66 Stuck reset button 67 Logic function error 100 104 Network port internal error 109 Network port comm error 555 Network port configuration error DT_Firmware DT_FirmwareVersion format is an XY000 array that describes a firmware revision Version e X major revision e Y minor revision Example Address 76 Ulnt Controller firmware version DT_Language5 DT_Language5 format is a bit string used for language display
337. old T Fault timeout 1639501 12 2006 161 Motor Protection Functions Parameter Settings Function Characteristics Example The internal ground current function has the following parameters Parameters Setting range Factory setting Internal ground current fault timeout 0 5 25 s in 0 1 s increments 1 s Internal ground current fault threshold 20 500 of FLCmin 30 of FLCmin in 1 increments Internal ground current warning threshold 20 500 of FLCmin 30 of FLCmin in 1 increments The internal ground current function has the following characteristics Characteristics Value Hysteresis 95 of Fault threshold or Warning threshold Trip time accuracy 0 1 s or 5 The following diagram describes the occurrence of an internal ground current fault occurring during run state Ir Start state Run state i Fault condition gt lt _P q lt M e PAPA E E E E E E A E A E E ETE E S os sere EER IXs2 internal ground current fault threshold 162 1639501 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions External Ground Current Description The external ground current function is enabled when e the Ground Current Mode parameter is set to External and e a current transformation ratio is set by configuring the Ground CT Primary and the Ground CT Secondary parameters When Ground Current Mode is set to Internal the external ground
338. oller is able to adapt its parity and stop bit to that of the master Even parity is the first parity to be tested Parity and stop bit behavior is linked If the parity is Then the number of stop bits is Even or odd 1 None 2 Network port comm loss timeout is used to determine the timeout value after a loss of communication with the PLC e Range 1 9 999 1639501 12 2006 447 Use Network Port Fallback Setting Network port fallback setting is used to adjust the fallback mode in case of a loss of communication with the PLC Communication Parameter Clear Commands Clear Commands Overview Clear All Command 705 0 Clear Statistics Command 705 1 Communication parameters can be cleared using the following commands Clear All Command 705 0 Clear Statistics Command 705 1 Clear Thermal Capacity Level Command 705 2 Clear Controller Settings Command 705 3 Clear Network Port Settings Command 705 4 These parameters are read write but only when the motor is off except for the Clear Thermal Capacity level command see below If you are using a new product with the controller you may want to clear all existing parameters in order to set new parameters for the product To clear all parameters set register 705 0 to 1 This forces the system to enter configuration mode A power cycle is performed to restart correctly in this mode This enables the system to
339. oltage transformer connections X No Control command diagnostics start check X X No stop check run check back and stop check back Control configuration checksum X X No Communication loss X X Yes X the functionality is available with the units indicated the functionality is not available with the units indicated 1639501 12 2006 65 Metering and Monitoring Functions Motor History Characteristics Motor history includes the following characteristics Motor statistics LTM R LTM R controller with Value saved on controller expansion module power loss Motor starts count X X Yes Motor LO1 starts count logic output O 1 X X Yes starts Motor LO2 starts count logic output 0 2 X X Yes starts Motor starts per hour count X X Yes Load sheddings X X Yes Last start max current X X Yes Last start duration X X No Operating time X X No Max internal controller temperature X X No X the functionality is available with the units indicated the functionality is not available with the units indicated 66 1639501 12 2006 Metering and Monitoring Functions Thermal Overload Statistics Characteristics The thermal overload statistics have the following characteristics Thermal overload display parameters LTM R LTM R controller with Value saved on controller expansion module power loss Time to trip
340. ommands During a minor fault condition the LTM R controller continues to detect and report major faults but not additional minor faults Minor internal faults include internal network communications failure EEPROM error A D out of range error Reset button stuck internal temperature fault at 85 C 185 F invalid configuration error conflicting configuration improper logic function action for example attempting to write to a read only parameter 96 1639501 12 2006 Metering and Monitoring Functions Controller Internal Temperature Description The LTM R controller monitors its internal temperature and reports warning minor fault and major fault conditions Fault detection cannot be disabled Warning detection can be enabled or disabled The internal temperature is not cleared when factory default settings are restored using the Clear All Command or when statistics are reset using a Clear Statistics Command The controller retains a record of the highest attained internal temperature For information about the Controller Internal Temperature Max parameter see p 111 Characteristics The Controller Internal Temperature measured values have the following characteristics Characteristic Value Unit C Accuracy 4 C 7 2 F Resolution 1 C 1 8 F Refresh interval 100 ms Parameters The Controller Internal Temperature function includes one editable
341. ommunication Loss Counters Description The LTM R controller records the total number of faults detected since the Clear Statistics Command last executed for the following communication functions Counter Contains HMI Port Faults Count The number of times communications via the HMI port was lost Network Port Internal Faults Count The number of internal faults experienced by the network module reported by the network module to the LTM R controller Network Port Config Faults Count The number of major faults experienced by the network module exclusive of network module internal faults reported by the network module to the LTM R controller Network Port Faults Count The number of times communicaitons via the network port was lost When the LTM R controller increments any of the above communication loss counters it also increments the Faults Count parameter Internal Fault Counters Description The LTM R controller records the total number of the faults detected since the Clear Statistics Command last executed for the following internal faults Counter Contains Controller Internal Faults Count The number of major and minor internal faults For information on internal faults see p 96 Internal Port Faults Count The number of LTM R controller internal communication faults plus the number of failed attempts to identify the network communication module When the LTM
342. on the Magelis XBTN410 HMI looks like this 1 LCD display 2 8 button keypad 1 to 1 Keypad The 1 to 1 configuration requires a customized keypad label for the 4 buttons AUX1 AUX2 STOP and RESET located at the bottom of the HMI You will need to type or print the button names on a blank keypad label then insert the label into the HMI For instructions on selecting customizing and installing a customized keypad label refer to the Telemecanique Magelis Instruction Sheet that ships with the HMI In a 1 to 1 configuration the keypad buttons perform the following functions Keys Description Comment moves down to the next item in e avalue list e the same level of the menu structure press to decrease the selected numerical digit by 1 unit moves up to the previous item in e avalue list e the same level of the menu structure press to increase the selected numerical digit by 1 unit Use these keys to scroll through setting selections e the sign precedes a factory setting or a user selected setting e the sign precedes available settings 1639501 12 2006 349 Use Keys Description Comment moves up one level in the menu structure e closes the fault display and displays the scrolling variable list Note the ESC key does not save any settings You may need to press ESC several times to return to the upper level of a menu
343. on line across the line full voltage non reversing motor starting applications Reverser Direct on line across the line full voltage reversing motor starting applications Two Step Reduced voltage starting motor applications including e Wye Delta e Open Transition Primary Resistor e Open Transition Autotransformer Two Speed Two speed motor applications for motor types including e Dahlander consequent pole e Pole Changer Each application is described individually with 1 complete application diagram including power and control 3 wire impulse local control 3 partial diagrams 2 wire maintained local control control logic input wiring variants 3 wire impulse local control with network control selectable 2 wire maintained local control with network control selectable 1639501 12 2006 511 IEC Format Wiring Diagrams What s in this This chapter contains the following topics Chapter Topic Page Overload Mode Wiring Diagrams 513 Independent Mode Wiring Diagrams 517 Reverser Mode Wiring Diagrams 519 Two Step Wye Delta Mode Wiring Diagrams 521 Two Step Primary Resistor Mode Wiring Diagrams 523 Two Step Autotransformer Mode Wiring Diagrams 525 Two Speed Dahlander Mode Wiring Diagrams 527 Two Speed Pole Changing Mode Wiring Diagrams 529 512 1639501 12 2006 IEC Format Wiring Diagrams Overload Mode Wiring Dia
344. onnection accessories Designation Reference Junction box TSX SCA 50 3 screw terminals and RC line terminator connected with cable VW3 A8 306 D30 List of connection cables Designation Connectors Length Reference Cable for Modbus 1 RJ45 connector and 3 m 9 8 ft VW3 A8 306 D30 bus 1 stripped end RS 485 double 100 m 328 ft TSX CSA 100 shielded twisted Supplied without connector 200 m 656 ft TSX CSA 200 pair cables 300 m 984 ft TSX CSA 300 1639501 12 2006 313 Installation List of Modbus connection accessories for junction box on screw terminals Type of master Interface with the master Description Reference Twido PLC Screw terminal RS 485 adaptor Modbus cable TSX CSA100 or or interface module TSX CSA200 or TSX CSA500 TSX Micro PLC Mini DIN RS 485 terminal port Junction box TSX P ACC 01 PCMCIA card TSX SCP114 Cable equipped with a special TSX SCP CX4030 connector and stripped at the other end TSX Premium PLC TSX SCY 11601 or Cable equipped with a 25 pin SUB D TSX SCY CM6030 TSX SCY 21601 module 25 pin connector and stripped at the other end SUB D port PCMCIA card TSX SCP114 Cable equipped with a special TSX SCP CX4030 connector and stripped at the other end Serial port PC PC with 9 pin male SUB D RS RS 232 RS 485 converter and TSX SCA 72 and 232 serial port Modbus cable TSX CSA100 or TSX CSA200 or TSX CSA500
345. ons Block Diagram Over power factor warning Run state amp Over power factor warning Power Factor PF gt PFs1 AND Over power factor fault Power Factor PF gt PFs2 _ gt amp T 0 p gt Over power m factor fault Run state _ AND PFs1 Over power factor warning threshold PFs2 Over power factor fault threshold T Over power factor fault timeout Parameter The over power factor function has the following parameters Settings g Parameters Setting range Factory setting Fault enable Enable Disable Disable Fault timeout 1 25 s in 0 1 s increments 10s Fault threshold 0 1 x Power factor in 0 01 increments 0 90 Warning enable Enable Disable Disable Warning threshold 0 1 x Power factor in 0 01 increments 0 90 Function The over power factor function has the following characteristics haracteristi EE Characteristics Characteristics Value Hysteresis 95 of Fault threshold or Warning threshold Accuracy 2 or 3 for Power Factors gt 0 6 Trip time accuracy 0 1 s or 5 1639501 12 2006 205 Motor Protection Functions Example The following diagram describes the occurrence of an over power factor fault PF PFs2 f fault timeout qr PFs2 over power factor fault threshold 206 1639501 12 200
346. ontrol circuits needed to run a motor during a motor protection fault are not shown in the wiring diagrams that follow However the control strategy is to not link the state of logic output O 4 to the state of the input commands In this way fault conditions may be annunciated while control logic continues to manage Start and Stop commands 1639501 12 2006 229 Motor Control Functions Overload Operating Mode Description Use Overload operating mode when motor load monitoring is required and motor load control start stop is performed by a mechanism other than the LTM R controller Functional The Overload operating mode includes the following features Characteristics Accessible only in Network control mode e Logic output 0 4 opens in response to a diagnostic error e TheLTM R controller sets a bit in a status word when it detects an active signal in e logic inputs 1 1 1 2 1 3 or 1 4 or e the Aux 1 Aux 2 or Stop buttons on the HMI keypad Note When a bit is set in the input status word it can be read by a PLC which can write a bit to the LTM R controller s command word When the LTM R controller detects a bit in its command word it can turn on the respective output or outputs Note The LTM R controller does not latch logical output commands unless directed by a PLC master control program or a custom logic program 230 1639501 12 2006 Motor Control Functions Overload The
347. ontroller Controller logic outputs have the following characteristics Rated insulation voltage 300 V AC rated thermal load 250 Vac 5A DC rated thermal load 30 Vdc 5 A AC 15 rating 480 VA 500000 operations le max 2A DC 13 rating 30 W 500000 operations le max 1 25 A Associated fuse protection gGat4A Maximum operating rate 1800 cycles hr Maximum frequency 2 Hz 2 cycles s Response time closing lt 10 ms Response time opening lt 10 ms Contact rating B300 40 1639501 12 2006 Introduction Altitude Derating The following table provides the deratings to apply for dielectric strengths and maximum operating temperature according to altitude Corrective factors for altitude 2000 m 3000 m 3500 m 4000 m 4500 m 6561 68 ft 9842 52 ft 11482 94 ft 13123 36 ft 14763 78 ft Dielectric Strength Ui 1 0 93 0 87 0 8 0 7 Max Operating Temperature 1 0 93 0 92 0 9 0 88 1639501 12 2006 41 Introduction Technical Specifications of the Expansion Module Technical Specifications The expansion module meets the following specifications Certifications UL CSA CE CTIC K CCC NOM GOST IACS E10 BV LROS DNV GL RINA ABS RMRos ATEX Conformity to Standards IEC EN 60947 4 1 UL 508 CSA C22 2 IACSE10 European community directives CE marking Satisfies th
348. ontroller is in local control mode and then the control mode is changed to network control the LTM R controller enters the fallback state If PLC LTM R controller communication is restored while the control mode is set to network control the LTM R controller exits the fallback state If the control mode is changed to local control the IMPR exits from the fallback state regardless of the state of PLC controller communications The table below defines the available actions that the LTM R controller may take during a communication loss that the user may select when configuring the LTM R controller 506 1639501 12 2006 Maintenance HMI Communication Loss Network Communication Loss Actions LTM R controller output control Available LTM R actions after PLC LTM R mode prior to network loss controller network loss Local Terminal Strip Fault and Warning control possibilities Signal nothing Activate a warning Activate a fault Activate a fault and warning Local RJ45 Fault and Warning control possibilities Signal nothing Activate a warning Activate a fault Activate a fault and warning Remote Fault and Warning control possibilities Signal nothing Activate a warning Activate a fault Activate a fault and warning The behavior of the LO1 and LO2 relays depends on the motor controller mode and on the fallback strategy chosen The LTM R controller monitors the com
349. ontroller uses a customized logic file created in the custom logic editor and downloaded to the LTM R controller from the configuration software Use the following commands to separately download from the configuration software to the LTM R controller your application s configuration file and customized logic file To download this file Use this command Configuration file with parameter settings PC to Device command in either the icon bar or that is open and displayed in the the Link gt File Transfer sub menu configuration software Logic file with logic commands that is open Download Program to Device command in and displayed in the custom logic editor either the icon bar or the Logic Functions menu 252 1639501 12 2006 Motor Control Functions 5 3 Fault Management At a Glance Summary This section describes how the LTM R controller manages the fault handling process and explains e how to select a fault reset mode and e controller behavior for each fault reset mode selection What s in this This section contains the following topics Section Topic Page Fault Management Introduction 254 Manual Reset 257 Automatic Reset 260 Remote Reset 265 Fault and Warning Codes 267 1639501 12 2006 253 Motor Control Functions Fault Management Introduction Overview When the LTM R controller detects a fault condition and activates the
350. opper when calculating thermal capacity utilized by the motor as described below 0 A Heating Cooling Trip thermal value ofe iron tripping threshold Ocu copper tripping threshold t Time 1639501 12 2006 133 Motor Protection Functions When inverse thermal fault mode is selected the Thermal Capacity Level parameter indicating utilized thermal capacity due to load current is incremented during both start and run states When the LTM R controller detects that the thermal capacity level q exceeds the fault threshold qs it triggers a thermal overload fault as described below A Starting Running Fault state cooling Starting Running Fault state cooling Os Trip Trip t Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled The LTM R controller will clear a thermal overload fault or warning when the utilized thermal capacity falls below 95 of the threshold 134 1639501 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Functional Characteristics The Thermal Overload inverse thermal functions include the following features 1 motor trip class setting e Motor Trip Class 4 configurable thresholds e Motor Full Load Current Ratio FLC1 e Motor High Speed Full Load Current Ratio FLC2 e Thermal Overload Warning Threshold e Thermal Overload Fault Reset Threshold 2 function outputs e Thermal Overload Warning e Thermal Overload
351. or n 1 374 1639501 12 2006 Use Fault n 2 records information in the following parameters Level 3 Level 4 Parameter name reference Fault n 2 Fault Code Fault Code n 2 Date Date And Time n 2 Time FLC Ratio Motor Full Load Current Ratio n 2 FLC Max Motor Full Load Current Max n 2 Avg Current Average Current n 2 L1 Current L1 Current n 2 L2 Current L2 Current n 2 L3 Current L3 Current n 2 Gr Current Ground Current n 2 AvgCurrRatio Average Current Ratio n 2 L1CurrRatio L1 Current Ratio n 2 L2CurrRatio L2 Current Ratio n 2 L3CurrRatio L3 Current Ratio n 2 GrCurrRatio Ground Current Ratio n 2 Curr Ph Imb Current Phase Imbalance n 2 Th Capacity Thermal Capacity Level n 2 Avg Volts Average Voltage n 2 L3 L1 Volts L3 L1 Voltage n 2 L1 L2 Volts L1 L2 Voltage n 2 L2 L3 Volts L2 L3 Voltage n 2 Volt Ph Imb Voltage Phase Imbalance n 2 Frequency Frequency n 2 Active Power Active Power n 2 Power Factor Power Factor n 2 Temp Sensor Motor Temp Sensor n 2 1639501 12 2006 375 Use Fault n 3 records information in the following parameters Level 3 Level 4 Parameter name reference Fault n 3 Fault Code Fault Code n 3 Date Date And Time n 3 Time FLC Ratio Motor Full Load Current Ratio n 3 FLC Max Motor Full Load Current Max n 3
352. or operating states and the fault and warning protections provided by the LTM R controller while the motor is in each operating state denoted with an X are described below It can transition to an internal fault condition from any operating state Protection Category Monitored Fault Warning Operating states Sys Config Ready Not Ready Start Run Diagnostic Run Command Check X Stop Command Check xX Run Check Back Stop Check Back Wiring configuration errors PTC connection lt Xx x Xx CT Reversal Voltage Phase Reversal Current Phase Reversal XX X X x x x Voltage Phase Loss Phase Configuration Internal faults Minor Major x Xx Thermal resistance Motor temperature sensor PTC Binary PTC Analog NTC Analog x Xx Xx x x Xx Thermal overload Definite Inverse Thermal XxX X X X XxX x Xx Current Long Start x x lt Jam Current Phase Imbalance Current Phase Loss x x lt Overcurrent Undercurrent Ground Fault Internal Ground Fault External x Xx Voltage Overvoltage Level Undervoltage Level x Xx x x lt Voltage Phase Imbalance X X X X X Xx X Xx OK Xx X Monitored Not monitored 216 1639501 12 2006 Motor Control Functions Protection Catego
353. or temperature sensor elements mm AWG 0 5 20 0 75 18 1 5 16 2 5 14 m ft 220 656 300 985 400 1312 600 1970 Use twisted pair wiring to connect the Controller to the temperature sensor For the Controller to accurately measure the resistance of the temperature sensing element you must measure the resistance of the twisted pair and add it to the desired resistance for protection This compensates for the lead resistance See Metering and Monitoring Functions p 59 and Motor Protection Functions p 115 for more information on temperature sensors See p 287 for an example of a wiring diagram using a temperature sensor 298 1639501 12 2006 Installation Recommended Contactors Recommended You can use the following contactor types Contactors e Telemecanique IEC style contactors from the TeSys D or TeSys F ranges e Square D NEMA style contactors from the S range Interposing Depending on the coil voltage of the contactor used an interposing relay may be Relays required The tables on the following pages listing the references and character istics of contactors specify whether an interposing relay is required The following diagrams illustrate system wiring without and with the use of an interposing relay 3a Without interposing relay With interposing relay 1639501 12 2006 299 Installation
354. ork port internal fault bit 14 Network port config fault bit 15 Network port fault 476 1639501 12 2006 Use Register Variable type Read only variables Note p 455 453 Word Fault register 2 bit O Not significant bit 1 Diagnostic fault bit 2 Wiring fault bit 3 Overcurrent fault bit 4 Current phase loss fault bit 5 Current phase reversal fault bit 6 Motor temperature sensor fault bit 7 Voltage phase imbalance fault bit 8 Voltage phase loss fault bit 9 Voltage phase reversal fault bit 10 Undervoltage fault bit 11 Overvoltage fault bit 12 Underpower fault bit 13 Overpower fault bit 14 Under power factor fault bit 15 Over power factor fault 454 Reserved 455 Word System status register 1 bit 0 System ready bit 1 System on bit 2 System fault bit 3 System warning bit 4 System tripped bit 5 Fault reset authorized bit 6 Controller power bit 7 Motor running with detection of a current if greater than 10 FLC bits 8 13 Motor average current ratio 32 100 FLC 63 200 FLC bit 14 Control via HMI bit 15 Motor starting start in progress 1 ascending current is greater than 10 FLC 0 descending current is less than 150 FLC 1639501 12 2006 477 Use Register Variable type Read only variable
355. ort The following parameters identify the configuration control source Parameter Enables use of this tool Factory setting Config Via HMI Keypad Enable Magelis XBTN410 device keypad Enabled Config Via HMI Engineering Tool Enable PC running PowerSuite software Enabled Config Via Network Port Enable the network port PLC Enabled Commissioning Process Note The Magelis XBTN410 HMI can commission the LTM R controller only if a 1 to 1 software application is installed If a 1 to many software application is installed the Magelis XBTN410 HMI can operate up to 8 LTM R controllers after commissioning but cannot perform commissioning for any LTM R controller For information on the use of software application files see p 343 This chapter describes commissioning performed using either the Magelis XBTN410 HMI in a 1 to 1 configuration or PowerSuite software The commissioning process remains the same regardless which configuration tool you select This process includes the following stages Stage Description First power up The LTM R controller initializes and is ready for parameter configuration Configuring required settings Configure these parameters to move the LTM R controller out of its initialization state The LTM R controller is ready for operations Configuring optional settings Configure these parameters to support the LTM R controller functions required by the applica
356. other pages as described below Level 2 Description STARTERS CURRENTS Fa 4 11 XXXX 15 XXXX Opens the Motor Starter page for the 4 12 XXXX I6 XXXX selected LTM R controller 1 8 4 13 XXXX I7 XXXX 4 14 XXXX 1I8 XXXX Starters status Opens the Starters Status page Remote reset Opens the Remote Reset page Home Viviviviviviv Returns to the Home page Use the Starters Status page to monitor the System On and System Fault status of all connected LTM R controllers and to navigate to other pages as described below Level 2 Description STARTERS STATUS 4 1 XXX 5 XXX 4 2 XXX 6 XXX 4 3 XXX 7 XXX 4 4 XXX 8 XXX Opens the Motor Starter page for the selected controller 1 8 Starters currents Opens the Starters Currents page Remote reset Opens the Remote Reset page Home Viviviviviviv Returns to the Home page 1639501 12 2006 407 Use Faults Display The Magelis XBTN410 HMI displays active faults in a series of pages 1 fault to a page when e a fault occurs and the display of active faults automatically opens e you select Faults in the Home page and manually open the display of active faults For information about fault management including the faults display pages see p 424 Remote Reset Use the Remote Reset page to remotely execute a Fault Reset Command
357. otocol The microprocessor based LTM R controller is the central component in the system that manages the control protection and monitoring functions of single phase and 3 phase AC induction motors The LTM R controller is designed to work over various fieldbus protocols This manual focuses only on systems designed to communicate over the Modbus protocol LTM R controller Functional description Reference number e current sensing 0 4 100 A e single phase or 3 phase current inputs 6 discrete logic inputs 4 relay outputs 3 SPST 1 DPST connections for a ground current sensor connection for a motor temperature sensor connection for network connection for HMI device or expansion module current protection metering and monitoring functions motor control functions power indicator fault and warning LED indicators network communication and alarm indicators HMI communication LED indicator test and reset function LTMRO8MBD 24 Vde 0 4 8 A FLC LTMR27MBD 24 Vde 1 35 27 A FLC LTMR100MBD 24 Vde 5 100 A FLC LTMRO8MFM 100 240 Vac 0 4 8 A FLC LTMR27MFM 100 240 Vac 1 35 27 A FLC LTMR100MFM 100 240 Vac 5 100 A FLC LTM E The range includes two models of the expansion module that provide voltage Expansion monitoring functionality and 4 additional logic inputs The expansion module is Module powered by the LTM R controller via a connector cable
358. our comments about this document You can reach us by e mail at techpub schneider electric com 1639501 12 2006 Introducing the TeSys T Motor Management System 1 At a Glance Overview What s in this Chapter This chapter introduces the TeSys T Motor Management System and its companion devices This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page Presentation of the TeSys T Motor Management System 16 System Selection Guide 24 Physical Description of the LTM R Motor Management Controller with 31 Modbus Protocol Physical Description of the LTM E Expansion Module 35 Technical Specifications of the LTM R Controller 38 Technical Specifications of the Expansion Module 42 Configurable Parameters 45 1639501 12 2006 Introduction Presentation of the TeSys T Motor Management System Aim of the Product The TeSys T Motor Management System offers protection control and monitoring capabilities for single phase and 3 phase AC induction motors The system is flexible and modular and can be configured to meet the needs of applications in industry The system is designed to meet the needs for integrated protections systems with open communications and global architecture More accurate sensors and solid state full motor protection ensures better utilization of the motor Complete monitoring functions enable analysis of motor operating conditions and fas
359. out 0 65535 s 60s 262 1639501 12 2006 Motor Control Functions Auto Reset Methods The LTM R controller allows the following auto reset methods Protection category Monitored fault Control mode Local terminal strip Local HMI Network Diagnostic Run Command Check RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 NC Stop Command Check RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 NC Run Check Back RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 NC Stop Check Back RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 NC Wiring configuration PTC connection RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 orrors CT Reversal RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 Voltage Phase Reversal RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 Current Phase Reversal RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 Voltage Phase Loss RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 Phase Configuration RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 RB PC 1 5 NC Internal Stack Overflow PC PC PC Watchdog PC PC PC ROM Checksum PC PC PC EEROM PC PC PC CPU PC PC PC Internal Temperature PC PC PC Motor temp sensor PTC Binary AU G1 AU G1 AU G1 PTC Analog AU G1 AU G1 AU G1 NTC Analog AU G1 AU G1 AU G1 Thermal overload Definite AU G1 AU G1 AU G1 Inverse Thermal AU G1 AU G1 AU G1 RB Test Reset button on the LTM R controller front face or the local HMI PC Power cycle on the LTM R controller 1 5 Set 1 5 logic input on the LTM R controller NC network command
360. owing The Stop Command Check e reports a Stop Command fault or warning if current is detected after a delay of 1 second or e ends if the LTM R controller detects current lt 5 of FLCmin The Stop Check Back begins when the Stop Command Check ends The Stop Check Back causes the LTM R controller to continuously monitor the main circuit to ensure no current is flowing The Stop Check Back e reports a Stop Check Back fault or warning if average phase current is detected for longer than 0 5 seconds without a Run command or e ends when a Run command executes The following diagram is an example of the timing sequence for the Start Command Check and Stop Command Check Start Command Start Command Check E M Stop Comman Uy 1 A Y A D WAS Main Circuit Current GN FPN NS L gt 4 gt q 0 Stop Command Check Normal operation Fault or warning condition The LTM R controller monitors the main circuit to detect current The LTM R controller monitors the main circuit to detect no current The LTM R controller reports a Start Command Check fault and or warning if current is not detected after 1 second 6 The LTM R controller reports a Stop Command Check fault and or warning if current is detected after 1 second arhond 100 1639501 12 2006 Metering and Monitoring Functions The following diagram is an
361. pact in size for door mounted applications It must be programmed using XBTL1000 programming software Magelis XBT HMI Functional description Reference number commission the system through menu entries XBTN410 HMI e configure the system through menu entries XBTZ938 cable e displ arnings and faults isp ay warnng XBTL1000 software Additional components required for an optional HMI device separate power source e LTM R LTM E to HMI communication cable e Magelis XBTL1000 programming software 20 1639501 12 2006 Introduction Current Transformers ground fault conditions External load current transformers expand the current range for use with motors greater than 100 full load Amperes External ground current transformers measure External current transformers expand the current range for use with motors greater than 100 full load Amperes Telemecanique current Primary Secondary Inside diameter Reference number transformers mm in 100 1 35 1 38 LT6CT1001 E E 200 1 35 1 38 LT6CT2001 400 1 35 1 38 LT6CT4001 800 1 35 1 38 LT6CT8001 Note The following current transformers are also available Telemecanique LUTC0301 LUTC0501 LUTC 1001 LUTC2001 LUTC4001 and LUTC8001 External ground current transformers measure ground fault conditions Merlin Gerin V
362. parameter Parameter Setting range Factory setting Controller internal temperature warning enable e Enable Enable e Disable The Controller Internal Temperature function includes the following fixed warning and fault thresholds Condition Fixed Threshold Value Sets this parameter Internal temperature warning 80 C 176 F Controller Internal Temperature Warning Internal temperature minor fault 85 C 185 F Controller Internal Fault Internal temperature major fault 100 C 212 F A warning condition ceases when LTM R controller internal temperature falls below 80 C 1639501 12 2006 97 Metering and Monitoring Functions Block Diagram Controller Internal Temperature warning and fault o m gt T gt 80 C m Controller internal temperature warning o T gt T gt 85 C gt Controller internal temperature minor fault o L T gt 100 C t Controller internal temperature major fault T Temperature T gt 80 C 176 F Fixed warning threshold T gt 85 C 185 F Fixed minor fault threshold T gt 100 C 212 F Fixed major fault threshold 98 1639501 12 2006 Metering and Monitoring Functions Control Command Diagnostic Errors Description The LTM R controller performs diagnostic tests that detect and monitor the proper functionality of control commands There are four control command
363. pe Read only variables Note p 455 390 391 UDInt Average current n 3 392 393 UDInt L1 current n 3 394 395 UDInt L2 current n 3 396 397 UDInt L3 current n 3 398 399 UDint Ground current n 3 N 4 Fault The n 4 fault main statistics are listed at addresses 270 299 Statistics Extension Register Variable type Read only variables Note p 455 420 421 UDint Average current n 4 422 423 UDint L1 current n 4 424 425 UDint L2 current n 4 426 427 UDint L3 current n 4 428 429 UDint Ground current n 4 1639501 12 2006 475 Use Monitoring Variables Monitoring Monitoring variables are described below Variables Monitoring variable groups Registers Monitoring of faults 450 to 454 Monitoring of status 455 to 459 Monitoring of warnings 460 to 464 Monitoring of measurements 465 to 539 Register Variable type Read only variables Note p 455 450 Ulnt Minimum wait time s 451 Ulnt Fault code code of the last fault or of the fault that takes priority See DT_ExtOperatingMode p 461 452 Word Fault register 1 bits 0 1 Reserved bit 2 Ground current fault bit 3 Thermal overload fault bit 4 Long start fault bit 5 Jam fault bit 6 Current phase imbalance fault bit 7 Undercurrent fault bit 8 Reserved bit 9 Test fault bit 10 HMI port fault bit 11 Controller internal fault bit 12 Internal port fault bit 13 Netw
364. perform monitoring fault management motor protection and control functions All user interface devices require an independent power source User interface devices and their communications interfaces include User interface device Communicates via the Magelis XBTN410 HMI HMI port via the local RJ45 connector on the LTM R controller or expansion module PC running PowerSuite software HMI port via the local RJ45 connector on the LTM R controller or expansion module Network PLC Network port on the LTM R controller via the network RJ46 connector or terminal wiring 338 1639501 12 2006 Use 8 2 Using the LTM R Controller Alone Stand Alone Configuration Overview When operated without a user interface the LTM R controller either alone or connected to an expansion module provides monitoring protection fault management and control functionality Note Although the LTM R controller can be operated without a user interface you must to use one of the following devices for the purpose of configuring parameters After parameters are configured the device can be detached and the LTM R controller can operate in stand alone configuration Parameters can be configured using either e aMagelis XBTN410 HMI e PowerSuite software After parameters are configured use the following controls to operate the LTM R controller Use this control To e LEDs Mo
365. protection Only one of these ground current mode settings can be activated at a time This function applies to both single phase and 3 phase motors The ground current protection function has the following configurable parameter settings which apply to both internal and external ground current protection Parameters Setting range Factory setting Ground current mode e Internal Internal e External Fault enable Enable Disable Enable Warning enable Enable Disable Enable 1639501 12 2006 159 Motor Protection Functions Internal Ground Current Description The internal ground current function is enabled when the Ground Current Mode parameter is set to Internal When Ground Current Mode is set to External the internal ground current function is disabled A DANGER IMPROPER FAULT DETECTION Internal ground current function will not protect people from harm caused by ground current Ground fault thresholds must be set to protect the motor and related equipment Ground fault settings must conform to national and local safety regulations and codes Failure to follow this instruction will result in death or serious injury The internal ground current function sums the current readings from the secondary of the internal current transformers and signals e a warning when the summed current exceeds a set threshold e a fault when the summed current continuously exceeds a separately set t
366. quence e A B C A B C e A C B The current phase reversal function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Trip time at motor startup within 0 2 s of motor startup Trip time accuracy 0 1 s or 5 148 1639501 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Long Start Description Start Cycle Functional Characteristics The long start function detects a locked or stalled rotor in start state and signals a fault when current continuously exceeds a separately set threshold for the same period of time Each predefined operating mode has its own current profile representing a successful start cycle for the motor The LTM R controller detects a long start fault condition whenever the actual current profile occurring after a start command varies from the expected profile Fault monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled This function e applies to both single phase and 3 phase motors e has no warning The configurable parameters for the Long Start protection function Long Start Fault Threshold and Long Start Fault Timeout are used by the LTM R controller in defining and detecting the motor s start cycle See p 278 The long start function includes the following features e 1 threshold e Fault Threshold e 1 fault time delay e Fault Timeout e 1 function outputs e Long Start Fault e 1 counting statistic e Long Start Faults Count
367. r 2 478 T technical specifications expansion module 42 LTM R controller 38 TeSys T motor management system 16 thermal capacity level 77 94 131 135 383 411 480 n 0 373 420 469 n 1 374 421 470 n 2 375 471 n 3 376 472 n 4 377 473 thermal motor protection functions parameter setting ranges 119 thermal overload 130 configuration 483 definite time 138 fault 135 fault definite timeout 120 140 366 483 fault enable 119 130 366 414 fault reset mode 119 254 362 fault reset threshold 120 135 255 366 414 486 fault reset timeout 255 383 faults count 91 135 139 371 inverse thermal 131 mode 119 130 328 366 483 warning 135 warning enable 119 130 366 414 warning threshold 120 135 140 366 414 486 warnings count 91 135 139 371 thermal overload statistics characteristics 67 time to trip 112 time stamp 504 time to trip 112 411 481 U under power factor 201 fault enable 124 202 369 417 fault threshold 124 202 369 417 484 fault timeout 124 202 369 417 484 faults count 91 372 warning enable 124 202 369 417 warning threshold 124 202 369 417 485 undercurrent 154 fault enable 121 155 367 415 fault threshold 121 155 367 415 486 fault timeout 121 155 367 415 486 faults count 91 371 warning enable 121 155 367 415 warning threshold 121 155 367 415 486 1639501 12 2006 569 Index underpower 195 fa
368. r a full list of connection accessories see p 286 284 1639501 12 2006 Installation Connecting toa Generic HMI Device Connecting to a PC running PowerSuite Software in 1 to 1 Mode You can also connect the LTM R controller and the expansion module to an HMI device of your choice using a customized cable The customized cable requires the following RJ45 port pinouts to connect to the LTM R controller or the expansion module Front view D1 _ DO VvP Common The RJ45 wiring layout is Pin no Signal Description 1 Do not connect LTM R or LTM E transceiver 2 Do not connect LTM R or LTM E transceiver 4 D1 or D B Communication between HMI and LTM R controller 5 DO or D A Communication between HMI and LTM R controller 6 Do not connect LTM R or LTM E voltage zero crossing 7 VP Positive 7 Vdc power supply 8 Common Signal and power supply common The diagrams below show a 1 to 1 connection from a PC running PowerSuite to the LTM R controller with and without the expansion module PC running PowerSuite software Power cable VW3 A8 106 LTM R controller Expansion module kon 1639501 12 2006 285 Installation Connecting to a PC running PowerSuite Software in 1 to Many Mode Connection Accessories The diagram below shows a 1 to many conne
369. racteristic of a thermistor a thermally sensitive resistor whose resistance increases as its temperature rises and whose resistance decreases as its temperature falls PTC analog Type of RTD PTC binary Type of RTD R reset time Time between a sudden change in the monitored quantity e g current and the switching of the output relay rms root mean square A method of calculating average AC current and average AC voltage Because AC current and AC voltage are bi directional the arithmetic average of AC current or voltage always equals 0 The calculations for rms current and rms voltage are Irms Imax Vrms J2 J2 Vmax 1639501 12 2006 555 Glossary RTD resistance temperature detector A thermistor thermal resistor sensor used to measure the temperature of the motor Required by the LTM R controllers Motor Temp Sensor motor protection function T TCC trip curve characteristic The type of delay used to trip the flow of current in response to a fault condition As implemented in the LTM R controller all motor protection function trip time delays are definite time except for the Thermal Overload function which also offers inverse thermal trip time delays TVC trip voltage characteristic The type of delay used to trip the flow of voltage in response to a fault condition As implemented by the LTM R controller and the expansion module all TVCs are definite time 556 1639501 12 2006 Index
370. rameter 1639501 12 2006 121 Motor Protection Functions Protection functions Parameters Setting range Factory setting Motor temperature sensor Type e None None e PTC Binary e PTC Analog e NTC Analog Fault enable Enable Disable Disable Warning enable Enable Disable Disable PTC binary no configurable parameters PTC NTC analog Fault threshold 20 6500 Q in 0 1 Q increments 200 Q Warning threshold 20 6500 Q in 0 1 Q increments 200 Q Rapid cycle lockout Timeout 0 999 9 s in increments of 0 1 s Os 1 Thermal Overload Inverse Thermal Fault Reset Timeout is set by the Auto Reset Group 1 Timeout parameter 2 OC1 and OC2 are set via the Motor Full Load Current and the Motor High Speed Full Load Current parameters respectively OC1 and OC2 settings can be set directly in Amperes in the Settings menu of an HMI or in the Settings branch of PowerSuite software 3 Thermal Overload Definite Time D Time is set by the Long Start Fault Timeout parameter 122 1639501 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Voltage When connected to an expansion module the LTM R controller provides the Protection additional voltage protection functions listed below All of the following functions can Functions be enabled or disabled Protection functions Parameters Setting range Factory setting Voltage phas
371. rd Custom logic memory space 1203 Word Custom logic memory used 1204 Word Custom logic temporary space 1205 Word Custom logic non volatile space 1206 1300 Reserved 1301 1399 General purpose registers for logic functions 1639501 12 2006 495 Use 496 1639501 12 2006 Maintenance At a Glance Overview This chapter describes the maintenance and self diagnostic features of the LTM R controller and the expansion module UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION The application of this product requires expertise in the design and programming of control systems Only persons with such expertise should be allowed to program install alter and apply this product Follow all local and national safety codes and standards Failure to follow this instruction can result in death serious injury or equipment damage What s in this This chapter contains the following topics Chapter Topic Page Detecting Problems 498 Troubleshooting 499 Preventive Maintenance 502 Replacing an LTM R Controller and LTM E Expansion Module 505 Communication Warnings and Faults 506 1639501 12 2006 497 Maintenance Detecting Problems Overview The LTM R controller and the expansion module perform self diagnostic checks at power up and during operation Problems with either the LTM R controller or expansion module can be
372. rds multiple registers Yes Preset Multiple Regs 0x2B 43 Read identification identification register No Read Device Identification The maximum number of registers per request is limited to 100 A WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION Use of this device on a Modbus network that uses the broadcast function should be considered with caution This device has a large number of registers that must not be modified during normal operation Unintended writing of these registers by the broadcast function may cause unexpected and unwanted product operation For more information refer to the Communication variables list Failure to follow this instruction can result in death serious injury or equipment damage 1639501 12 2006 451 Use Example of a The example below describes a READ_VAR request within a TSX Micro or Read Operation Premium platform in order to read the LTM R states at address 4 slave n 4 Modbus contained in internal word MWO Request Code 3 loo Me A I If MO AND NOT MW100 X0 THEN READ VAR ADR 3 0 4 MW 455 1 MWO 1 MW100 4 RESET MO EN_IF Address of the device with which you wish to communicate 3 device address 0 channel 4 device address on the bus Type of PL7 objects to be read MW internal word Address of the first register to be read 455 Number of consecutive registers to be read 1 Word table containing the value of the objects read
373. red NEMA size VA maintained Control Circuit Frequency Coil voltages max Hz interposing relay not interposing relay required required 00 33 00 0 1 27 2 37 24 115 120 208 220 277 380 440 480 550 240 600 38 3 pil 50 60 4 33 115 120 208 220 240 277 380 440 480 550 600 5 15 115 120 208 220 240 277 380 440 480 6 59 115 120 208 220 240 277 380 440 480 550 600 7 Dual parallel contactors of this size require an interposing relay The minimum load for these outputs is a K Line contactor with a low consumption coil The N C 95 96 relay can control 2 contactors of the specified size in parallel 1639501 12 2006 303 Installation 6 2 Wiring of the Modbus Communication Network Modbus Communication Network Introduction This section describes how to connect a controller to an RS 485 Modbus network with an RJ45 or an open style connector It presents 2 possible network topologies What s in this This section contains the following topics Section Topic Page Modbus Communication Port Wiring Terminal Characteristics 305 Modbus Network Connection 307 304 1639501 12 2006 Installation Modbus Communication Port Wiring Terminal Characteristics General The main physical characteristics of a Modbus port are Physical interface Multipoint 2 wire RS 485 electrical networking
374. reset mode which directs the control program to allow fault resets by a person a master network controller or the LTM R control program depending upon the type of fault and the authorized control source Fault reset modes include e manual reset allows resets by a person using a local reset means e remote reset adds the ability to reset via commands from the remote master network controller via the LTM R controllers network port e automatic reset adds the ability of the LTM R controller to reset faults automatically after a time delay This chapter contains the following sections Section Topic Page 5 1 Control Modes and Operating States 209 5 2 Operating Modes 222 5 3 Fault Management 253 208 1639501 12 2006 Motor Control Functions 5 1 Control Modes and Operating States At a Glance Summary This section describes e how to configure control of the LTM R controller outputs and e the LTM R controllers operating states including e how the LTM R controller transitions between operating states during startup and e the motor protection functions provided by the LTM R controller in each operating state UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION The application of this product requires expertise in the design and programming of control systems Only persons with such expertise should be allowed to program install alter and apply this product Follow all local and
375. rning thresholds are defined as a percentage of the Motor Nominal Power parameter setting Pnom The overpower function is available only in run state when the LTM R controller is connected to an expansion module Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled The function applies to both single phase and 3 phase motors The overpower function includes the following features e 2 thresholds e Overpower Warning Threshold e Overpower Fault Threshold e 1 fault time delay e Overpower Fault Timeout e 2 function outputs e Overpower Warning e Overpower Fault e 1 counting statistic e Overpower Faults Count 198 1639501 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Block Diagram Overpower warning and fault Vavg gt lavg gt Power Factor p Parameter Settings Function Characteristics Run state ___ amp Overpower warning P gt Ps1 gt AND P gt Ps2 T o H Overpower fault a n Run state AND Vavg Average rms voltage lavg Average rms current P Power Ps1 Warning threshold Ps2 Fault threshold T Fault timeout The overpower function has the following parameters in 1 increments Parameters Setting range Factory setting Fault enable Enable Disable Disable Fault timeout 1 100 s in 1 s increments 60 s Fault threshold 20 800 of Motor nominal power 150 in
376. roller firmware version Starters currents gt Links to a page that displays average current and provides links to data and commands for each LTM R controller Starters status Links to a page that displays status On Off Fault and provides links to data and commands for each LTM R controller Faults Displays a series of fault messages Remote Reset Links to a page that displays the status of each LTM R controller and provides a reset command for each LTM R controller Reset to defaults Links to a page with commands that reset to factory defaults each LTM R controller s statistics or settings XBTN Reference Links to a page that describes communication speed and parity programming software and LTM R controller firmware 406 1639501 12 2006 Use Menu Structure All LTM R Controllers and the HMI 1 to many Overview Starters Currents Page Starters Status Page Pages located in level 2 of the menu structure contain e information and commands for up to 8 connected LTM R controllers or e fault information for all LTM R controller or e information about the Magelis XBTN410 HMI All level 2 menu structure pages are accessible from the Home page For information about navigating the 1 to many menu structure see p 398 Use the Starters Currents page to monitor the Average Current Ratio for all connected LTM R controllers and to navigate to
377. roller internal error Hardware watchdog fault X 59 Controller internal error x 60 L2 current detected in 1 phase mode X 64 EEROM error X 65 Expansion module communication error X 66 Stuck reset button Xx 67 Logic function error X 100 Network port internal error X 101 Network port internal error X 102 Network port internal error X 104 Network port internal error X 109 Network port communication error X 555 Network port configuration error X X Fault or Warning reported Fault or Warning not reported 268 1639501 12 2006 Installation Introduction Overview This chapter describes the physical installation and assembly of the LTM R controller and the LTM E expansion module It also explains how to connect and wire the controller terminal block including communication port wiring A DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH e Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on it e Apply appropriate personal protective equipment PPE and follow safe electrical work practices Failure to follow this instruction will result in death or serious injury A WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION The application of this product requires expertise in the design and programming of control systems Only persons with such expertise should be allowed to program and apply this product Follow all local and national safety codes a
378. rols logic output O 2 Logic input I 3 is not used in the control circuit but can be configured to set a bit in memory Logic outputs O 1 and O 2 deactivate and the motor stops when control voltage becomes too low Logic outputs 0 1 O 2 and O 4 deactivate and the motor stops in response to a diagnostic error Note See Control Wiring and Fault Management p 228 for information about the interaction between e the LTM R controller s predefined control logic and e the control wiring an example of which appears in the following diagram 1639501 12 2006 237 Motor Control Functions Reverser The following wiring diagram represents a simplified example of the LTM R Application controller in a Reverser local control 3 wire impulse application Diagram 1 The N C interlock contacts KM1 and KM2 are not mandatory because the LTM R controller firmware interlocks O 1 and O 2 For additional examples of reverser operating mode IEC diagrams see p 519 For examples of reverser operating mode NEMA diagrams see p 539 238 1639501 12 2006 Motor Control Functions VO Assignment Reverser operating mode provides the following logic inputs Logic inputs 2 wire maintained assignment 3 wire impulse assignment 1 1 Forward run Start motor forward 1 2 Reverse run Start motor reverse 1 3 Free Free 1 4 Fre
379. rom your PC to the LTM R controller see p 432 e Magelis XBTN410 HMI To edit parameters located in the e Main menu navigate to the s main menu settings and make the appropriate edits e Sys Config menu navigate to the Services menu and use the Sys Config command to reopen the SysConfig menu where you can again make and save edits For information about required settings see p 322 336 1639501 12 2006 Use At a Glance Overview This chapter describes e the user interface devices and the hardware configurations you can use to operate the LTM R controller e how to set parameters with each user interface e howto perform monitoring fault handling and control functions with each user interface What s in this This chapter contains the following sections Chapter Section Topic Page 8 1 Introduction 338 8 2 Using the LTM R Controller Alone 339 8 3 Configuring the Magelis XBTN410 343 8 4 Using the Magelis XBTN410 HMI 1 to 1 348 8 5 Using the Magelis XBTN410 HMI 1 to many 391 8 6 Using PowerSuite Software 426 8 7 Using the Modbus Communication Network 445 1639501 12 2006 337 Use 8 1 Introduction Hardware Configurations Overview Communications The LTM R controller either alone or connected to an expansion module can be operated with or without a user interface device In any configuration the LTM R controller can be configured to
380. rotection Functions Overcurrent Description The overcurrent function signals e a warning when current in a phase exceeds a set threshold after the motor has reached run state e a fault when current in a phase continuously exceeds a separately set threshold for a set period of time after the motor has reached run state The overcurrent function can be triggered when the equipment is overloaded or a process condition is detected causing current to increase beyond the set threshold This function has a single fault time delay Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled The function applies to both single phase and 3 phase motors Functional The overcurrent function includes the following features Characteristics e 2 thresholds e Warning Threshold e Fault Threshold e 1 fault time delay e Fault Timeout e 2 function outputs e Overcurrent Warning e Overcurrent Fault e 1 counting statistic e Overcurrent Faults Count 156 1639501 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Block Diagram Overcurrent warning and fault 11 r 12 gt Imax 13 gt Parameter Settings Function Characteristics 11 Phase 1 current 12 Phase 2 current I3 Phase 3 current Run state pp amp pe Overcurrent warning Imax gt Is1 AND Imax gt Is2 T 0 amp m Overcurrent fault l Run state AND Is1 Warning threshold
381. rs display of the Magelis XBTN410 HMI e active power e reactive power e power factor 332 1639501 12 2006 Commissioning Control Circuit Wiring Current Transformer Wiring To verify control circuit wiring check the following Look at Action The control wiring diagram Visually confirm that the actual control wiring matches the intended control wiring as described in the control wiring diagram The LTM R controller Power LED If the LED is off the LTM R controller may not be receiving power The LTM R controller HMI LED If the LED is off the LTM R controller may not be communicating with the expansion module The expansion module Power LED If the LED is off the expansion module may not be receiving power Verify the load current transformer wiring and if the application includes external load current transformers also verify that wiring by checking the following Look at Action The external CT wiring diagram Visually confirm that the actual wiring matches the intended wiring as described in the wiring diagram The following load CT parameter settings using PowerSuite software Load CT Ratio Load CT Primary Load CT Secondary Load CT Multiple Passes Confirm that the Load CT Ratio parameter or the combination of Load CT Primary and Load CT Secondary parameters accurately reflect the intended load CT ratio Visually confirm that the Load
382. rs in a 1 HMI to many LTM R controllers 1 to many physical configuration The 1 to 1 and the 1 to many physical configurations each presents a unique e user interface LCD display and keypad e menu structure See p 348 for instructions on how to use the Magelis XBTN410 HMI to operate a single LTM R controller in a 1 to 1 configuration Note In a 1 to many physical configuration the Magelis XBTN410 HMI can operate up to 8 LTM R controllers that have previously been commissioned To commission an individual LTM R controller use either e the Magelis XBTN410 HMI programmed for 1 to 1 operations or e PowerSuite software 1639501 12 2006 391 Use What s in this Section This section contains the following topics Topic Page Physical Description 1 to many 393 Command Lines 1 to many 397 Navigating the Menu Structure 1 to many 398 Editing Values 1 to many 400 Executing a Value Write Command 1 to many 403 Menu Structure 1 to many 405 Menu Structure Home Page 1 to many 406 Menu Structure All LTM R Controllers and the HMI 1 to many 407 Motor Starter Page 1 to many 410 Settings 1 to many 412 Statistics 1 to many 419 Product ID 1 to many 422 Monitoring 1 to many 423 Fault Management 1 to many 424 Service Commands 1 to many 425 392 1639501 12 2006 Use Physical Description 1 to many
383. rved 549 UInt Motor temperature sensor fault threshold x 0 1 ohm 550 UInt Motor temperature sensor warning threshold x 0 1 ohm 551 552 Reserved 553 UInt Rapid cycle lockout timeout s 554 Reserved 555 UInt Current phase loss timeout 556 UInt Overcurrent fault timeout 557 UInt Overcurrent fault threshold 558 UInt Overcurrent warning threshold 559 Word Ground current fault configuration B bit O Ground current mode bits 1 15 Reserved 1639501 12 2006 483 Use Register Variable type Read Write variables Note p 455 560 UInt Ground CT primary 561 UInt Ground CT secondary 562 UInt External ground current fault timeout 563 UInt External ground current fault threshold 564 UInt External ground current warning threshold 565 UInt Motor nominal voltage 1 566 UInt Voltage phase imbalance fault timeout starting 1 567 UInt Voltage phase imbalance fault timeout running 1 568 UInt Voltage phase imbalance fault threshold 1 569 UInt Voltage phase imbalance warning threshold 1 570 UInt Overvoltage fault timeout 1 571 UInt Overvoltage fault threshold 1 572 UInt Overvoltage warning threshold 1 573 UInt Undervoltage fault timeout 1 574 UInt Undervoltage fault threshold 1 575 UInt Undervoltage warning threshold 1 576 UInt Voltage phase loss fault timeout 1 577 Word Voltage load shedding configuration 1 bit O Load shedding enable
384. ry Monitored Fault Warning Operating states Sys Config Ready NotReady Start Run Power Power Factor Over Power Factor Level X Under Power Factor Level X Overpower Level 5 X Underpower Level x X Monitored Not monitored 1639501 12 2006 217 Motor Control Functions Start Cycle Description The start cycle is the time period allowed for the motor to reach its normal FLC level The LTM R controller measures the start cycle in seconds beginning when it detects On Level Current defined as maximum phase current equal to 10 of FLC During the start cycle the LTM R controller compares e detected current against the configurable Long Start Fault Threshold parameter and e elapsed start cycle time against the configurable Long Start Fault Timeout parameter There are 3 start cycle scenarios each based on the number of times O 10r 2 maximum phase current crosses the Long Start Fault Threshold A description of each scenario is described below For information on the statistics the LTM R controller retains describing motor starts see p 66 For information about the long start protection function see p 149 Start Cycle During the start cycle the LTM R controller transitions through the motor s operating Operating States states as follows Step Event Operating state 1 LTM R controller receives a start comma
385. s Characteristic Value Unit Vac Accuracy 1 Resolution 1 Vac Refresh interval 100 ms 80 1639501 12 2006 Metering and Monitoring Functions Line Voltage Imbalance Description The line voltage imbalance function displays the maximum percentage of deviation between the average voltage and the individual line voltages Formulas The line voltage imbalance calculated measurement is based on the following formulas Calculated measurement Formula Imbalance ratio of voltage in phase 1 in Vi1 100 x V1 Vavg Vavg Imbalance ratio of voltage in phase 2 in Vi2 100 x V2 Vavg Vavg Imbalance ratio of voltage in phase 3 in Vi3 100 x V3 Vavg Vavg Voltage imbalance ratio for three phase in Vimb Max Vi1 Vi2 Vi3 Where Vavg average voltage e V1 L1 L2 voltage phase 1 to phase 2 voltage V2 L2 L3 voltage phase 2 to phase 3 voltage V3 L3 L1 voltage phase 3 to phase 1 voltage Characteristics The line voltage imbalance function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Unit Accuracy 1 5 Resolution 1 Refresh interval 100 ms 1639501 12 2006 81 Metering and Monitoring Functions Average Voltage Description Average Voltage Formulas Average Voltage Characteristics The LTM R controller calculates average voltage and prov
386. s Note p 455 456 Word System status register 2 bit O Auto reset active bit 1 Not significant bit 2 Fault power cycle requested bit 3 Motor restart time undefined bit 4 Rapid cycle lockout bit 5 Load shedding bit 6 Motor speed bit 7 HMI port comm loss bit 8 Network port comm loss bit 9 Motor transition lockout bits 10 15 Not significant 457 Word Logic inputs status bit O Logic input 1 bit 1 Logic input 2 bit 2 Logic input 3 bit 3 Logic input 4 bit 4 Logic input 5 bit 5 Logic input 6 bit 6 Logic input 7 bit 7 Logic input 8 bit 8 Logic input 9 bit 9 Logic input 10 bit 10 Logic input 11 bit 11 Logic input 12 bit 12 Logic input 13 bit 13 Logic input 14 bit 14 Logic input 15 bit 15 Logic input 16 478 1639501 12 2006 Use Register Variable type Read only variables Note p 455 458 Word Logic outputs status bit O Logic output 1 bit 1 Logic output 2 bit 2 Logic output 3 bit 3 Logic output 4 bit 4 Logic output 5 bit 5 Logic output 6 bit 6 Logic output 7 bit 7 Logic output 8 bits 8 15 Reserved 459 Word I O status bit O Input 1 bit 1 Input 2 bit 2 Input 3 bit 3 Input 4 bit 4 Input 5 bit 5 Input 6 bit 6 Input 7 bit 7 Input 8
387. s Single Winding Consequent Pole Application The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse local control wiring Diagram with diagram 3 Wire Impulse Local Control nares LOW LOW LOW LOW ara Stop Oo oO QIO HIGH ei 1639501 12 2006 547 NEMA Format Wiring Diagrams Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Local Control Application Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Local Control with Network Control Selectable Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Local Control with Network Control Selectable The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained local control wiring diagram L Low Speed L O H O Off o S H High Speed La H A2 l wren Oru Ons Iki fe ee BP tes A Ie The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse local control with network control selectable wiring diagram H Hand Local Control O Off s A Automatic Network Control H AST oo STOP A2 H O A Ton zite At 1 parad m9 o oO A3 T HIGH Meem een PEN KA S EO T ATS TC The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained local control with network control selectable wiring diagram H Hand Local Control O Off A Automatic Network Control
388. s shown Branch below or fault and warning LEDs that provide an easy to read status update of the monitored parameters PowerSuite Default File Edit Services Link Settings Tools View Help SHAS ee ES HSH Bena Tesys T Current Readings f Device Information f Settings f Statistics f Monitoring gt Voltage Current H Power Motor Temperature f5 10 Port Status gt Active Faults f Parameters i Logic Functions IAV 11 12 13 IGF Current phase imbalance PowerSuite Connected See p 434 for information about navigating the user interface 440 1639501 12 2006 Use Parameters Select a Parameters sub branch to display information about all editable or read Branch only parameters The Device Value column indicates the most recently reported value of the monitored parameter PowerSuite Default File Edit Services Link Settings Tools View Help Saas e SSF ercran f Tesys T Editable parameters Device Information E Settings 6 Statistics Index Address Register Name Unit Local Value Default Device Value Min Value Max Value Status Monitoring H Parameters Identification Unit 0 65535 All Parameters Network Port Commercial Reference1 Unit o 65535 Editable Parameters Network Port Commercial Reference2 Unit 65535 f Readonly Parameters Network Port Commercial Reference3 Unit 65535 Logic Functions Network Port Commercial Reference4
389. s CD DVD drive Navigate to and click on the file Setup exe The setup wizard begins 3 Follow the self explanatory instructions in the set up wizard Use the RS 232 to RS 485 converter with PC and LTM R communication cable to connect the LTM R controller or expansion module to the PC 1639501 12 2006 427 Use User Interface Overview PowerSuite software is a Microsoft Windows based program that provides an intuitive graphical user interface for the LTM R controller This software can be used in standalone mode to edit configuration files for the LTM R controller and save the edited files to your choice of media including your PC s hard drive or a CD connected to the Local HMI port of the LTM R controller or expansion module to e upload configuration files from the LTM R controller to the PowerSuite software for editing e download edited configuration files from the PowerSuite software to the LTM R controller monitor the operation of the LTM R controller expansion module and equipment maintain the LTM R controller e control the motor 428 1639501 12 2006 Use Example PowerSuite software presents the following user interface PowerSuite Default File Edit Services Link Settings Tools View Help EFEFEF Tesys T Current Readings gt Device Information f Settings i Statistics 3 f Monitoring f5 Voltage Current Power Motor Temp
390. s can be set directly in Amperes in the Settings menu of an HMI or in the Settings branch of PowerSuite software 3 Thermal Overload Definite Time D Time is set by the Long Start Fault Timeout parameter 1639501 12 2006 119 Motor Protection Functions Protection functions Parameters Setting range Factory setting Inverse thermal Motor trip class 5 30 in increments of 5 5 Fault threshold e FLC1 Motor full load current ratio or e FLC2 Motor high speed full load current ratio 5 100 of FLCmax in 1 increments 5 FLCmax Warning threshold 10 100 of thermal capacity in 1 increments 85 of thermal capacity Fault reset timeout 0 9999 s in 1 s increments 480s Fault reset threshold 35 95 of thermal capacity 75 of thermal capacity Definite time OC1 or OC22 5 100 of FLCmax 5 FLCmax in 1 increments Delay time D Time 1 200 s in increments of 1 s 10s Overcurrent 1 300 s in increments of 1 s 10s timeout O Time set via the Thermal Overload Fault Definite Timeout parameter Current phase imbalance Fault enable Enable Disable Enable Fault timeout starting 0 2 20 s in 0 1 s increments 0 7 s Fault timeout running 0 2 20 s in 0 1 s increments 5s Fault threshold 10 70 of the calculated imbalance 10 Warning enable Enable Disable Disable Warning threshold a calculated imbalance
391. s contain the following editable parameters and Reset Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Parameter name reference Local Control Control Local Channel Setting TransferMode Bumpless Transfer Mode Fault Reset Mode Fault Reset Mode Auto Group 1 Attempts Auto Reset Attempts Group 1 Setting Reset Time Auto Reset Group 1 Timeout Auto Group 2 Attempts Auto Reset Attempts Group 2 Setting Reset Time Auto Reset Group 2 Timeout Auto Group 3 Attempts Auto Reset Attempts Group 3 Setting Reset Time Auto Reset Group 3 Timeout 1639501 12 2006 365 Use Current The Current sub menu contains the following editable parameters Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Parameter name reference Current Th Overload Fault Enable Thermal Overload Fault Enable Trip Type Thermal Overload Mode FLC1 or OC1 Motor Full Load Current Ratio FLC2 or OC2 Motor High Speed Full Load Current Ratio Trip Class Motor Trip Class Aux Fan Motor Aux Fan Cooled Reset Level Thermal Overload Fault Reset Threshold Def O Time Thermal Overload Fault Definite Timeout Def D Time Long Start Fault Timeout Warn Enable Thermal Overload Warning Enable Warn Level Thermal Overload Warning Threshold Clr ThEnable Clear Thermal Capacity Level Command Curr Ph Imb Fault Enable Current Phase Imbalance Fault Enable Fault Level Current Phase Imbalance Fault Threshold FitTimeStart Current Phase Imbalance Fa
392. s count 91 371 n 0 373 420 469 n 1 374 421 470 n 2 375 471 n 3 376 472 n 4 377 473 type 102 122 166 167 169 172 328 365 warning 166 warning enable 122 365 413 warning threshold 122 170 173 365 413 N network port address 49 address setting 328 370 447 492 bad config 481 baud rate 49 baud rate setting 370 447 491 comm loss 478 comm loss timeout 49 370 418 447 566 1639501 12 2006 Index 491 commercial reference 378 communicating 481 compatibility code 465 config faults count 93 372 connected 481 endian setting 485 fallback setting 49 50 105 370 448 491 fault enable 49 105 370 418 faults count 93 372 firmware version 378 465 ID code 465 internal faults count 93 372 parity setting 49 370 447 491 self detecting 481 self testing 481 status 481 warning enable 49 105 370 nominal power 48 NTC analog 172 O on level current 218 operating modes 222 custom 252 independent 233 introduction 225 overload 230 reverser 237 two speed 247 two step 241 operating states 209 214 chart 215 not ready 214 protection functions 216 ready 214 run 214 start 214 operating time 111 371 467 over power factor 204 fault enable 124 205 369 417 fault threshold 124 205 369 417 485 fault timeout 124 205 369 417 485 faults count 91 372 warning enable 124 205 369 417 warning threshold 124 205
393. s the change in state from off to on level current to begin the Start state This delay allows the motor to draw current on startup required to overcome the inertia of the motor at rest Note Configuration of this protection function requires configuration of the Long Start protection function including the Long Start Fault Timeout parameter This function applies to both single phase and 3 phase motors The thermal overload definite time function includes the following features e 2 configurable threshold settings one setting OC1 is used for single speed motors both settings are required for 2 speed motors e OC1 Motor Full Load Current Ratio or e OC2 Motor High Speed Full Load Current Ratio e 1 time delay e Overcurrent Time O Time set by the Thermal Overload Fault Definite Timeout parameter e 2 function outputs e Thermal Overload Warning e Thermal Overload Fault e 2 counting statistics e Thermal Overload Faults Count e Thermal Overload Warnings Count 1 gt 2 3 gt Imax Imax gt Is p gt Permal overload warning Run state p gt K Definite time amp Imax Thermal overload fault e p 9 TU aan Imax gt Is T Definite time AND 11 Phase 1 current 12 Phase 2 current I3 Phase 3 current Is Fault and warning threshold OC1 or OC2 T Fault timeout 1639501 12 2006 139 Motor Protection Functions Para
394. scription Characteristics Frequency Description Characteristics The motor temperature sensor function displays the resistance value in ohms measured by resistance temperature sensor Refer to the product documentation for the specific temperature sensor being used One of three types of temperature sensors can be used e PTC Binary e PTC Analog e NTC Analog The motor temperature sensor function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Unit Q Accuracy 2 Resolution 0 10 Refresh interval 500 ms The frequency function displays the value measured based on the line voltage measurements The frequency function has the following characteristics Characteristic Value Unit Hz Accuracy 2 Resolution 0 1 Hz Refresh interval 30 ms 1639501 12 2006 79 Metering and Monitoring Functions Line to Line Voltages Description Characteristics The line to line voltages function displays the rms value of the phase to phase voltage V1 to V2 V2 to V3 and V3 to V1 e L1 L2 voltage phase 1 to phase 2 voltage e L2 L3 voltage phase 2 to phase 3 voltage e L3 L1 voltage phase 3 to phase 1 voltage The expansion module performs true rms calculations for line to line voltage up to the 7th harmonic Single phase voltage is measured from L1 and L3 The line to line voltages function has the following characteristic
395. select the first displayed numerical field for editing 3 Click the MOD button a second time to select the next displayed numerical field for editing After a setting is selected for editing you can use the and buttons to increment or decrement the entire value then use the T button to save the edit Lock Outs Addr 1 RpdCycl Time 0002Sec Starts PerHr 002 Lock Outs Addr 1 RpdCycl Time 0002Sec Starts PerHr 003 Lock Outs Addr 1 RpdCycl Time 0002Sec Starts PerHr 003 a 3 a 1639501 12 2006 401 Use Alternatively after a setting is highlighted you can use the and gt buttons to select only a single character within a field and edit that character as follows Lock Outs Addr 1 RpdCycl Time 0002Sec Starts PerHr 002 gt Lock Outs Addr 1 RpdCycl Time 0002Sec Starts PerHr p D Lock Outs Addr 1 RpdCycl Time 0002Sec J Starts PerHr poe Lock Outs Addr 1 B RpdCycl Time 0002Sec Starts PerHr 102 G Value List In a few cases a setting presents a list of value selections Selecting a value from Settings the list is very much like incrementing or decrementing the entire value of a numerical setting as shown below Auto Group 1 Number Resets Auto Reset Time 0050 Auto Group 2 Auto Group 1 Number Resets Reset Time 0050 Auto Group 2 Auto Group 1 Number Resets 4 Reset Time 0050 Auto Group 2 Lge
396. set statistics or settings for each LTM R controller XBTN reference page Describes communication settings application program file programming software version and HMI firmware version 3 Motor starter page For a selected LTM R controller e Displays dynamically changing parameter values e Self Test command e Links to its settings statistics and Product ID information 4 5 6 Settings page and sub pages Contains configurable settings for a selected LTM R controller Statistics page and sub pages Presents statistics for a selected LTM R controller including fault n 0 and fault n 1 history Product ID page LTM R controller and expansion module part and firmware identification 1639501 12 2006 405 Use Menu Structure Home Page 1 to many Overview The Home Page opens by default on HMI start up when the Magelis XBTN410 is connected to 1 or more LTM R controllers all of which are running without faults or warnings The Home page is the only page located in level 1 of the Magelis XBTN410 1 to many menu structure It is the starting place for navigation to all other levels and pages in the menu structure See p 398 for instructions on how to scroll through a page and navigate to other pages in the 1 to many menu structure Home Page The Home page contains the following menu items Menu item Description TeSys T VX X Page header with LTM R cont
397. settings page you can navigate to and edit the following power settings Level 4 Level 5 Parameter name Settings Addr 1 8 Power OVER POWER Fault Overpower Fault Enable Fault Level Overpower Fault Threshold Fault Time Overpower Fault Timeout Starting Warn Overpower Warning Enable Warn Level Overpower Warning Threshold UNDER POWER Fault Underpower Fault Enable Fault Level Underpower Fault Threshold Fault Time Underpower Fault Timeout Warn Underpower Warning Enable Warn Level Underpower Fault Enable Power continued OVER POWER FACTOR Fault Over Power Factor Fault Enable Fault Level Over Power Factor Fault Threshold Fault Time Over Power Factor Fault Timeout Warn Over Power Factor Warning Enable Warn Level Over Power Factor Warning Threshold UNDER POWER FACTOR Fault Under Power Factor Fault Enable Fault Level Under Power Factor Fault Threshold Fault Time Under Power Factor Fault Timeout Warn Under Power Factor Warning Enable Warn Level Under Power Factor Warning Threshold 1639501 12 2006 417 Use Load Shed Rapid Cycle Lock Outs Communication Loss Settings From the settings page you can navigate to and edit the following voltage load shed rapid cycle lockout and communication loss settings Level 4 Level 5 Parameter name Settings Addr 1 8 Load She
398. shooting The LTM R controller performs self diagnostic tests at power up and during operation These tests the errors they detect and the steps to take in response to a problem are described below Type Error Action Major Internal temperature fault This fault indicates a warning at 80 C a minor fault at 85 C and a major internal fault at 100 C Take steps to reduce ambient temperature including faults add an auxiliary cooling fan remount the LTM R controller and expansion module to provide more surrounding free space If the condition persists 1 Cycle power 2 Wait 30s 3 If the fault persists replace the LTM R controller CPU failure These faults indicate a hardware failure Take the following steps Program checksum error 1 Cycle power RAM test 2 Wait30s See 3 If the fault persists replace the LTM R controller Stack overflow Stack underflow Watchdog timeout Minor Invalid configuration error Indicates either a bad checksum Config checksum error or good internal Configuration checksum checksum but bad data Invalid config error Both caused by hardware faults EEROM error failure Take the following steps 1 Cycle power and wait 30 s 2 Reset the configuration settings to factory defaults 3 If the fault persists replace the LTM R controller Internal network These faults indicate a hardware failure Take the following steps communications failure 1 Cycle power and w
399. source may be enabled to direct the outputs You can use the custom logic editor to add one or more additional control sources 210 1639501 12 2006 Motor Control Functions Local Terminal In Local Terminal Strip control mode the LTM R controller commands its outputs Strip according to the state of its inputs This is the default control mode setting when logic input 1 6 is inactive The following conditions apply to Local Terminal Strip control mode e Any terminal inputs assigned to start and stop commands control the outputs according to the motor operating mode e When a logic input is active it sets a bit in the Logic Input number 1 to 6 parameter for monitoring by the PLC e HMI and PLC network start commands are ignored Local HMI In Local HMI control mode the LTM R controller commands its outputs in response to start and stop commands received from an HMI device connected to the Local HMI port via theLocal HMI RJ45 connector on either the LTM R controller or the expansion module The following conditions apply to Local HMI control mode e Any HMI start and stop commands control the outputs according to the motor operating mode e All terminal inputs when active place bits into the Controller Input number 1 to 6 parameter for monitoring by the PLC e Remote network start commands and local terminal start commands are ignored Network In Network control mode a remote PLC sends commands t
400. st gt AND P o L P lt Ps2 T o Underpower fault gt Run state p AND Vavg Average rms voltage lavg Average rms current P Power Ps1 Warning threshold Ps2 Fault threshold T Fault timeout The underpower function has the following parameters in 1 increments Parameters Setting range Factory setting Fault enable Enable Disable Disable Fault timeout 1 100 s in 1 s increments 60 s Fault threshold 20 800 of Motor nominal power 20 in 1 increments Warning enable Enable Disable Disable Warning threshold 20 800 of Motor nominal power 30 The underpower function has the following characteristics Characteristics Value Hysteresis 105 of Fault threshold or Warning threshold Accuracy 5 196 1639501 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Example The following diagram describes the occurrence of an underpower fault P A fault timeout Ps2 Ps2 Underpower fault threshold 1639501 12 2006 197 Motor Protection Functions Overpower Description Functional Characteristics The overpower function signals e a warning when the value of active power exceeds a set threshold e a fault when the value of active power exceeds a separately set threshold and remains above that threshold for a set period of time This function has a single fault time delay Both the fault and wa
401. t occurring during run state lo Start state i Run state Fault condition q gt lOS2 g sefes easels oe oN sees eee BP ae oe es eee ee Scere ee etek Fault timeout aga 10s2 External ground current fault threshold 1639501 12 2006 165 Motor Protection Functions Motor Temperature Sensor Overview The LTM R controller has 2 terminals T1 and T2 that can be connected to a motor temperature sensing element to provide protection for motor windings by detecting high temperature conditions that could lead to damage or degradation These protections are activated when the Motor Temp Sensor Type parameter is set to one of the following settings e PTC Binary e PTC Analog e NTC Analog Only one of these motor protection sensing elements can be enabled at a time Note Motor temperature sensor protection is based in ohms PTC Binary protection thresholds are pre set to IEC standards and are non configurable PTC Analog and NTC Analog protection functions may require that you scale the resistance value to the corresponding threshold level in degrees based on the properties of the selected sensing element When a sensor type is changed the LTM R controllers motor temperature sensing configuration settings revert to their default values If a sensor type is replaced with another sensor of the same type the setting values are retained This function applies to both single phase and 3 ph
402. t in memory Logic outputs O 1 and O 2 deactivate and the motor stops when control voltage becomes too low Logic outputs O 1 0 2 and 0 4 deactivate and the motor stops in response to a diagnostic error Note See Control Wiring and Fault Management p 228 for information about the interaction between e the LTM R controllers predefined control logic and e the control wiring an example of which appears in the following diagrams 1639501 12 2006 247 Motor Control Functions Two Speed The following wiring diagram represents a simplified example of the LTM R controller Dahlander in a two speed Dahlander consequent pole local control 3 wire impulse application Application Diagram J Low High Speed Speed Stop E e E TOTA oTo OTOT Oo TOTO me Temte o O 1 A Dahlander application requires two sets of wires passing through the CT windows The LTM R controller can also be placed upstream of the contactors If this is the case and if the Dahlander motor is used in variable torque mode all the wires downstream of the contactors must be the same size 2 The N C interlock contacts KM1 and KM2 are not mandatory because the LTM R controller firmware interlocks O 1 and O 2 For additional examples of two speed Dahlander IEC diagrams see p 527 For examples of two speed Dahlander NEMA diagrams see p 547
403. t Timeout counts down and the utilized thermal capacity falls below the Fault Reset Threshold level If the fault includes a reset timeout setting the timeout must fully count down before a reset command executes Internal device faults can be reset only by cycling power LTM R controller memory does not retain diagnostic and wiring faults after a power loss but does retain all other faults after a power loss Internal diagnostic and wiring faults cannot be automatically reset All wiring and diagnostic faults can be manually reset by local reset methods For diagnostic faults network reset commands are valid only in remote network control mode For wiring faults network reset commands are not valid in any control mode The LTM R controller fault monitoring functions save the status of communications monitoring and motor protection faults on a power loss so that these faults must be acknowledged and reset as part of an overall motor maintenance strategy Protection category LTM R controller LTM R controller with expansion module Saved on power loss Monitored fault Diagnostic Run Command Check Stop Command Check Run Check Back Stop Check Back Wiring configuration errors PTC connection lt XxX XK Xx x Xx CT Reversal Voltage Phase Reversal Current Phase Reversal X Voltage Phase Loss Phase Configuration Internal Stack Overflow
404. t fault timeout 624 Ulnt Long start fault threshold 625 Reserved 626 Ulnt HMI display contrast setting 627 Ulnt Contactor rating 628 Ulnt Load CT primary B 629 Ulnt Load CT secondary B 630 Ulnt Load CT multiple passes B 486 1639501 12 2006 Use Register Variable type Read Write variables Note p 455 631 Word Fault enable register 1 bits 0 1 Reserved bit 2 Ground current fault enable bit 3 Thermal overload fault enable bit 4 Long start fault enable bit 5 Jam fault enable bit 6 Current phase imbalance fault enable bit 7 Undercurrent fault enable bit 8 Reserved bit 9 Test fault enable bit 10 HMI port fault enable bits 11 14 Reserved bit 15 Network port fault enable 632 Word Warning enable register 1 bit O Not significant bit 1 Reserved bit 2 Ground current warning enable bit 3 Thermal overload warning enable bit 4 Reserved bit 5 Jam warning enable bit 6 Current phase imbalance warning enable bit 7 Undercurrent warning enable bits 8 9 Reserved bit 10 HMI port warning enable bit 11 Controller internal temperature warning enable bits 12 14 Reserved bit 15 Network port warning enable 1639501 12 2006 487 Use Register Variable type Read Write variables Note p 455 633 Word Fault enabl
405. t in fallback no power and network module PLC Comm yellow Communication activity on flashing yellow 0 2 s on 1 0 s off the network bus network bus communication e Off no network bus communication Expansion Use the 5 LEDs on the face of the expansion module to monitor its operating and Module LEDs communications state as follows LED Color Describes Indicates Power green or Module power or internal e Solid green power on with no red fault condition internal faults e Solid red power on with internal faults e Off power off Digital yellow State of input e On input activated Inputs 1 7 e Off input not activated 1 8 1 9 and 1 10 1639501 12 2006 341 Use Test Reset Use the Test Reset button to perform the following functions Function Description Procedure Fault reset Resets all faults that can be reset Press the button and release See p 254 for more information within 3 s about resetting faults Self test See Performs a self test if Press and hold the button for p 503 motor is stopped more than 3 s up to and including no faults exist 15s e self test function is enabled Induce a fault Puts the LTM R controller into Press and hold the button down internal fault condition for more than 15 s 342 1639501 12 2006 Use 8 3 Configuring the Magelis XBTN410 At a Glance Summary The Magelis XBTN410 HMI can be
406. t settings command bits 5 15 Reserved 706 709 Reserved 710 799 Forbidden 1639501 12 2006 493 Use User Map Variables User Map User Map variables are described below Variables User map variable groups Registers User Map addresses 800 to 899 User Map values 900 to 999 Register Variable type Read Write variables Note p 455 800 898 Word 99 User map addresses setting 899 Reserved Register Variable type Read Write variables Note p 455 900 998 Word 99 User map values 999 Reserved 494 1639501 12 2006 Use Custom Logic Variables Custom Logic Variables Custom logic variables are described below Register Variable type Read only variables Note p 455 1200 Word Custom logic status register bit O Custom logic run bit 1 Custom logic stop bit 2 Custom logic reset bit 3 Reserved bit 4 Custom logic transition bit 5 Custom logic phase reverse bit 6 Custom logic network control bit 7 Custom logic FLC selection bit 8 Custom logic external fault bit 9 Custom logic auxiliary 1 LED bit 10 Custom logic auxiliary 2 LED bit 11 Custom logic stop LED bit 12 Custom logic LO1 bit 13 Custom logic LO2 bit 14 Custom logic LO3 bit 15 Custom logic LO4 1201 Word Custom logic version 1202 Wo
407. table lists the equipment required to support the control functions of the motor management system Control functions LTM R controller LTM R controller with expansion module Motor control modes Local terminal strip X X Local HMI X X Network X X Operating mode Overload X X Independent X X Reverser X X Two step X X Two speed X X Fault Management Manual reset X X Automatic reset X X Remote reset X X X the functionality is available with the units indicated the functionality is not available with the units indicated 30 1639501 12 2006 Introduction Physical Description of the LTM R Motor Management Controller with Modbus Protocol Overview The microprocessor based LTM R controller provides control protection and monitoring for single phase and 3 phase AC induction motors Phase Current The LTM R controller includes internal current transformers for measuring the motor Inputs load phase current directly from the motor load power cables or from secondaries of external current transformers TR 0 T 1 Windows for phase current measurement 1639501 12 2006 31 Introduction Features of the Front Face Test Reset Button HMI Device Expansion Module PC Port Network Port The LTM R controller front face includes the following features X
408. tactors If this is the case all the wires downstream of the contactors must be the same size 2 The N C interlock contacts KM1 and KM2 are not mandatory because the controller firmware interlocks O 1 and O 2 1639501 12 2006 529 IEC Format Wiring Diagrams Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Local Control Application Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Local Control with Network Control Selectable Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Local control with Network Control Selectable The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained local control wiring diagram LS Low Speed O Off HS High Speed The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse local control with network control selectable wiring diagram L Local control O Off N Network control LS Low Speed HS High Speed The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained local control with network control selectable wiring diagram L Local control O Off N Network control LS Low Speed HS High Speed 530 1639501 12 2006 NEMA Format Wiring Diagrams NEMA Wiring Diagrams Overview This section contains the wiring diagrams corresponding to the 5 pre configured operating modes Overload Monitoring of the motor load where control start stop of the motor load is achiev
409. tacts in the least favorable direction 4 NOTICE This product has been designed for use in environment A Use of this product in environment B may cause unwanted electromagnetic disturbance which may require the implementation of adequate mitigation measures 42 1639501 12 2006 Introduction Fire resistance According to UL 94 V2 According to IEC 695 2 1 Parts supporting live components 960 C 1760 F other components 650 C 1202 F Half sine mechanical shock pulse 11 ms According to CEI 60068 2 278 30 g 3 axis and 6 directions Resistance to According to CEI 60068 2 6 5 gn vibration Immunity to According to EN61000 4 2 Through air 8 kV Level 3 electrostatic discharge Over surface 6 kV Level 3 Immunity to radiated fields According toEN61000 4 3 10V m Level 3 Immunity to fast transient bursts According to EN61000 4 4 All circuits 4 kV Level 4 2 kV on all other circuits Immunity to radioelectric fields According to EN61000 4 64 10 V rms Level 3 Surge Immunity According to IEC EN 61000 4 5 Common mode Differential mode 100 240 Vac inputs 4kV 129 2 kV 29 24 V dc inputs 1 kV 129 0 5 kV 2 Q Communication 1 kV 12 Q 1 Some certifications are in progress 2 The maximum rated ambient temperature of the expansion module depends on the installation spacing with the LTM R
410. tage Phase Imbalance Fault Timeout Running All Faults Voltage Phase Imbalance Warning Enable Overload Fits Voltage Phase Imbalance Warning Threshold Overload Warn Curr Imb Fits Voltage Phase Loss Fault Enable LongStart Fits Voltage Phase Loss Fault Timeout UnderCurr Flts Voltage Phase Loss Warning Enable Ground Faults Voltage Phase Reversal Fault Enable HMI Loss Fits Ntwk Int Fits Overvoltage Fault Enable Ntwk Cnfg Fits Overvoltage Fault Threshold Ntwk Port Flts Overvoltage Fault Timeout Internal Fits Overvoltage Warning Enable InterPort Fits Overvoltage Warning Threshold 1639501 12 2006 419 Use Level 4 Level 5 Parameter name Statistics Addr 1 8 Fault n 0 Date Date And Time n 0 Time Date And Time n 0 FLC Ratio Motor Full Load Current Ratio n 0 FLC Max Motor Full Load Current Max n 0 Avg Current Average Current n 0 L1 Current L1 Current Ratio n 0 L2 Current L2 Current Ratio n 0 L3 Current L3 Current Ratio n 0 GRCurr Ground Current Ratio n 0 Curr Imbalance Current Phase Imbalance n 0 Th Capacity Thermal Capacity Level n 0 Avg Voltage Average Voltage n 0 L1 L2 Voltage L1 L2 Voltage n 0 L2 L3 Voltage L2 L3 Voltage n 0 L3 L1 Voltage L3 L1 Voltage n 0 Volt Imbalance Voltage Phase Imbalance n 0 Frequency Frequency n 0
411. te The motor must be turned off before you can execute the Go to Sys Config sub menu command When you execute the Sys Config command the LTM R controller returns to its initialized state The Sys Config menu parameters must be configured before the LTM R controller can resume operations For information about the Sys Config menu see p 327 The Clear commands perform the following tasks Selection Clears All all editable settings and restores their values to the factory default settings e all statistics and resets their values to 0 Settings all editable settings and restores their values to the factory default settings Network Port only settings for the network port and restores their values to the factory defaults Statistics all statistics and resets their values to 0 Th Cap Level the following parameters e Thermal Capacity Level e Rapid Cycle Lockout Timeout e Thermal Overload Fault Reset See the warning below 1 Execution of the Clear All Command returns the SysConfig menu settings to their factory default settings and requires a re configuration of the Sys Config menu A WARNING LOSS OF MOTOR PROTECTION Clearing the thermal capacity level inhibits thermal protection and can cause equipment overheating and fire Continued operation with inhibited thermal protection should be limited to applications where immediate restart is vital Failure to follow t
412. tection and can cause equipment overheating and fire Continued operation with inhibited thermal protection should be limited to applications where immediate restart is vital Failure to follow this instruction can result in death serious injury or equipment damage The Clear Thermal Capacity Level Command will not reset the fault response Instead e only an action external to the LTM R controller for example a reduction in the motor load can clear the fault condition e only a reset command from the valid reset means configured in the Fault Reset Mode parameter will reset the fault response A WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION A reset command may re start the motor if the LTM R controller is used in a 2 wire control circuit Equipment operation must conform to local and national safety regulations and codes Failure to follow this instruction can result in death serious injury or equipment damage 132 1639501 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Operation The thermal overload inverse thermal protection function is based on a thermal model of the motor that combines two thermal images e acopper based image representing the thermal state of the stator and rotor windings and e aniron based image representing the thermal state of the motor frame Using measured current and the input motor trip class setting the LTM R controller considers only the highest thermal state iron or c
413. ter reaction to prevent system downtime The system offers diagnostic and statistics functions and configurable warnings and faults allowing better prediction of component maintenance and provides data to continuously improve the entire system 16 1639501 12 2006 Introduction Examples of Supported Machine Segments The motor management system supports the following machine segments Machine segment Examples Process and special machine segments Water and waste water treatment e water treatment blowers and agitators Metal Minerals and Mining e cement glass e steel e ore extraction Oil and gas e oil and gas processing e petrochemical e refinery offshore platform Microelectronic Pharmaceutical Chemical industry cosmetics e detergents e fertilizers paint Transportation industry e automotive transfer lines e airports Other industry e tunnel machines cranes Complex machine segments Includes highly automated or coordinated machines used in pumping systems paper conversion e printing lines e HVAC 1639501 12 2006 17 Introduction Supported The motor management system supports the following industries and associated Industries business sectors Industry Sectors Application Building e office buildings Control and manage the building facilities e shopping centers e critical HVAC systems e industrial buildings e w
414. threshold value for lower limit thresholds The following diagram describes the logic result of measurement processing S when hysteresis is applied to an upper limit threshold A 152 acn ae 1 d x Is2 gt Y 0 a d hysteresis percentage 128 1639501 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions 4 2 Thermal and Current Motor Protection Functions At a Glance Summary This section describes the thermal and current motor protection functions of the LTM R controller What s in this This section contains the following topics Section Topic Page Thermal Overload 130 Thermal Overload Inverse Thermal 131 Thermal Overload Definite Time 138 Current Phase Imbalance 141 Current Phase Loss 145 Current Phase Reversal 148 Long Start 149 Jam 152 Undercurrent 154 Overcurrent 156 Ground Current 159 Internal Ground Current 160 External Ground Current 163 Motor Temperature Sensor 166 Motor Temperature Sensor PTC Binary 167 Motor Temperature Sensor PTC Analog 169 Motor Temperature Sensor NTC Analog 172 Rapid Cycle Lockout 174 1639501 12 2006 129 Motor Protection Functions Thermal Overload Overview Parameter Settings The LTM R controller can be configured to provide thermal protection by selecting one of the following settings e Inverse Thermal default e Definite Time Each setting represe
415. tics The global statistics are described below Register Variable type Read only variables Note p 455 100 101 Not significant 102 Ulnt Ground current faults count 103 Ulnt Thermal overload faults count 104 Ulnt Long start faults count 105 Ulnt Jam faults count 106 Ulnt Current phase imbalance faults count 107 Ulnt Undercurrent faults count 109 Ulnt HMI port faults count 110 Ulnt Controller internal faults count 111 Ulnt Internal port faults count 112 Ulnt Network port internal faults count 113 Ulnt Network port config faults count 114 Ulnt Network port faults count 115 Ulnt Auto reset count 116 Ulnt Thermal overload warnings count 117 118 UDint Motor starts count 119 120 UDint Operating time s 121 Int Controller internal temperature max C 1639501 12 2006 467 Use LTM Monitoring The LTM monitoring statistics are described below Statistics Register Variable type Read only variables Note p 455 122 Ulnt Faults count 123 Ulnt Warnings count 124 125 UDint Motor LO1 starts count 126 127 UDint Motor LO2 starts count 128 Ulnt Diagnostic faults count 129 Ulnt Reserved 130 Ulnt Overcurrent faults count 131 Ulnt Current phase loss faults count 132 Ulnt Motor temperature sensor faults count 133 Ulnt Voltage phase imbalance faults count 1 134 Ulnt Voltage ph
416. tion Verifying hardware Check hardware wiring Verifying the configuration Confirm accurate parameter settings 1639501 12 2006 317 Commissioning Required Information Required Information The following information is required to commission the LTM R controller and expansion module The selection column shows the specific values or the range supported by the LTM R controller and expansion module Commissioning information Specific information or parameter Selections LTM R controller type used in application Control Voltage 100 240 Vac 24 Vdc Current Range 8A 27A 100A Network Protocol Modbus DeviceNet CANopen Profibus Expansion module type used in application Control Voltage None 100 240 Vac 24 Vdc HMI Type used in application Magelis 1 to 1 PowerSuite software Network Is a network used in application No Yes Motor settings Full Load Current Max FLCmax 0 4 100 A without external CTs or 0 4 810 A with external CTs Motor Trip Class 5 30 in increments of 5 Motor Phases Single phase motor 3 phase motor Motor Nominal Voltage 110 690 V Controller operating mode Motor Operating Mode Overload Independent Reverser Two Step Two Speed Control wiring type Motor Operating Mode 2 wire maintained 3 wire impulse 318 1639501 12
417. tion Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Local Control with Network Control Selectable Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Local Control with Network Control Selectable The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained local control wiring diagram Start Stop The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse local control with network control selectable wiring diagram L Local control O Off N Network control LON The following application diagram features a 2 wire maintained local control with network control selectable wiring diagram L Local control O Off N Network control 524 1639501 12 2006 IEC Format Wiring Diagrams Two Step Autotransformer Mode Wiring Diagrams Application The following application diagram features a 3 wire impulse local control wiring Diagram with diagram 3 Wire Impulse Local Control 30 Stop E E KM1 KM3 ton 1 KM2 KM1 KM3 1 The N C interlock contacts KM1 and KM3 are not mandatory because the controller electronically interlocks O 1 and O 2 1639501 12 2006 525 IEC Format Wiring Diagrams Application Diagram with 2 Wire Maintained Local Control Application Diagram with 3 Wire Impulse Local Control with Network Control Selectable Applicat
418. tion Parameter name Protection Settings Restores all protection parameters Clear Controller Settings to their factory default settings Command Network Port Settings Restores network port parameters Clear Network Port Settings to their factory default settings Command Statistics Sets all historical statistics to 0 Clear Statistics Command Thermal Capacity Level Sets to 0 the Thermal Capacity Level Clear Thermal Capacity and Rapid Cycle Lockout Timeout Level Command parameters See the warning below A WARNING LOSS OF MOTOR PROTECTION Clearing the thermal capacity level inhibits thermal protection and can cause equipment overheating and fire Continued operation with inhibited thermal protection should be limited to applications where immediate restart is vital Failure to follow this instruction can result in death serious injury or equipment damage 444 1639501 12 2006 Use 8 7 Using the Modbus Communication Network Introduction to the Modbus Communication Network Overview This section describes how to use the controller via the network port using Modbus What s in this This section contains the following topics Section Topic Page Modbus Protocol Principle 446 Configuration of the LTM R Modbus Network Port 447 Communication Parameter Clear Commands 448 Simplified Control and Monitoring 450 Modbus Requ
419. tion This section provides a summary of characteristics for the measurement statistics diagnostic fault motor statistics thermal overload and system operating functions available using the LTM R controller and the expansion module What s in this This section contains the following topics Section Topic Page Accessing Metering Functions and Parameter Data 62 Measurements 63 Fault and Warning Counters 64 System and Device Monitoring Faults 65 Motor History 66 Thermal Overload Statistics 67 System Operating Status 67 1639501 12 2006 61 Metering and Monitoring Functions Accessing Metering Functions and Parameter Data HMI Tools Customized Functions and Data Use any of the following user interface tools to monitor the metering functions and parameters included in a pre defined operating mode e aPC with PowerSuite software e the Magelis XBTN410 HMI device e aPLC via the remote communication link For more information about pre defined operating modes see p 222 In addition to monitoring metering functions and parameters incorporated in a pre defined operating mode you can use the Custom Logic Editor in PowerSuite software to create a new custom operating mode To create a custom operating mode select any pre defined operating mode then edit its code to meet the needs of your application Using the Custom Logic Editor you can e access and read the dat
420. tion includes the following features Characteristics Accessible in 3 control modes Local Terminal Strip Local HMI and Network The LTM R controller does not manage the relationship between logic outputs 0 1 and O 2 In local terminal strip control mode logic input 1 1 controls logic output O 1 and logic input 1 2 controls logic output O 2 In network or local HMI control modes the Motor Run Forward Command parameter controls logic output O 1 and the Logic Output 23 Command parameter controls logic output O 2 Logic input 1 3 is not used in the control circuit but can be configured to set a bit in memory Logic outputs O 1 and O 2 deactivate and the motor stops when control voltage becomes too low Logic outputs O 1 and 0 4 deactivate and the motor stops in response to a diagnostic error Note See Control Wiring and Fault Management p 228 for information about the interaction between e the LTM R controller s predefined control logic and e the control wiring an example of which appears in the following diagram 1639501 12 2006 233 Motor Control Functions Independent The following wiring diagram represents a simplified example of the LTM R Application controller in an independent local control 3 wire impulse application Diagram 30 SF poses eee V KM1 zT Start Stop For additional examples of independent operating mode IEC diagrams see p
421. tional input terminals e 3 phase voltage inputs e 4 additional discrete logic inputs Note Logic inputs are externally powered according to input voltage ratings Expansion module Expansion module connected to an LTM R controller 1639501 12 2006 35 Introduction Expansion The expansion module front face includes the following features Module Front Face ITO OOO LV1 LV2 LV3 MEE ES LTMEV40FM O E Bites a sig err 7 18 19 110 I 7 C7 1 8 C8 19 C91 10C10 OQOOO0O0 000 Port with RJ45 connector to HMI or PC Port with RJ45 connector to LTM R controller Status indicating LEDs Plug in terminal voltage inputs Plug in terminal logic inputs and common ORON HMI PC Port This port with an RJ45 connector connects the expansion module to the following devices e a PC running PowerSuite software e a Magelis XBTN410 LTM R Controller This port connects the expansion module to the LTM R controller using an RJ45 connector Port 36 1639501 12 2006 Introduction LEDs Plug in Terminals and Pin Assignments The expansion module LEDs indicate the following behaviors
422. tions Fault and Warning Codes The Fault Code parameter describes the type of fault or warning that most recently occurred Each fault or warning type is represented by a number The following table maps Fault Code values to fault and warning types Fault Code Description Fault Warning 0 No fault or warning X X 3 Ground current X X 4 Thermal overload X X 5 Long start X X 6 Jam Xx xX 7 Current phase imbalance X X 8 Undercurrent Xx xX 10 Test X X 11 HMI port error X X 12 HMI port communication loss X X 13 Network port internal error X X 18 Diagnostic X X 19 Connection X xX 20 Overcurrent X X 21 Current phase loss X X 22 Current phase reversal X X 23 Motor temperature sensor X X 24 Voltage phase imbalance X X 25 Voltage phase loss X xX 26 Voltage phase reversal X X 27 Undervoltage X X 28 Overvoltage X X 29 Underpower X X 30 Overpower X X 31 Under power factor X X 32 Over power factor X X 33 Load shedding X X Fault or Warning reported Fault or Warning not reported 1639501 12 2006 267 Motor Control Functions Fault Code Description Fault Warning 51 Controller internal temperature error X 55 Controller internal error stack overflow X 56 Controller internal error RAM error x 57 Controller internal error ROM checksum error X 58 Cont
423. tive measures including e Scheduling periodic examinations of battery packs fuses power strips batteries surge suppressors and power supplies e Keeping the LTM R controller the panel and all devices clean An unobstructed flow of air will prevent dust build up which can lead to a short circuit condition e Remaining alert to the possibility of other equipment producing electromagnetic radiation Be sure no other devices cause electromagnetic interference with the LTM R controller Perform a self test by either e holding down the Test Reset button on the face of the LTM R controller for more than 3 seconds and up to 15 seconds or e setting the Self Test Command parameter A self test can be performed only if e motor is off e no faults exist e the Self Test Enable parameter is set Note Performing a self test when the motor is on triggers a Thermal Overload fault The LTM R controller performs the following checks during a self test e watchdog check e RAM check e recalibration of the thermal memory time constant which keeps track of time while the LTM R controller is not powered If any of the above tests fails a major internal fault occurs If not the self test continues and the LTM R controller performs e expansion module test if it is connected to an expansion module If this test fails e the LTM R controller experiences a minor internal fault e the expansion module experiences an internal
424. tor Protection Functions Current Phase Imbalance Description The current phase imbalance function signals e a warning when the current in any phase differs by more than a set percentage from the average current in all 3 phases e a fault when the current in any phase differs by more than a separately set percentage from the average current in all 3 phases for a set period of time A CAUTION RISK OF MOTOR OVERHEATING The Current Phase Imbalance Fault Threshold must be properly set to protect the wiring and motor equipment from harm caused by motor overheating The setting you input must conform to national and local safety regulations and codes e Refer to the motor manufacturer s instructions before setting this parameter Failure to follow this instruction can result in injury or equipment damage Note Use this function to detect and guard against smaller current phase imbalances For larger imbalances in excess of 80 of the average current in all 3 phases use the current phase loss motor protection function This function has two adjustable fault time delays e one applies to current imbalances occurring while the motor is in start state and e one applies to current imbalances occurring after startup while the motor is in run state Both timers begin if the imbalance is detected in start state The function identifies the phase causing a current imbalance If the maximum deviation
425. troller to a fault include the following e output O 4 contacts e contact 95 96 is open e contact 97 98 is closed e fault LED is On and illuminates a steady red e fault status bits are set in a fault parameter e atext message is displayed in an HMI screen if an HMI is attached e a fault status indicator is displayed in the configuration software The LTM R controller counts and records the number of faults for each protection function After a fault has occurred merely resolving the underlying condition does not clear the fault To clear the fault the LTM R controller must be reset See p 254 Warnings A warning is a less serious though still undesirable operating condition A warning indicates corrective action may be required to prevent a problem condition from occurring If left unresolved a warning may lead to a fault condition Warning related parameters can be configured for most protection functions The response of the LTM R controller to a warning include the following e output O 3 is closed e fault LED flashes red 2 times per second e warning status bits are set in a warning parameter e atext message is displayed in an HMI screen if attached e a warning status indicator is displayed in the configuration software Note For some protection functions warning detection shares the same threshold as fault detection For other protection functions warning detection has a separate warning threshold Th
426. ture Sensor Wiring Error e e Current Phase Reversal Error Wiring diagnostics are enabled using the following parameters Detection Protection Enabling parameters Setting range Factory setting Fault reported CT Reversal Wiring Fault Enable e Yes No Wiring Fault e No Phase Configuration e Motor Phases if set to single phase single phase 3 phase Wiring Fault 3 phase Motor Temperature e Motor Temp Sensor Type if setto None None Wiring Fault Sensor Wiring a sensor type and not to None e PTC binary e PTC analog e NTC analog Voltage Phase Voltage Phase Reversal Fault Enable e Yes No Voltage Phase Reversal e No Reversal Fault Current Phase Reversal Current Phase Reversal Fault Enable e Yes No Current Phase e No Reversal Fault CT Reversal Error Phase Configuration Error When individual external load CTs are used they must all be installed in the same direction The LTM R controller checks the CT wiring and reports an error if it detects one of the current transformers is wired backwards when compared to the others This function can be enabled and disabled The LTM R controller checks all 3 motor phases for On Level current then checks the Motor Phases parameter setting The LTM R controller reports an error if it detects current in phase 2 if the LTM R controller is configured for single phase operation This function is enabled when the LTM R controller is
427. ty is not available with the units indicated 1 Note The accuracy levels presented in this table are typical accuracy levels Actual accuracy levels may be lower or greater than these values 1639501 12 2006 63 Metering and Monitoring Functions Fault and Warning Counters Characteristics The fault and warning counting functions have the following characteristics Statistics LTM R controller LTM R controller with Value saved on expansion module power loss All Faults counter X X Yes All Warnings counter X X Yes Auto Resets counter X X Yes Protection Fault counters X X Yes Control Command Diagnostic Fault counter X X Yes Wiring Error counters X X Yes Communication Loss Faults counter X X Yes Internal Faults counter X X Yes Fault history X X Yes X the functionality is available with the units indicated the functionality is not available with the units indicated 64 1639501 12 2006 Metering and Monitoring Functions System and Device Monitoring Faults Characteristics The system and device monitoring faults have the following characteristics Diagnostic faults LTM R LTM R controller with Value saved on controller expansion module power loss Internal watchdog faults X X No Controller internal temperature X X No Temperature sensor connections X X No Current transformer connections X X No V
428. u The Statistics menu contains the following Level 3 sub menus History Counters Fault n O Fault n 1 Fault n 2 Fault n 3 Fault n 4 History and The History and Counters sub menus contain the following read only parameters Counters Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Parameter name reference History CntlrTempMax Controller Internal Temperature Max Oper Time Operating Time Motor Starts Motor Starts Count LO1 Starts Motor LO1 Starts Count LO2 Starts Motor LO2 Starts Count LastStartDur Motor Last Start Duration LastStrtCurr Motor Last Start Current Ratio Counters All Faults Faults Count All Warnings Warnings Count Auto Resets Auto Reset Count Protection Th Ovid Fit Thermal Overload Faults Count Th Ovid Warn Thermal Overload Warnings Count TempSens Fit Motor Temp Sensor Faults Count Curr Imb Fit Current Phase Imbalance Faults Count C PhLossFIt Current Phase Loss Faults Count LongStartFlt Long Start Faults Count Jam Fault Jam Faults Count UnderCurrFit Undercurrent Faults Count OverCurrFlt Overcurrent Faults Count GroundFault Ground Current Faults Count VoltPhImbFIit Voltage Phase Imbalance Faults Count 1639501 12 2006 371 Use Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Parameter name reference Counters Protection V PhLossFIt Voltage Phase Loss Faults Count continued continued UnderVoltFit Undervolt
429. ult Timeout Starting FitTimeRun Current Phase Imbalance Fault Timeout Running Warn Enable Current Phase Imbalance Warning Enable Warn Level Current Phase Imbalance Warning Threshold 366 1639501 12 2006 Use Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Parameter name reference Current continued Curr Ph Loss Fault Enable Current Phase Loss Fault Enable Fault Time Current Phase Loss Fault Timeout Warn Enable Current Phase Loss Warning Enable Curr Ph Rev Fault Enable Current Phase Reversal Fault Enable Long Start Fault Enable Long Start Fault Enable Fault Level Long Start Fault Threshold Fault Time Long Start Fault Timeout Jam Fault Enable Jam Fault Enable Fault Level Jam Fault Threshold Fault Time Jam Fault Timeout Warn Enable Jam Warning Enable Warn Level Jam Warning Threshold UnderCurrent Fault Enable Undercurrent Fault Enable Fault Level Undercurrent Fault Threshold Fault Time Undercurrent Fault Timeout Warn Enable Undercurrent Warning Enable Warn Level Undercurrent Warning Threshold Current continued OverCurrent Fault Enable Overcurrent Fault Enable Fault Level Overcurrent Fault Threshold Fault Time Overcurrent Fault Timeout Warn Enable Overcurrent Warning Enable Warn Level Overcurrent Warning Threshold Ground Curr Fault Enable Ground Current Fault Enable Gr CT Mode Ground Current Mode Fault Level External Ground Current
430. ult enable 124 196 369 417 fault threshold 124 196 369 417 484 fault timeout 124 196 369 417 484 faults count 91 372 warning enable 124 196 369 417 warning threshold 124 196 369 417 484 undervoltage 185 fault enable 123 186 368 416 fault threshold 123 186 368 416 484 fault timeout 123 186 368 416 484 faults count 91 372 warning enable 123 186 368 416 warning threshold 123 186 368 416 484 use 337 programming the Magelis XBTN410 343 user map addresses setting 453 494 user map values 453 494 V voltage average 82 411 481 L1 L2 80 411 481 L2 L3 80 411 481 L3 L1 80 411 481 phase imbalance 411 481 voltage highest imbalance L1 L2 482 L2 L3 482 L3 L1 482 voltage imbalance 81 voltage load shedding 191 configuration 484 voltage motor protection functions parameter setting ranges 122 voltage phase imbalance 81 94 177 fault enable 122 180 368 416 419 fault threshold 122 180 368 416 419 484 fault timeout running 122 180 368 416 419 484 fault timeout starting 122 180 368 416 419 484 faults count 91 371 n 0 373 420 469 n 1 374 421 470 n 2 375 471 n 3 376 472 n 4 377 473 warning enable 122 180 368 416 419 warning threshold 122 180 368 416 419 484 voltage phase loss 181 fault enable 122 182 368 416 419 fault timeout 122 182 368 416 419 484 faults count 91 372 warning enable 122 182 36
431. ult when the Long Start Fault Timeout is reached e If Long Start protection is disabled the LTM R controller does not signal a fault and the run cycle begins after the Long Start Fault Timeout has expired e Other motor protection functions begin their respective duration times after the Long Start Fault Timeout e The LTM R controller reports both the start cycle time and the maximum current detected during start cycle as 0000 indicating current never reached the fault threshold Start cycle with 0 threshold crosses l A Is K EEEN TE jute tits ma atest he Ma drain nathan ita etn deed ate apt A Woy ad fe ot tart time 10 FLC Start tim a k Long start fault timeout 1 p gt t t gt a gt q p Ready state Start state Fault condition Is Long start fault threshold 1639501 12 2006 221 Motor Control Functions 5 2 Operating Modes At a Glance Summary The LTM R controller can be configured to 1 of 10 predefined operating modes Selecting custom operating mode allows you to select one of the 10 predefined operating modes and tailor it to your specific application or to create an entirely new control program The selection of a predefined operating mode determines the behavior of all LTM R controller inputs and outputs Each predefined operating mode selection includes a control wiring selection e 2 wire maintained or e 3 wire impulse
432. up Main menu Contains optional settings read only statistics read only LTM R controller information and service commands Opens on power up if e SysConfig menu settings have been entered and saved and no fault is active Presentation mode HMI display Contains a scrolling list of dynamically changing values for pre selected variables Faults and warnings Contains a description of the most recently occurring fault or warning The LCD displays the SysConfig menu until its basic configuration settings have been entered and saved as part of the commissioning process When the SysConfig menu settings have been entered and saved the LTM R controller clears the Controller System Config Required parameter Thereafter the LCD can present any of the other displays After the SysConfig settings have been entered and saved the content of the LCD display can change as follows This LCD screen Is displayed Main Menu on power up if no fault exists or by pressing ENTER HMI display e automatically after the Main Menu has been displayed for 10 seconds with no key pressed or e by pressing ESC to close a fault or warning display Fault or warning automatically upon the occurrence of a fault or warning 1639501 12 2006 351 Use Configuration Mode LCD Presentation Mode LCD In configuration mode the LCD displays two 12 character li
433. up can be set to manual 1 2 3 4 or unlimited automatic reset attempts Resets Select 0 to disable automatic reset of protection fault groups and require a manual reset even though the Fault Reset Mode parameter is configured for automatic reset Select A to enable a unlimited auto reset attempts After the time delay has expired the LTM R controller continually attempts to reset every fault in that reset group 1639501 12 2006 261 Motor Control Functions Auto Reset Group 1 faults require a pre defined cooling time after the monitored parameter returns to Group 1 and falls below a pre defined threshold Group 1 faults include Thermal Overload and Motor Temp Sensor faults The cooling time delay is non configurable However you can e add to the cooling time delay by setting the Auto Reset Group 1 Timeout parameter to a value greater than 0 or e disable auto reset by setting the Auto Reset Group 1 Timeout parameter to 0 Auto reset group 1 has the following configurable parameters Parameters Setting range Factory setting Auto Reset Attempts Group 1 O manual 1 2 3 4 A unlimited A Setting number of reset attempts Auto Reset Group 1 Timeout 0 65535 s 480s Auto Reset Group 2 faults generally do not include a pre defined cooling time delay before a reset Group 2 can be executed but can be reset as soon as the fault condition clears Many group 2 faults can result in some motor overhe
434. ved from the control source e logic processing by the control or monitoring function e utilization of the processing results e activation of logic outputs e display of predefined messages e activation of LEDs e telecommunication signals TS sent via a communications link The control and monitoring function process is displayed below n Logic Logic Inputs B LTM R Logic Outputs gt TS Functions a A ASE TC Predefined OutputCommands t Control Monitoring gt o Funetions System Status HMI commands Signal LEDs gt Protection o Q Functions A gt Le qs I O Control Logic y t Custom Logic Equations a Predefined TC gt gt messages Logic Inputs and Outputs The LTM R controller provides 6 logic inputs 2 logic outputs 1 warning relay and 1 fault relay By adding an expansion module you can add 4 more logic inputs Selecting a predefined operating mode automatically assigns the logic inputs to functions and defines the relationship between logic inputs and outputs Using the custom logic editor you can change these assignments 224 1639501 12 2006 Motor Control Functions Predefined Operating Modes Overview The LTM R controller can be configured in 1 of 10 predefined operating modes Each operating mode is designed to meet the requirements of acommon application configuration When you select an operating mode you specify both the e operati
435. voltage fault amp g Ready state Run state gt AND OR V1 L1 L2 voltage V2 L2 L3 voltage V3 L3 L1 voltage Vs1 Warning threshold Vs2 Fault threshold T Fault timeout The undervoltage function has the following parameters Parameters Setting range Factory setting Fault enable Enable Disable Disable Fault timeout 0 2 25 s in 0 1 s increments 3s Fault threshold 70 99 of Motor nominal voltage 85 in 1 increments Warning enable Enable Disable Disable Warning threshold 70 99 of Motor nominal voltage 85 in 1 increments The undervoltage function has the following characteristics Characteristics Value Hysteresis 105 of Fault threshold or Warning threshold Trip time accuracy 0 1 s or 5 186 1639501 12 2006 Motor Protection Functions Example The following diagram describes the occurrence of a undervoltage fault v A Fault timeout Vs2 p Vs2 Undervoltage fault threshold 1639501 12 2006 187 Motor Protection Functions Overvoltage Description Functional Characteristics The overvoltage function signals e a warning when voltage in a phase exceeds a set threshold e a fault when voltage in a phase continuously exceeds a separately set threshold for a specified period of time This function has a single fault time delay Both the fault and warning thresholds are d
436. voltage in any composed phase differs by more than a set percentage from the average voltage in all 3 phases e afault when the voltage in any composed phase differs by more than a separately set percentage from the average voltage in all 3 phases for a set period of time Note A composed phase is the combined measure of two phases L1 L2 L2 L3 or L3 L1 This function has two adjustable fault time delays e one applies to voltage imbalances occurring while the motor is in start state and e one applies to voltage imbalances occurring while the motor is in run state or when the long start time duration expires Both timers begin if the imbalance is detected in start state Note Use this function to detect and guard against smaller voltage phase imbalances For larger imbalances in excess of 40 of the average voltage in all 3 phases use the voltage phase loss motor protection function This function is available in start state and run state when the LTM R controller is connected to an expansion module The function identifies the phase causing a voltage imbalance If the maximum deviation from the 3 phase voltage average is the same for two phases the function identifies both phases Fault and warning monitoring can be separately enabled and disabled The function applies only to 3 phase motors 1639501 12 2006 177 Motor Protection Functions Functional Characteristics The voltage p
437. wo Speed Mode Wiring Diagrams Separate Winding 549 Sai aan i mi eH ea a ee ee 551 wats a ana she de iw Ee TR ve es a ence ca SR a 557 Safety Information WAA Important Information NOTICE Read these instructions carefully and look at the equipment to become familiar with the device before trying to install operate or maintain it The following special messages may appear throughout this documentation or on the equipment to warn of potential hazards or to call attention to information that clarifies or simplifies a procedure The addition of this symbol to a Danger or Warning safety label indicates A that an electrical hazard exists which will result in personal injury if the instructions are not followed This is the safety alert symbol It is used to alert you to potential personal injury hazards Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol to avoid possible injury or death A DANGER DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in death or serious injury A WARNING WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided can result in death serious injury or equipment damage A CAUTION CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided can result in injury or equipment damage 1639501 12 2006 Safety Information PLEASE NOTE Electrical equipment should be i
438. work or local HMI control modes the Motor Run Forward Command parameter controls logic outputs O 1 and 0 2 The Motor Run Reverse Command parameter is ignored e Logic outputs O 1 and O 2 deactivate and the motor stops when control voltage becomes too low e Logic outputs 0 1 0 2 and O 4 deactivate and the motor stops in response to a diagnostic error Note See Control Wiring and Fault Management p 228 for information about the interaction between e the LTM R controller s predefined control logic and e the control wiring an example of which appears in the following diagrams 1639501 12 2006 241 Motor Control Functions Two Step The following wiring diagram represents a simplified example of the LTM R Wye Delta controller in a two step Wye Delta local control 3 wire impulse application Application Diagram Start Stop E ue omer om orn oro on Orne 1 The N C interlock contacts KM1 and KM3 are not mandatory because the LTM R controller electronically interlocks O 1 and O 2 For additional examples of two step Wye Delta IEC diagrams see p 521 For examples of two step Wye Delta NEMA diagrams see p 541 242 1639501 12 2006 Motor Control Functions Two Step The following wiring diagram represents a simplified example of the LTM R Primary Resistor controller in a two step local control 3 wire impulse primary r
439. xisting application click OK to continue the export The HMI LCD indicates DOWNLOAD IN PROGRESS and then DOWNLOAD COMPLETED 9 Click OK when the programming software reports Transfer accomplished successfully 1639501 12 2006 347 Use 8 4 Using the Magelis XBTN410 HMI 1 to 1 At a Glance Summary This section shows you how to use the Magelis XBTN410 HMI to operate a single LTM R controller in a 1 HMI to 1 LTM R controller 1 to 1 configuration See p 391 for instructions on how to use a single Magelis XBTN410 HMI to operate up to 8 LTM R controllers in a 1 to many configuration The 1 to 1 and the 1 to many configurations each present a unique e user interface LCD display and keypad e menu structure What s in this This section contains the following topics Section Topic Page Physical Description 1 to 1 349 LCD Display 1 to 1 351 Navigating the Menu Structure 1 to 1 357 Editing Values 1 to 1 358 Menu Structure 1 to 1 362 Main Menu 1 to 1 363 Main Menu Settings 1 to 1 364 Main Menu Statistics 1 to 1 371 Main Menu Product ID 1 to 1 378 Monitoring Using the Scrolling HMI Display 1 to 1 379 Main Menu Services 1 to 1 382 Fault Management 1 to 1 386 HMI Keypad Control 1 to 1 389 348 1639501 12 2006 Use Physical Description 1 to 1 1 to 1 Interface In a 1 to 1 physical configurati
440. y motor temperature sensor function includes the following features Characteristics e 2 function output e Motor Temp Sensor Warning e Motor Temp Sensor Fault e 1 counting statistic e Motor Temp Sensor Faults Count Block Diagram Motor temperature sensor fault warning o gt 0 gt 29000 t Motor temperature sensor fault warning PTC Binary Temperature sensing element resistance 1639501 12 2006 167 Motor Protection Functions Parameter The PTC binary motor temperature sensor function has the following non Settings configurable parameter settings Parameter Fixed setting Accuracy Fault Warning threshold 2900 Q 2 Fault Warning re closing threshold 1575 Q 2 Function The PTC binary motor temperature sensor function has the following characteristics Characteristics Characteristic Value Tripping time 0 5 0 6 s Trip time accuracy 0 1 s Example The following diagram describes the occurrence of a PTC binary motor temp sensor fault with an automatic reset A Fault and warning o Run state condition Run state resume lt 4 29009 5 k N0 toot 15750 aye 2900Q Fault threshold 1575Q Fault re closing threshold Reset This marks the time after which a reset can be executed A start command is required before run state can be resumed In this example auto reset has been enabled

TeSys T LTM R Modbus Motor Management Controller User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents